The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutFCI Constructors; 2004-04-13; 3907 Part 2 of 4SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR RANCHO SANTA FE ROAD NORTH, PHASE 2 CONTRACT NO. 3907 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 1 - TERMS, DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 1-1 TERMS Add the following section: 1-1.1 Reference to Drawings. Where words "shown", "indicated", "detailed", "noted", "scheduled", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference is made to the plans accompanying these provisions, unless stated otherwise. Add the following section: 1-1.2 Directions. Where words "directed", "designated", "selected", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, designation or selection of the Engineer is intended, unless stated otherwise. The word "required" and words of similar import shall be understood to mean "as required to properly complete the work as required and as approved by the Engineer," unless stated otherwise. Add the following section: 1-1.3 Equals and Approvals. Where the words "equal", "approved equal", "equivalent", and such words of similar import are used, it shall be understood such words are followed by the expression "in the opinion of the Engineer, unless otherwise stated. Where the words "approved", "approval", "acceptance", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval, acceptance, or similar import of the Engineer is intended. Add the following section: 1-1.4 Perform. The word "perform" shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall perform all operations, labor, tools and equipment, and further, including the furnishing and installing of materials that are indicated, specified or required to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shalt furnish and install the work, complete in place and ready to use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation. 1-2 DEFINITIONS Modify as follows: The following words, or groups of words, shall be exclusively defined by the definitions assigned to them herein. Agency -the City of Carlsbad, California City Council - the City Council of the City of Carlsbad AND Board of Directors - the Board of Directors 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 90 of 414 of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. City Manager - the City Manager of the City of Carlsbad or hisher approved representative. Dispute Board - persons designated by the City Manager to hear and advise the City Manager on claims submitted by the Contractor. The City Manager is the last appeal level for informal dispute resolution. Engineer - the Deputy Public Works Director - Engineering of the City of Carlsbad or hidher approved representative. Minor Bid Item - a single contract item constituting less than 10 percent (10%) of the original Contract Price bid. Own Organization - When used in Section 2-3.1 - Employees of the Contractor who are hired, directed, supervised and paid by the Contractor to accomplish the completion of the Work. Further, such employees have their employment taxes, State disability insurance payments, State and Federal income taxes paid and administered, as applicable, by the Contractor. When used in Section 2-3.1 "own organization" means construction equipment that the Contractor owns or leases and uses to accomplish the Work. Equipment that is owner operated or leased equipment with an operator is not part of the Contractor's Own Organization and will not be included for the purpose of compliance with section 2-3.1 of the Standard Specifications and these Supplemental Provisions. Owner Operator/Lessor - Any person who provides equipment or tools with an operator provided who is employed by neither the Contractor nor a subcontractor and is neither an agent nor employee of the Agency or a public utility. Public Works Manager - the Engineer's designated representative for inspection, contract administration and second level for informal dispute resolution. Construction Manager - the Project Inspector's immediate supervisor and first level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. 1-3 ABBREVIATIONS 1-3.2 Common Usage. add the following: Abbreviation Word or Words AAW ....................................... Automatic Air & Vacuum Valve AB ............................................ Abandon ADA ......................................... Americans with Disabilities Act ANSI ........................................ American National Standards Institute ASTM ....................................... American Society for Testing and Materials AVE .......................................... Avenue AWA ..................................... American Water works Association BC ............................................ Beginning Curve or Box to Conduit BFM ......................................... Bonded Fiber Matrix Bldg ......................................... Building and Buildings BO ........................................... Blow-off Assembly C .............................................. Conduit CCB ......................................... Construction Criteria Base Ctd .......................................... Coated cfs ............................................ cubic feet per second CHKD ...................................... Checked CL ............................................ Class CMP ......................................... Corrugated Metal Pipe CMWD ..................................... Carlsbad Municipal Water District CML ........................................ Cement Mortar Lined G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 91 of 414 Comm ...................................... Commercial CON ......................................... Conductor CSSD ....................................... Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings CSP ........................................ Corrugated Steel Pipe DI ............................................. Ductile Iron DIM .......................................... Dimension DIP ........................................... Ductile Iron Pipe DLC ......................................... Detector Loop Cable DR ........................................... Dimension Ratio DWN ........................................ Drawn E .............................................. East E .............................................. Electric EB ............................................ East Bound ELL .......................................... 'L' Shaped Elbow ETW ......................................... Edge of traveled way; outside edge of roadway for the movement of EVPE ....................................... Emergency Vehicle Pre-emption Equipment EX ............................................ Existing EXP ......................................... Expires FIP ........................................... Female Iron Pipe FLG .......................................... Flange fps ............................................ feet per second FRP ......................................... Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic G .............................................. Gas gal ............................................ Gallon and Gallons GB ........................................... Grade Break GNV ......................................... Ground Not Visible gpm .......................................... gallons per minute IE ............................................. Invert Elevation HSNS ....................................... Internally Illuminated Street Name Sign I M PR.. ...................................... Improvements LLV .......................................... Long Leg Vertical LOC ......................................... Location LUM ......................................... Luminaire LT ............................................. Left MAR ......................................... Manual Air Release Valve MFS ......................................... Modified Fixed Conduit Support MILS ........................................ Millimeters MIN .......................................... Minimum MIP .......................................... Male Iron Pipe MSL ......................................... Mean Sea Level (see Regional Standard Drawing M-12) MTBM ...................................... Microtunneling Boring Machine N .............................................. North NACE ....................................... National Association of Corrosion Engineers NB ............................................ North Bound NCTD ....................................... North County Transit District NEMA ...................................... National Electrical Manufacturers Association NTS ......................................... Not to Scale No ............................................ Number OG ........................................... Original Ground OHE ................... : ..................... Overhead Electric PG ........................................... Profile Grade PPB ......................................... Pedestrian Pushbutton ESA ......................................... Environmentally Sensitive Area et seq ....................................... et sequens - and the following vehicles, exclusive of shoulders 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 92 of 414 "I P R ............................................ Pressure Reducing PV ............................................ Programmable Visibility PVC-PP ................................... Polyvinyl Chloride - Pressure Pipe REC ......................................... Recorded ROW ........................................ Right-of-way RS ............................................ Remove and Salvage RT ............................................ Right RVWD ...................................... Reviewed S .............................................. Sewer or Slope, as applicable S .............................................. South SB ............................................ South Bound SCH ......................................... Schedule SCH ......................................... Splice Conductors SDNR ...................................... San Diego Northern Railway SDRSD .................................... San Diego Regional Standard Drawing(s) SE ............................................ Sand Equivalent SFM ......................................... Sewer Force Main SHLDR .................................... Shoulder; portion of the roadway contiguous with the traveled way for accommodation of stopped vehicles, for emergency use, and for lateral support of base and surface courses SIG .......................................... Signal SS ............................................ Stainless Steel SWPPP .................................... Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan SQ ........................................... Square STA PT .................................... Station Point ST ............................................ Street SXT .......................................... Slip by Thread T .............................................. Tangent T .............................................. Telephone T .............................................. Thickness related to a specific detail TEE .......................................... 'T Shaped THD ......................................... Thread or Threaded TOC ......................................... Top of Concrete TS ............................................ Tubular Steel TW .......................................... Tape Wrapped UE ............................................ Underground Electric UL ............................................ Underwriters Laboratories Inc. VWD ........................................ Vallecitos Water District W ............................................. Water, Wider or Width, as applicable W ............................................. West WB ........................................... West Bound WI ............................................ With X .............................................. A dimension related to a specific detail Y .............................................. A dimension related to a specific detail YR ............................................ Year RWGV ..................................... Resilient Wedge Gate Valve . TP ............................................ Top of Pipe Delete the following section and add the following: 14.1 General. The U.S. Standard Measures, also called U.S. Customary System, is the principal measurement system in these specifications and shall be used for construction. The Standard Specifications includes the International System of Units, also referred to as the SI or metric system and U.S. Standard Measures in parenthesis. The U.S. Standard Measures and the SI Unites may or may not be exactly equivalent. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 93 of 414 Reference is also made to ASTM E 380 for definitions of various units of the SI system and a more extensive set of conversion factors. '3 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 94 of 414 J- SECTION 2 - SCOPE AND CONTROL OF THE WORK 2-3 SUBCONTRACTS 2-3.1 General. Add the following: Should the Contractor fail to adhere to the provisions requiring the Contractor to complete 50 percent of the contract price with its own organization, the Agency may at its sole discretion elect to cancel the contract or to deduct an amount equal to 10 percent of the value of the work performed in excess of 50 percent of the contract price by other than the Contractor's own organization. The City Council shall be the sole body for determination of a violation of these provisions. In any proceedings under this section, the prime contractor shall be entitled to a public hearing before the City Council and shall be notified ten (10) days in advance of the time and location of said hearing. The determination of the City Council shall be final. 2-4 CONTRACT BONDS Modify the second sentence of paragraph one as follows: U.S. Department of Treasury Circular 570,". Delete, "who is listed in the latest version of Modify paragraphs three and four to read: The Contractor shall provide a faithful performance/warranty bond and payment bond (labor and materials bond) for this contract. The faithful performance/warranty bond shall be in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price. The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers, in an amount equal to: 1) One hundred percent (100%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total amount payable does not exceed five million dollars ($5,000,000). 2) Fifty percent (50%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract when the total amount payable is not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) and does not exceed ten million dollars 3) Twenty-five percent (25%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract if the contract exceeds ten million dollars ($lO,OOO,OOO). Both bonds shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the Agency during this project until they are released according to the provisions of this section. ($1 0,000,000). The faithful performancehvarranty bond will be reduced to 25 percent of the original amount 30 days after recordation of the Notice of Completion and will remain in full force and effect for the one year warranty period and until all warranty repairs are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers shall be released six months plus 30 days after recordation of the Notice of Completion if all claims have been paid. Add the following: All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following documents: 1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other 2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner. instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. If the bid is accepted, the Agency may require a financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the insurer at the end of the quarter calendar year prior to 30 days next preceding the date of the execution of the bond. The financial statement shall be made by an officer's certificate as defined in Section 173 of the Corporations Code. In the case of a foreign insurer, the financial statement may be verified by the oath of the principal officer or manager residing within the United States. - e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 95 of 414 2-5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 2-5.1 General. Add the following: The specifications for the work include the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (SSPWC), 2003 Edition, hereinafter designated "SSPWC", as written and promulgated by Joint Cooperative Committee of the Southern California Chapter American Public Works Association and Southem California Districts Associated General Contractors of California, and as amended by the Supplemental Provisions section of this contract. The construction plans consist of 1 set. The set is designated as City of Carlsbad Drawing No. 368-26, and consists of 184 sheets. The standard drawings used for this project are the latest edition of the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings, hereinafter designated SDRS, as issued by the San Diego County Department of Public Works, together with the most recent editions of the City of Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings, hereinafter designated as CSSD, as issued by the City of Carlsbad, the Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Plans hereinafter designated as CMWDSD, as issued by the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, and other reference standards listed below. Copies of some of the pertinent standard drawings are enclosed as an appendix to these Supplemental Provisions. 2-5.1 .I Reference Specifications. Standards listed as "Reference Specifications" in the various sections of these contract documents are hereby incorporated into this specification by reference. Referenced documents shall indude all revisions, amendments, supplements or addenda issued on or before the date of advertising for bids. The Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standards, Reclaimed Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, and Standard Drawings, latest edition at time of bid receipt, are incorporated into these contract documents by their reference herein and will be enforced unless superseded by the project specifications or specific details of the contract documents. The Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Material List, latest edition at time of bid receipt, are incorporated into these contract documents by their reference herein and will be enforced unless superseded by the project specifications or specific details of the contract documents. 2-5.1.2 Approved Materials List Related to Recycled Water improvements. All the material used on Schedule D of this project, including pipe, valves, couplings etc., shall be in accordance with either: 1. Items listed in the Carlsbad Municipal Water District Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, and the Standard Drawings, 2. The latest edition at time of bid receipt or the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials list Depending on the jurisdiction as identified on the contract plans. All the material used on Schedule C and E of this project, including pipe, valves, couplings etc., shall be in accordance with items listed in the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials list. Materials referenced in the standard may be used on this project. Materials not on the list must be submitted for approval in accordance with established procedure, and shall be accepted for use on this project prior to its purchase and installation as part of the work of this contract. 2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. Modify as follows: If there is a conflict between Contract Documents, the document highest in precedence shall control. The precedence shall be the most recent edition of the following documents listed in order of highest to lowest precedence: I. II. Supplemental Provisions. Ill. Plans. IV. Standard Plans and Specifications. Permits from other agencies as may be required by law. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 96 of 414 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. V. .VI. VII. VIII. City of Carlsbad Supplemental Standard Drawings. Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Drawings. City of Carlsbad Modifications to the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. Vallecitos Water District Standard Specifications for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities. Vallecitos Water District Standard Drawings. San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans. Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. State of California, Department of Transportation, (CALTRANS), Standard Specifications. Reference Specifications. Manufacturer‘s Installation Recommendations. Change Orders, Supplemental Agreements and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will take precedence over items 2) through 7) above. Detailed plans and plan views shall have precedence over general plans. 2-5.3.3 Submittals. Add the following: Each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Resubmittals shall be labeled with the number of the original submittal followed by an ascending numerical designation (e.9. the label ‘4-3 would indicate the third instance that the fourth submittal had been given to the Engineer). Each sheet of each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Each set of shop drawings and submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal on the Contractor’s letterhead. The Letter of transmittal shall contain the following: Project title and contract number. Number of complete sets. Contractor‘s certification statement. Specification section number(s) pertaining to material submitted for review. Submittal number (Submittal numbers shall be consecutive including subsequent resubmittals for the same materials.) Description of the contents of the submittal. Identification of deviations from the contract documents. When submitted for the Engineer‘s review, submittals and shop drawings shall bear the Contractor’s certification that the Contractor has reviewed, checked, and approved the submittals and shop drawings and that they are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall subscribe to and shall place the following certification on all Submittals and shop drawings: ”I hereby certify that the (equipment, material) shown and marked in this submittal or shop drawing is that proposed to be incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract Documents, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is submitted for review.” By: Title: Date: Company Name: Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 97 of 414 2-5.3.3.1 Submittals Relating to Potable, Recycled Water, and Sewer Improvements. The shop drawings relating to potable and recycled water, and sewer improvements that shall be submitted to the Engineer for review shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Ductile Iron Pipe CL 250 and CL 300 PVC Water Pipe C900 and C905 Combination Air and Vacuum Relief Valve Assemblies Valve and Valve Boxes l-Inch Service and Fittings Trench Shoring Details and Excavation Plans Ductile Iron Fittings Steel Pipe Blowoff Assemblies Double Ball Expansion Joints Paint and coatings Pressure Reducing Valve Pressure Relief Valve Pre-Cast Concrete Vault and Hatch CMUC Steel Fittings Polyethylene Tube Wrap Gate Valves Electrical and Telemetry Equipment Pressure and Leak Testing Plan Schedule of Required Shutdowns The Contractor shall submit seven copies of submittals unless otherwise stated. Three copies will be returned to the Contractor. 2-5.3.3.2 Submittal / Shop Drawing Transmittal Form. The form included at the end of this section shall be used unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Submit a separate form for each submittal and shop drawing number. Submittals and shop drawings without completed Contractor's Transmittal Forms will be returned without review and stamped "REJECTED". Exceptions and departures from Contract Documents shall be clearly noted, along with justification for each exception or departure. Otherwise, review or approval of submittals and shop drawings shall not constitute approval of exceptions or departures. Stock or standard drawings will not be accepted for review unless full identification and supplementary information is shown thereon in ink or typewritten form. Review of submittals shall proceed as follows: 1) Submit specified quantity of complete submittals / shop drawings together with Submittal / Shop Drawing Transmittal Forms to the Engineer for review. Fold submittals to approximately 9-inches by 12-inches. 2) Submittals will be stamped "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN", "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED", "AMEND AND RESUBMIT", or "REJECTED - RESUBMIT". Three copies with letter of transmittal will be returned to Contractor. 3) If drawing or data is stamped "AMEND AND RESUBMIT" or "REJECTED - RESUBMIT", make necessary corrections and resubmit documents as required in Instruction 1. The Submittal / Shop Drawing Transmittal Form transmitting revised documents shall show what documents comprise a resubmittal. 4) If changes other than those noted by the Engineer are made on a submittal before resubmittal, note such changes on resubmittal. 5) Revise and resubmit submittals as required, until confirmation of compliance is obtained. 2-5.3.4 Shop Drawings And Product Data Relating to Potable and Recycled Water, and Sewer Improvements. Shop drawings shall clearly show dimensions, clearances, slopes, floor space requirements, tolerances, conduit, anchor bolt sizes and embedments, finishes, performance characteristics, and weight and type of products. Shop drawings shall indicate the location at which products are to be installed, how equipment will be mounted, how it relates to adjacent structures or products, and how connection will be made between Work under this contract and work under other contracts. Shop drawings shall show parts lists and details of appurtenances to be furnished with specified items, along with references to 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 98 of 414 appropriate ASTM, Federal Specifications and other reference standards and grades. Use of contract drawing reproductions for shop drawings is subject to rejection. Catalog data shall clearly indicate applicable items when several products are covered on one page. Using black ink, indicate on submitted catalog data, specification section or plan reference being satisfied. Installation or Application Instructions shall be manufacturer's printed instructions including warranty requirements, clearances required and proper field procedures to deliver, handle, install and prepare product for use. In the absence of manufacturer's published literature, ASTM, AWWA or trade standards for proper installation will be accepted. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be manufacturer's printed instructions for correct operation and maintenance procedures for product, along with data which must accompany manual as directed by current regulations of government agency. Include operating instructions for each piece of equipment. Describe equipment function, operating characteristics, limiting conditions, operating instructions, startup procedures, normal and emergency conditions, regulation and control, and shutdown. Include preventative maintenance instructions. List warranty requirements. Explain and illustrate preventative maintenance tasks. Include lubrication charts, lists of acceptable lubricants, trouble shooting instructions, and lists of required maintenance tools and equipment. List recommended spare parts, their costs, and ordering information for 1 manufacturer who can supply these parts. Index instructions for easy reference. Include information for installed equipment only. Manufacturer's Statement of Responsibility shall be copy of form attached, signed by authorized factory representative for manufacturer whose product is being furnished. Certification of Compliance shall certiQ materials have been sampled, tested and found to comply with applicable reference standards. Engineering Calculations shall be clearly legible, and shall demonstrate compliance with state and local codes, applicable standards, and contract requirements. Calculations shall be sealed by a licensed engineer. Add the following: 2-5.4 Record Drawings, The Contractor shall provide and keep up-todate a complete "as-built" record set of blue-line prints, which shall be corrected in red daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact "as-built" locations, sizes and kinds of equipment, underground piping, valves, and all other work not visible at surface grade. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Agency. This set of drawings shall be kept on the job and shall be used only as,a record set and shall be delivered to the Engineer within ten (IO) days of completion of the work. Payment for performing the work required by section 2-5.4 shall be included in the various bid items and no additional payment will be made therefor. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 99 of 414 SUBMITTAUSHOP DRAWING TRANSMllTAL FORM FROM: DATE: PROJECT NAME: Rancho Santa Fe Road North Phase 2 (Bid Schedule A TO: Citv of Carlsbad PROJECT NO.: Contract No. 3907 1645 South Rancho Santa Fe Road. Ste 202 San Marcos, CA 92069 OWNER: ATTN: Construction Manaoer SUBMllTAL NO.: NO.: THIS IS AN ORIGINAL SUBMllTAL THIS IS A REVISION OF SUBMITTTAL SUBJECT OF SUBMITTAL: SPEC I FI CATION SECTION (S) : PLAN SHEET NUMBER(S): CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION: Check & Complete either (A) or (B) below: -(A) We have reviewed in detail and certify that the material, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all the reauirements specified in or shown on the Contract Documents, Construction Specifications and Construction Plans with no exceptions. We have reviewed in detail and certify that the material, equipment or construction procedure(s) contained in this submittal meet all the requirements specified in or shown on the Contract Documents, Construction Specifications and Construction Plans exceDt for the followino deviations: -(B) CONTRACTOR’S AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE: # 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 100 of 414 2-7 SUBSURFACE DATA Add the following: A geotechnical investigation of the type of soils to be encountered along the proposed alignment has been performed for the purpose of assisting in the design of the planned improvements. A geotechnical design report, dated July 2000 (revised November 28, 2000), a structure foundation investigation, dated July 2000, and a geotechnical investigation for the retaining wall at the ‘WVD2’ sewer access road, dated December 2002, was developed for this project by Geocon, Inc., and is available for review at the City. The Contractor is made aware that excavations into the Santiago Formation and Santiago Peak Volcanics will require blasting and hydraulic rock breakers or jackhammers. The Contractor shall be satisfied of the site conditions and be responsible for including any and all costs in his bid to properly construct the project with the existing soil conditions. 2-9 SURVEYING 2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers. Delete sections 2-9.1 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall not cover or disturb permanent survey monuments or benchmarks without the consent of the Engineer. Where the Engineer concurs, in writing, with the Contractor that protecting an existing monument in place is impractical, the Contractor shall employ a licensed land surveyor or a registered civil engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California, hereinafter Surveyor, to establish the location of the monument before it is disturbed. The Contractor shall have the monument replaced by the Surveyor no later than thirty (30) days after construction at the site of the replacement is completed. The Surveyor shall file comer record(s) as required by QQ 8772 and 8773, et seq. of the California Business and Professions Code. When a change is made in the finished elevation of the pavement of any roadway in which a permanent survey monument is located, the Contractor shall adjust the monument frame and cover to the new grade within 7 days of paving unless the Engineer shall approve otherwise. Monument frames and covers shall be protected during street sealing or painting projects or be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2-9.2 Survey Service. Delete sections 2-9.2 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall hire and pay for the services of a licensed land surveyor or a registered civil engineer authorized to practice land surveying within the State of California, hereinafier called Surveyor, to perform all work necessary for establishing control, construction staking, records research and all other surveying work necessary to construct the work, provide surveying services as required herein and provide surveying, drafting and other professional services required to satisfy the requirements of the Land Surveyors Act. Surveyor shall be resident on the site during all surveying operations and shall personally supervise and certify the surveying work. Add the following section: 2-9.2.1 Submittal of Surveying Data. All surveying data submittals shall conform to the requirements of section 2-5.3.3, “Submittals”, herein. The Contractor shall submit grade sheets to the Engineer before commencing work in the area affected by the grade sheets. The Contractor shall submit field notes for all surveying required herein to the Engineer within ten days of performing the survey. All surveying field notes, grade sheets and survey calculations shall be submitted in bound form on 215mm by 280 mm (8’/21) by 11”) paper. The field notes, calculations and supporting data shall be clear and complete. Supporting data shall include all maps, affidavits, plats, field notes from earlier surveys and all other evidence used by the Surveyor to determine the location of the monuments set. The field notes and calculations will be labeled with name of the Surveyor, the party chief, field crew members and preparer of the field notes or calculations. They shall be annotated with the date of observation or calculation, be numbered with consecutive page numbers and shall be readable without resort to any electronic aid, computer program or documentation for any computer program. The field notes shall be prepared in conformance with the CALTRANS “Surveys Manual”. The Contractor shall have a Record of Survey prepared by the Surveyor and file it in conformance with QQ 8700 - 8805 of the State of California Business and Professions Code when the Surveyor performs any surveying that such map is required under QQ 8762 of the State of California Business and Professions Code and whenever the Surveyor . 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 101 of 414 shall establish, set or construct any permanent survey monument. SDRSD drawing M-10 type monuments, bolts, spikes, leaded tacks and nails (when set in concrete), iron pipes, reinforcing steel and all monuments and marks that are at, or accessory to, property comers and street centerlines are permanent survey monuments. The Record of Survey shall show all monuments set, control monuments used, the basis of bearings and all other data needed to determine the procedure of survey and the degree of accuracy attained by the field surveying including the unadjusted ratio of closure. The unadjusted ratio of closure shall not exceed 1 part in 40,000. The record of survey shall show the location and justification of location of all permanent monuments set and their relation to the street right- of-way. Record(s) of Survey(s) shall be submitted for the Engineer's review and approval before . submittal to the County Surveyor and before submittal to the County Recorder. Lateral Spacing a, Q on street centerline at clearing line Grade Breaks & 17.6 m (25') N/A ( constant offset) Add the following section: 2-9.2.2 Survey Requirements. Stakes shall be set at offsets approved by the Engineer at no greater intervals than specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(A) as measured along the project stationing. Stakes shall be set to show the location and grade of future curbs adjacent to traffic signal locations where the curb is not being built as a part of this contract. Staking and marking shall be completed by the Surveyor and inspected and approved by the Engineer before the start of construction in the area marked. Centerline monument shall have the disk stamped with the date the monument was set and the registration number of the Surveyor. Habitat mitigation sites and other areas to be preserved that are shown on the plans shall be staked and flagged prior to the start of any other activities within the limits of the work. When curb and gutter does not exist and is not being installed as a part of the project the location of adjacent facilities being constructed as a part of the contract the Contractor shall place stakes defining the horizontal and vertical location of such adjacent utility vaults, poles or other facilities that are being installed as parts of, or adjunct to, the project either by the Contractor and/or those noted on the plans as to be installed by others. Minimum requirements are as follows: Setting Tolerance (Within) 7 rnrn (0.02') Horizontal, also see section 2-9.2.1 herein 0.3 rn (1') Horizontal 30 rnm (0.1') Vertical & Horizontal 30 rnrn (0.1') Horizontal TABLE 2-9.2.2(A) Survey Requirements for Construction Staking Clearing I Slope Feature Staked enterline or Parallel to Centerline Spacing@, Q Lath in soil, painted line on PCC & AC continuous surfaces RP + Marker lath - Intervisible, 1 15m (50') on tangents 8 I 7.51-17 (25') on curves, Painted line - lntervisible and 5 15m (50') Street Centerline Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake, Blue- top in grading area RP, paint on previous course 1300m (1 OOO'), Street Intersections, Begin and SDRSM-10 Monument I end of curves, only when shown on the plans .. I 60 m (200') on tangents, I 15m (50') on curve! when Rr 300rn (1000') & 7.5m (25') on curves when RI 300rn (1 000') I 15m (50') I 15 m (50) on tangents & curves when R2 300rn (1000') 8 s 7.5rn (25') on curves when R 2 300m (1 000') I 7.5m (25') or as per the intersection grid point! shown on the plan whichever provides the denser information N/A ~6.7 rn (22') edge of pavement, paving pass width, crown line & grade Fence 30 rnrn (0.1') Vertical & Horizontal 10 mm (3/8") Horizontal & 7 rnm (1/4") Vertical 10 rnm (3/8") Horizontal & 7 rnm (1/4") vertical Rough Grade Cuts or Fills t 10 m (33') Final Grade (includes top of Basement soil, subbase and base) Asphalt Pavement Finish Course 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 102 of 414 ~ Feature Staked Drainage Structures, Pipes & similar FacilitiesO, a curb Traffic Signal 0 Conduit CD Minor Structure 0 Abutment Fill Wall 0 Major Structure d Footings, Bents, Abutments 8 Wingwalls Superstructures Miscellaneous Contour Grading Q - Utilities 0, 0 Channels, Dikes & Ditches 0 Signs 0 Subsurface Drains 0 Overside Drains 0 Markers 0 Railings & Baniek 0 AC Dikes 0 7/31/02 Stake Description Q RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Point +Guard Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Point +Guard Stake RP RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake + Line Point +Guard Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake RP + Marker Stake :enterline or Parallel to Centerline Spacing@, 0 intervisible 8 I 7.5rn (25'), beginning and end, BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities, Risers & similar facilities (except plumbing), Skewed cut4 lines 2 7.5117 (25'), BC & EC, at %A, 'A & "A on curb returns & at beginning & end Vertical locations shall be based on the ultimate elevation of curb and sidewalk at each pole & controller location at each junction box location I 15 m (50') on tangents & curves when R2 300rn (I 000) & I 7.5rn (25') on curves when R 5 300rn (1 000') or where grade 5 0.30% or catch basins: at centerline of box, ends of bon & wings & at each end of the local depression I I 15 rn (50) & along end slopes & conic transitions ~~ I 15 rn (50) and atbeginning & end of: each wall, BC & EC, layout line angle points, changes n footing dimensions &/or elevation & wall heighl 3 rn to 10 rn (10 to 33) as required by the Engineer, BC & EC, transition points & at minning & end. Elevation points on footings at - - bottom of columns 3 rn to 10 rn (1 0 to 33) sufficient to use string lines, BC & EC, transition points & at beginning & end. Elevation points on footings at bottom of - columns 5 15 rn (50) I 15 rn (50) on tangents & curves when R2 300rn (1000') 8 s 7.5rn (25) on curves when R 5 300rn (1OOO') or where grade I 0.30% intervisible & 5 30 rn (1 OO'), BC & EC of facilities Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities At sign location intervisible 8 I 15rn (50), BC & EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities, Risers & similar facilitia longitudinal location for asphalt street surfacing 5 15 rn (50) on tangents & curves when R2 300rn (IOOO') & 5 7.5rn (25') on curves when R 5 300rn (I 000). At beginning & end and I 15 rn (50') on tangents & curves when R 2 300rn (1 OW) & 5 7.5rn (25') on curves when R I 300rn (1000) At beginning & end Lateral Spacing 0, Q as appropriate ( constant offset) as appropriate as appropriate as appropriate as appropriate as appropriate as appropriate aS appropriate as appropriate along contour line as appropriate as appropriate Line point as appropriate At beginning 8 end At marker location(s) at railing 8 barrier location(s) as appropriate Setting Tolerance (Within) 10 mm ("/e") Horizontal & 7 rnrn (1/4") vertical 10 mrn ("/e") Horizontal & 7 rnrn ('/4") Vertical 10 rnm ("/a;) Horizontal & 7 mrn ( /A") Vertical 10 mrn ("/E") Horizontal & 7 rnrn ('/4") vertical 10 rnrn ("le") Horizontal L when depth cannot be measured from existing pavement 7 rnrn ('14") Vertical 10 rnrn ("/E") Horizontal & 7 rnrn ('/4") vertical (when vertical data needed) 30 mrn (0.1') Vertical & Horizontal 7 rnm ( 1/4") Horizontal & 7 rnrn ('/4*) Vertical 10 rnrn ("/a;) Horizontal & 7 rnrn ( /do) Vertical 10 rnrn ("/S;) Horizontal &7 rnrn ( /4") Vertical 30 rnrn (0.1') Vertical & Horizontal 10 rnrn ("/e") Horizontal & 7 rnrn ('/4") Vertical 30 rnrn (0.1') Horizontal & 7 rnrn ('/,") vertical 30 mrn (0.1') Vertical & Horizontal 30 rnrn (0.1') Horizontal & 7 mrn ('/A") vertical 30 rnrn (0.1 '1 Horizontal & 7 rnm ('/:I vettical 7 rnrn ('/4.) Horizontal 10 rnrn (YE") Horizontal & Vertical 30 rnrn (0.1') Horizontal & Vertical Contract No. 3907 Page 103 of 414 Feature Staked Stake Centerline or Parallel to Centerline Spacing@, Lateral Description Q Spacing 0, Q 3 m to 10 m (10 to 33) as required by the as appropriate Engineer, BC & EC, transition points & at beginning & end. Elevation points on footings & at invert when R 2 300m (1000) & 7.5m (25') on curves when R I 300m (1000) For PCC surfaced streets lane cold joints will suffice @ Box Culverts Pavement RP 60 m (200') on tangents, 15m (50) on wwes at pavement Markersm marker iocation(s) Add the following section: 2-9.2.3 Payment for Survey. Payment for work performed to satisfy the requirements of Sections 2- 9.1 through 2-9.3.2, including Record of Survey, shall be included in the actual bid items requiring the survey work and no additional payment will be made. Extension of unit prices for extra work shall include full compensation for attendant survey work and no additional payment will be made therefor. Payment for the replacement of disturbed monuments and destroyed staking and the filing of records of survey and/or comer records, including filing fees therefor, shall be incidental to the work necessitating the disturbance of said monuments and no additional payment will be made therefor. Payment for adjust permanent survey monument frame and cover to grade shall be paid as adjust manhole and inlet to grade. - Setting Tolerance (Within) 10 rnm (%") Horizontal & 7 mm ('I,.) vertical 7 mrn ('h") Horizontal 2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER Add the following section: 2-10.1 Availability of Records. The Contractor shall, at no charge to the Agency, provide copies of all records in the Contractor's or subcontractor's possession pertaining to the work that the Engineer may 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 104 of 414 request. Add the following section: 2-10.2 Audit And Inspection. Contractor agrees to maintain and/or make available, to the Engineer, within San Diego County, accurate books and accounting records relative to all its activities and to contractually require all subcontractors to this Contract to do the same. The Engineer shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor's and its subcontractors performance pursuant to this Agreement, said monitoring, assessments, and evaluations to include, but not be limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of Contractor's staff and the staff of all subcontractors to this contract. At any time during normal business hours and as often as the Engineer may deem necessary, upon reasonable advance notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its, and all subcontractors to this contract, records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract and will permit the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, and other data relating to all matters covered by this Contract. However, any such activities shall be carried out in a manner so as to not unreasonably interfere with Contractor's ongoing business operations. Contractor and all subcontractors to this contract shall maintain such data and records for as long as may be required by applicable laws and regulations. Add the following: Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access to property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, Contractor shall give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected persons to provide for their needs. Notices will conform to any applicable local ordinance and, whether delivered orally or in writing, will include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit their inconvenience. Contractor shall not enter any private property outside limit of work line without written permission from the owner of the property. The Contractor shall supply copies of any written permission from private property owner to District representative prior to entering upon private property. 2-12 NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES a 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 105 of 414 SECTION 3 - CHANGES IN WORK 3-1 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. Add the following: For changes regarding all improvements, submit written details and reasons for proposed deviations from Contract Documents. Do not deviate from contract documents until written authorization is received. 3-2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY 3-2.2.1 Contract Unit prices. Add the following: In the case of an increase or decrease in quantity of a minor bid item in excess of 25 percent of the original quantity bid the adjustment of contract unit price for such items will be limited to that portion of the change in excess of 25 percent of the original quantity listed in the Contractor's bid proposal for this contract. Adjustments in excess of 25 percent may, at the option of the Engineer, be paid pursuant to section 3-3, Extra Work. 3-3 EXTRA WORK 3-3.2.2 (c) Tool and Equipment Rental. Regardless of ownership, the rates, right-of-way delay factors, and labor surcharge to be used in determining rental and delay costs shall be the edition of the, "Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates" published by CALTRANS, current at the time of the actual use of the tool or equipment. The right-of-way delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for delay to the Contractor and subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein will apply to labor costs. Second paragraph, modify as follows: 3-3.2.3 Markup. Delete sections 3-3.2.3 (a) and (b) and replace with the following: (a) I) Labor ................................... 20 2) Materials ............................. 15 3) Equipment Rental ................... 15 4) Other Items and Expenditures .. 15 To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding. Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits: (b) Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established in section 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor. 3-3.3 Daily Reports by Contractor. Add the following after the second sentence: Payment for extra work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer, and the Engineer approves them. 3-4 CHANGED CONDITIONS Delete the second sentence of paragraph three, delete paragraph five (5), and add the following: The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure to act, by the Engineer, including failure or refusal to issue a change order, or for the happening of any event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, unless the Contractor shall have first given the Engineer due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified. Compliance with this section shall not be required as a prerequisite to notice provisions in Section 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, or to any claim that is based on differences in measurement or errors of computation as to contract quantities. The written notice of potential claim for changed conditions shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer upon their discovery and prior to the time that the Contractor performs the work giving rise to . @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 106 of 414 the potential claim. The Contractor‘s failure to give written notice of potential claim for changed conditions to the agency upon their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. The Coitractor shall provide the City with a written document containing a description of the particular circumstances giving rise to the potential claim, the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation may be due and nature of any and all costs involved within 20 working days of the date of service of the written notice of potential claim for changed conditions. Verbal notifications are disallowed. The potential claim shall include the following certification relative to the California False Claims Act, .Government Code Sections 12650-1 2655. “The undersigned certifies that the above statements are made in full cognizance of the California False Claims Act, Government Code sections 12650-12655. The undersigned further understands and agrees that this potential claim, unless resolved, must be restated as a claim in response to the City’s proposed final estimate in order for it to be further considered.” By: Title: Date: Company Name: The Contractor‘s estimate of costs may be updated when actual costs are known. The Contractor shall submit substantiation of its actual costs to the Engineer within 20 working days after the affected work is completed. Failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for denial of any claim subsequently filed on the basis of said notice of potential claim. It is the intention of this section that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that such matters be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken. 3-5 DISPUTED WORK Add the following: The Contractor shall give the agency written notice of potential claim prior to commencing any disputed work. Failure to give said notice shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. Delete second sentence of paragraph one and add the following: Prior to proceeding with dispute resolution pursuant to Public Contract Code provisions specified hereinafter, the contractor shall attempt to resolve all disputes informally through the following dispute resolution chain of command: 1. Project Inspector 2. Construction Manager 3. Public Works Manager 4. Public Works Director 5. City Manager The Contractor shall submit a complete report within 20 working days after completion of the disputed work stating its position on the claim, the contractual basis for the claim, along with all documentation supporting the costs and all other evidentiary materials. At each level of claim or appeal of claim the City will, within 10 working days of receipt of said claim or appeal of claim, review the Contractor‘s report and respond with a position, request additional information or request that the Contractor meet and present its report. When additional information or a meeting is requested the City will provide its position within 10 working days of receipt of said additional information or Contractor‘s presentation of its report. The Contractor may appeal each level’s position up to the City Manager after which the Contractor may proceed under the provisions of the Public Contract Code. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 107 of 414 The authority within the dispute resolution chain of command is limited to recommending a resolution to a claim to the City Manager. Actual approval of the claim is subject to the change order provisions in the contract. All claims by the contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) which is set forth below: ARTICLE 1.5 RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CLAIMS 20104. (a)(l) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and a local agency. (2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1 (commencing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2. (b)(l) "Public work" has the same meaning as in Sections 3100 and 3106 of the Civil Code, except that "public work" does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the Regents of the University of California. (2) "Claim" means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency. (c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any work which may give rise to a claim under this article. (d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991. 20104.2. For any claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply: (a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims. (b)(l) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to any written claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater. (c)(l) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy- five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater. @% %q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 108 of 414 (d) If the claimant disputes the local agency's written response, or the local agency fails to respond within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the local agency's response or within 15 days of the local agency's failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the claimant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process. (f) This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 910) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. - 20104.4. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject to this article: (a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator. (b)(l) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141.11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under the subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds. (3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the attorney's fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo. (c)The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or 20104.6. (a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract. arbitration process. (b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court of law. 'Ec 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 109 of 414 4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 4-1.3.1 General. Add the following: Work shall conform to Federal, State and local building codes, electrical codes, fire codes, mechanical codes and plumbing codes, and to Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Regulations. Nothing in Contract Documents shall be interpreted as permission or direction to violate any governing code or ordinance. Notify Engineer of time and place of shop tests 5 working days before they begin. Complete manufacturing operations, checks, adjustments and tests before factory inspection. The Engineer will inspect products af&er delivery and throughout construction process. Products will be subject to rejection at any time on account of failure to meet Contract Documents even though samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at place of manufacture. Before backfilling, request inspection by the Engineer to verify proper installation of buried work. Before finishing, request inspection by the Engineer to verify that no surfaces to receive product have defects or errors which could result in poor or potentially defective application or cause latent defects in workmanship. 4-1.4 Test of Materials. Add the following: Tests of products shall follow commonly recognized standards of national technical organizations, and specified sampling and testing methods. Engineer may test representative samples of each type and size of product furnished. Failure of samples to pass tests will be deemed sufficient cause to reject entire lot delivered, 4-1.5 Certification. Add the following: A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished prior to the use of the materials being certified. The certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer of the material or the manufacturer of assembled materials and shall state that the materials involved comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished with each lot of material delivered to the work and the lot so certified shall be clearly identified in the certificate. The form of the Certificate of Compliance and its disposition shall be as directed by the Engineer. 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. Add the following: Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the apparent low bidder shall have five (5) days from the date of bid opening to provide the submission of data substantiating the Contractor's request for a substitution of "an equal" item. If, in the sole opinion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application, the Contractor shall provide the specified item. The Engineer has twenty (20) days to review the Contractor's request. Add the following: 4-1.6.1 Products Related to Recycled and Potable Water, and Sewer Improvements. 1) Standard Products: Whenever in the specifications products are by reference specification; any product meeting the standards referenced may be used. Information on such products shall be submitted in accordance with Section 2-5.3.7. 2) Proprietary Products: Whenever in the specifications any material, article or process is indicated or specified by trade, patent or proprietary name or name of manufacturer such specification for material, article or process, unless marked "no substitution", shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or equal as accepted in writing by the Engineer", and will be considered as a substitution. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 110 of 414 3) Selection of Proprietary Product: Where more than one proprietary name is specified, the Contractor may provide any one of the materials or equipment specified. Only one brand, kind or make of material or equipment shall be used for each specific purpose throughout the work notwiihstanding that similar materials or equipment of two or more manufacturers or producers may be specified for the Same purpose. 4) Contractor's Responsibility for Construction Modifications: Drawings have been detailed in compliance with ICBO Evaluation Report for material specified. If a proposed substitute material is accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor will assume the responsibility for construction modifications and additional costs required by reason of this acceptance. If the substitution results in a decrease in cost, the amount is to be submitted for consideration. 5) Systems of Like Manufacture: Where materials or items of manufacturer are specified in groups and are made or furnished by one manufacturer, no substitution will be considered that is not made or furnished similarly by one manufacturer. Where the Contractor proposes to use a system of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the Drawings the substitution shall be proposed as a complete system. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page ill of 414 SECTION 5 - UTILITIES 5-1 LOCATION Add the following: Exploratory excavations to determine the location and depth of all utilities, including service connections, which have been marked by the respective owners and which may affect or be affected by the Contractor's operations, shall be performed prior to the preparation of pipeline layout drawings. Where exploratory excavations are made, full compensation for exploratory excavations and pipeline layout planning including surveying, coordination with utility owners, AC paving removal and replacement, excavation, backfill, compaction, and compaction testing, and clean up as shown on the plans and called for in the Specifications, complete in place, shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid for Pothole Existing Utilities. Add the following: The Contractor shall cooperate with the utility companies' representation in the field in order to ascertain the location of the utility lines ahead of trenching operations. When the exact location of a utility becomes doubtful, the Contractor shall excavate and expose the utility ahead of trenching operations in order that the inspector representing the Engineer of Work may adjust the alignment of the water main to provide the least amount of interference with the utility as determined by the inspector. The Contractor shall not turn off or shut down any utilities. No additional cost will be accepted nor time extension granted, if a delay in work is caused by failure to comply with this requirement. 5-4 RELOCATION Add the following: In conformance with section 5-6 the Contractor shall coordinate the work with utility agencies and companies. Prior to the installation of any and all utility structures within the limits of work by any utility agency or company, or its contractor, the Contractor shall place all curb or curb and gutter that is a part of the work and adjacent to the location where such utility structures are shown on the plans and are noted as being located, relocated or are otherwise shown as installed by others. In order to minimize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon the Engineer's approval, may be permitted to temporarily omit the portion of work affected by the utility. If such temporary omission is approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall place survey or other physical control markers sufficient to locate the curb or curb and gutter to the satisfaction of the utility agency or company. Such temporary omission shall be for the Contractor's convenience and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor or for additional work, materials or delay associated with the temporary omission. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately following the relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 5-6 COOPERATION The Contractor should expect to coordinate with all utility companies, including the following: 0 Vallecitos Water District (VWD). The Contractor shall relocate a portion of the existing recycled water line, intersecting 'RSF' at approximately Station 252+05 and 276+50, install a new sewer line along 'RSF between approximate Station 251+80 to 275+52, install a temporary sewer line in the San Marcos Creek between approximate 'RSF' Station 267+80 to 272+00 complete with scour protection, install a new water line between approximate 'RSF" Station 251+60 to the intersection of Rancho Santa Fe Road and San Elijo Road at 'RSF Station 256+15 with connections in San Elijo Road, install two new water lines from connections in San Elijo Road at approximate 'RSF Station 256+15 to a new pressure reducing station and associated water lines at approximate 'RSF Station 274+60, relocate @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 112 of 414 two existing water lines at approximate 'RSF Station 275+35 to existing connections at approximate 'RSF Station 280+45 and 284+17, and relocate an existing water line in Melrose Drive between approximate 'MD' Station 208+85 to 210+65 as shown on the Plans and as discussed elsewhere in these Special Provisions. Coordination shall also be required during blasting operations, as discussed elsewhere in these Special Provisions. Existing recycled and potable water shall remain in service at all times during construction except to perform connection tie-ins. 0 Carlsbad Municipal Water District (CMWD). The Contractor shall install a new recycled water line from a VWD recycled water line connection at 'RSF Station 277+05 to a connection with an existing line at approximate 'MD' Station 214+50 as shown on the Plans and as discussed elsewhere in these Special Provisions. The contractor shall install a new CMWD recycled water metering station at approximate 'MD Station 211+60 as shown on the plans and as discussed elsewhere in these Special Provisions. San Diego Gas & Electric (SDG&E). Existing electrical and gas lines are to be relocated by SDG&E. Existing electrical lines will be relocated from existing locations and placed into a joint utility trench (JUT) that will be constructed back of the west sidewalk along the length of the project. The existing gas lines will be relocated from existing locations and placed into a new utility trench that will be located along the east portion of proposed Rancho Santa Fe Road. The new gas utility trench is proposed to extend from the intersection of Rancho Santa Fe Road and San Elijo Road to the intersection of Rancho Santa Fe Road and Meirose Drive. An SDG&E gas pressure regulation station is proposed for the northeast corner of the intersection of Rancho Santa Fe Road and San Elijo Road. The work of relocating gas and electrical lines and construction of the gas pressure regulation station may be performed concurrently with the Contractor's work. Electrical service and gas service shall be maintained during construction. Coordination shall be required during the relocation of the gas and electric lines, the installation of the gas pressure regulation station and during the installation of the proposed SDG&E gas and electric lines and support blocks to be placed within the Rancho Santa Fe Road Left and Right Bridges, as shown on the plans. 0 SBC Communications. The existing underground telephone conduit and above ground pedestal located along the south side of La Costa Meadows Drive near the southeast intersection of existing Rancho Santa Fe Road and La Costa Meadows Drive is to be relocated by Pacific Bell prior to the beginning of the Contractor's work. The existing telephone vault manhole near the above described above ground pedestal in La Costa Meadows Drive is to be adjusted to grade by Pacific Bell. This work may be performed concurrently with the Contractor's work. 0 Cox Communications. The Contractor shall protect in place the existing cable fiber optic lines shown on the plans. Coordination shall be required during work in the vicinity of existing fiber optic lines. 0 Adelphia Communications. The Contractor shall protect in place the existing cable fiber optic lines shown on the plans. Coordination shall be required during work in the vicinity of existing fiber optic lines. e City of Carlsbad. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary Blasting Permits, as discussed elsewhere in these Special Provisions. Add the following: The Contractor shall contact Carlsbad Municipal Water District (CMWD) and Vallecitos Water District (WVD) 72 hours before start of construction at the following location: 5-7 COORDINATION WITH VARIOUS WATER DISTRICTS 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 113 of 414 CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT 5950 El Camino Real Carlsbad, CA 92008 San Marcos, CA 92069 760/438-3891 Ext. 3 (General Engineering) 760/431-1601 (Fax) 760/744-3507 (Fax) VALLECITOS WATER DISTRICT 201 Vallecios De Om 760/744-0460 The Contractor shall not begin Work until the schedule; traffic control plans, haul routes, and permits have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least 72 hours before shutdown of water, sewer or drainage facilities. Do not assume water or sewer lines can be shut down. Do not shut down utilities without prior wtitten authorization. Shut down schedules for recycled water, potable water, or sewer shall be submitted and reviewed as a shop drawing. Contractor shall follow procedure as outlined in Section 2- 5.3.3.1. Contractor shall comply with each District's procedures and requirements including obtaining encroachment permits for shutdowns. The Contractor shall coordinate draining and filling of water lines, and operation of existing valves with the City of Carlsbad, CMWD, WVD, or appropriate Utility Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer, CMWD and WVD regarding time of day that system tie- ins are made. The Engineer shall provide all shop drawings and submittals provided by the Contractor to CMWD and WVD for review and approval. The Engineer shall allow for inspection all water and sewer facilities by CMWD and WVD. Add the following: Contractor shall obtain service requirements from public utilities for water, gas, power, telephone, telemetering and other utility requirements necessary to perform work. Work needed to connect to public utilities shall comply with utility service requirements. Contractor shall pay service charges of utilities, including charges for trenching, piping, conduit, cables, boxes, metering, grounding and backfill. Noti@ utilrty 72 hours before commencing any work directly or indirectly affecting utility facilities. Contractor shall protect existing underground utilities. Electrical utility companies may maintain energized aerial electrical power lines in immediate vicinity of Work. Do not consider these lines to be insulated. Construction personnel working near these lines are exposed to an extreme hazard from electrical shock. Contractors, their employees and construction personnel working on this project must be warned of the danger and instructed to take adequate protective measures, including maintaining a minimum of 10 feet clearance between lines and construction equipment and personnel. (See OSHA Std. 1926.550(A)15). As an additional safety precaution, call electrical utility company to arrange, if possible, to have these lines deenergized or relocated when Work reaches their immediate vicinity. Cost of such temporary arrangements shall be borne by Contractor. 5-8 COORDINATION WITH UTILITIES b 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 114 of 414 SECTION 6 - PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK Add the following section: 6-1 .I Pre-Construction Meeting. After, or upon, notification of the contract award, the Engineer will set the time and location for the Preconstruction Meeting. Attendance of the Contractor's management personnel responsible for the management, administration, and execution of the project is mandatory for the meeting to be convened. Failure of the Contractor to have the Contractor's responsible project personnel attend the Preconstruction Meeting will be grounds for default by Contractor per section 6-4. No separate payment will be made for the Contractor's attendance at the meeting. The notice to proceed will only be issued on or after the completion of the preconstruction meeting. Add the following section: 6-1 .I .I The Contractor shall submit the Baseline Construction Schedule per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3. The submittal of the Baseline Construction Schedule shall include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6-1.2.9 and shall be on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media. Add the following section: 6-1.2 Preparation and Review of the Baseline Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule as a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule in the precedence diagram method (activity-on-node) format. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall depict a workable plan showing the sequence, duration, and interdependence of all activities required to represent the complete performance of all project work as well as periods where work is precluded. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall begin with the projected date of issuance of the notice to proceed and conclude with the date of final completion per the contract duration. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include detail of all project phasing, staging, and sequencing, including all milestones necessary to define beginning and ending of each phase or stage. Add the following section: 6-1.2.1 Time-Scaled Network Diagram. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a complete time-scaled network diagram showing all of the activities, logic relationships, and milestones comprising the schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.2.2 Tabular Listing. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a tabular listing of all of the activities, showing for each activity the identification number, the description, the duration, the early start, the early finish, the late start, the late finish, the total float, and all predecessor and successor activities for the activity described. Add the following section: 6-1.2.3 Bar Chart. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path. Baseline Construction Schedule Submittal. Add the following section: 6-1.2.4 Schedule Software. The Contractor shall use commercially available software equal to the - Windows 95 compatible "SuretraK program by Primavera to prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule and all updates thereto. The Contractor shall submit to the Agency a 89 mm (3.5) data disk with all network information contained thereon, in a format readable by a Microsoft Windows 95 system. Add the following section: 6-1.2.5 Schedule Activities. Except for submittal activities, activity durations shall not be shorter than 1 working day or longer than 15 working days, unless specifically and individually allowed by the Engineer. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include between 100 and 500 activities, including 3 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 115 of 414 submittals, interfaces between utility companies and other agencies, project milestones and equipment and material deliveries. The number of activities will be sufficient, in the judgment of the Engineer, to communicate the Contractor‘s plan for project execution, to accurately describe the project work, and to allow monitoring and evaluation of progress and of time impacts. Each activity’s description shall accurately define the work planned for the activity and each activity shall have recognizable beginning and end points. Add the following section: 6-1.2.6 Float. whatever party or contingency first exhausts it. Add the following section: 6-1.2.7 Restraints to Activities. Any submittals, utility interfaces, or any furnishing of Agency supplied materials, equipment, or services, which may impact any activity’s construction shall be shown as a restraint to those activities, Time periods to accommodate the review and correction of submittals shall be included in the schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.2.8 Late Completion. A Baseline Construction Schedule showing a project duration longer than the specified contract duration will not be acceptable and will be grounds for determination of default by Contractor, per section 6-4. Add the following section: 6-1.2.9 Early Completion. The Baseline Construction Schedule will show the Contractor‘s plan to support and maintain the project for the entire contractual time span of the project. Should the Contractor propose a project duration shorter than contract duration, a complete Baseline Construction Schedule must be submitted, reflecting the shorter duration, in complete accordance with all schedule requirements of section 6-1. The Engineer may choose to accept the Contractor‘s proposal of a project duration shorter than the duration specified; provided the Agency is satisfied the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule is reasonable and the Agency and all other entities, public and private, which interface with the project are able to support the provisions of the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule. The Agency’s acceptance of a shortened duration project will be confirmed through the execution of a contract change order revising the project duration and implementing all contractual requirements including liquidated damages in accordance with the revised duration. Add the following section: 6-1.2.10 Engineer‘s Review. The Construction Schedule is subject to the review of the Engineer. The Engineer’s determination that the Baseline Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions shall be a condition precedent to issuance of the Notice to Proceed by the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that the Construction Schedule does not meet the requirements of these specifications the Contractor shall correct the Construction Schedule to meet these specifications and resubmit it to the Engineer. Failure of the Contractor to obtain the Engineer‘s determination that the initial Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions within thirty (30) working days after the date of the preconstruction meeting shall be grounds for termination of the contract per section 6-4. Days used by the Engineer to review the initial Construction Schedule will not be included in the 30 working days. The Engineer will review and return to the Contractor, with any comments, the Baseline Construction Schedule within 15 working days of submittal. The Baseline Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections 6-1.2.10.1 through 6-1.2.10.3. Add the following section: 6-1.2.10.1 “Accepted.” Notice to Proceed, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with section 6-1.8.1. Add the following section: 6-1.2.10.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.1. Float or slack time within the schedule is.available without charge or compensation to The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the ‘9ci b 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 116 of 414 Add the following section: 6-1.2.10.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the corrections and changes of the comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.1. The Notice to Proceed will not be issued by the Engineer if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked “Accepted” or “Accepted with Comments” by the Engineer. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked “Accepted” by the Engineer. Add the following section: 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The Contractor shall meet with the Engineer .during the last week of each month to agree upon each activity’s schedule status and shall submit monthly updates of the Baseline Construction Schedule confirming the agreements no later than the fifth working day of the following month. The monthly update will be submitted on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to section 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and will include each item and element of sections 6-1.2 through 6-1.2.9 and 6-1.3.1 through 6- 1.3.7. Add the following section: 6-1.3.1 Actual Activity Dates. The actual dates each activity was started and/or completed during the month. After first reporting an actual date, the Contractor shall not change that actual date in later updates without specific notification to the Engineer with the update. Add the following section: 6-1.3.2 Activity Percent Complete. Contractor shall report the percentage determined by the Engineer as complete for the activity. Add the following section: 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media. The schedule data disk shall be a 89 mm (3‘/2”) high density diskette, labeled with the project name and number, the Contractor‘s name and the date of preparation of the schedule data disk. The schedule data disk shall be readable by the software specified in section 6-1.2.4 “Schedule Software” and shall be free of file locking, encryption or any other protocol that would impede full access of all data stored on it. Add the following section: 6-1.3.4 List of Changes. A list of all changes made to the activities or to the interconnecting logic, with an explanation for each change. Add the following section: 6-1.3.5 Change Orders, Each monthly update will include the addition of the network revisions reflecting the change orders approved in the previous month. The network revisions will be as agreed upon during the review and acceptance of the Contractor‘s change orders. Add the following section: 6-1.3.6 Bar Chart. Each monthly update will include a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path. Add the following section: 6-1.4 Engineer‘s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. The Engineer will review and return the Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days of submittal. The Updated Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per sections 6-1.4.1 through 6- 1.4.3. Any Updated Construction Schedule marked “Accepted with Comments” or “Not Accepted” by the Engineer will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Upon resubmittal the Engineer will review and return the resubmitted Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days. Failure of the Contractor to submit a monthly updated construction schedule will invoke the same consequences as the Engineer returning a monthly updated construction schedule marked “Not Accepted”. Add the following section: 6-1.4.1 “Accepted.” the schedule in accordance with section 6-1.8.2. Add the following section: For each activity underway at the end of the month, the - The Contractor may proceed with the project work, and will receive payment for -* E* 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 117 of 414 6-1.4.2 “Accepted with Comments.” The Contractor may proceed with the project work. The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer‘s comments prior to receipt of payment per section Add the following section: 6-1.4.3 “Not Accepted.” The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer‘s comments prior to receipt of payment per section 6-1.8.2. The Contractor, at the sole aption of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted and marked “Accepted” by the Engineer before the last day of the month in which the Updated Construction Schedule is due. If the Contractor fails to submit the corrected Updated Construction Schedule as required herein the Contractor may elect to proceed with the project at its own risk. Should the Contractor elect not to proceed with the project, any resulting delay, impact, or disruption to the project will be the Contractor‘s responsibility. Add the following section: 6-1.5 Late Completion or Milestone Dates. Should the Schedule Update indicate a completion or contractually required milestone date later than the properly adjusted contract or milestone duration, the Agency may withhold Liquidated Damages for the number of days late. Should a subsequent “Accepted” Schedule Update remove all or a portion of the delay, all or the allocated portion of the previously held Liquidated Damages shall be released in the monthly payment to the Contractor immediately following the “Accepted” schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.6 Interim Revisions. Should the actual or projected progress of the work become substantially different from that depicted in the Project Schedule, independently of and prior to the next monthly update, the Contractor will submit a revised Baseline Construction Schedule, with a list and explanation of each change made to the schedule. The Revised Construction Schedule will be submitted per the submittal requirements of section 2-5.3 and per the schedule review and acceptance requirements of section 6-1, including but not limited to the acceptance and payment provisions. As used in this subsection “substantially different” means a time variance greater than 5 percent of the number of days of duration for the project. Add the following section: 6-1.7 Final Schedule Update. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a final schedule update when one hundred percent of the construction work is completed. The Contractor‘s Final Schedule Update must accurately represent the actual dates for all activities. The final schedule update shall be prepared and reviewed per sections 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions and 6-1.4 Engineer‘s Review of Updated Construction Schedule. Acceptance of the final schedule update is required for completion of the project and release of any and all funds retained per section 9-3.2. Add the following section: 6-1.8 Measurement and Payment. Construction Schedule will be paid for at the lump sum price not to exceed fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) . The lump sum price paid for Construction Schedule (CPM) shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials including, but not limited to, the computer hardware and software, training, tools, equipment, and incidentals; and for doing all the work involved in attending meetings, preparing, furnishing, updating, revising the tabular, bar and flow chart Construction Schedules and narrative reports required by these supplemental provisions and as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer‘s determination that each and any construction schedule proposed by the Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions shall be precedent to each and any payment for the Construction Schedule. Payments for Construction Schedule will be made as per sections 6-1.8.1 through 6-1.8.3. 6-1.8.2. Add the following section: 6-1.8.1 Initial Payment. made when the Engineer has accepted the Baseline Construction Schedule for this project Add the following section: 30% of the stipulated lump sum bid for the Construction Schedule will be e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 118 of 414 6-1.8.2 Monthly Updated Construction Schedule Payments. Equal Monthly Updated Construction Schedule Payments totaling 50% of the lump sum bid price will be made subsequent to the initial payment for the Construction Schedule for each monthly Construction Schedule, updated as required herein, that the Engineer has accepted as sufficient within the month that the monthly progress payment pertains. No payment shall be made, nor shall any payment accrue, for any monthly updated construction schedule that is not marked "Accepted" by the Engineer on or before the twentieth working day of the month such monthly updated construction schedule is due per section 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The sum of the amounts paid for Construction Schedule during the initial and subsequent payment periods, or extensions to the contract, shall not exceed the stipulated lump sum price for Construction Schedule. Add the following section: 6-1.8.3 Concluding Payment. A Final payment of 20% of the lump sum bid for the Construction Schedule will be made when both one hundred percent of the contract work is completed and the Engineer has accepted a final construction schedule update prepared and submitted by the Contractor as required herein that shows the actual beginning and ending dates and all other data that is required for baseline and update schedules for each activity shown on the baseline construction schedule and updates thereto that the Engineer accepted for this project. 6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK Add the following section: 6-2.1 Order of Work. The work to be done shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials, and performing all operations necessary to complete the Project Work as shown on the Project Plans and as specified in the Specifications. The work includes improving Rancho Santa Fe Road from approximately 3,900 feet south to approximately 1,000 feet north of the intersection of Rancho Santa Fe Road and Melrose Drive in the cities of Carlsbad and San Marcos. The project will realign and widen approximately 3,900 feet of roadway and construct six lanes of asphalt pavement and raised concrete curb medians with earthwork and drainage facilities necessary to support the City's prime arterial standards. Rancho Santa Fe Road Bridge Left and Right will be constructed over San Marcos Creek. The project includes waterline, recycled waterline, sewer and related facilities construction and relocation, as well as utilities to be relocated by others. Attention is directed to the stage construction sheets of the Plans and the requirements for Preblast Survey, Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, and Coordination, elsewhere in these Special Provisions. Project information sign shall be placed at locations shown on signing plans prior to begin any visible construction. Construction of Rancho Santa Fe Road Bridge Lefl and Right piers and demolition of existing piers shall be limited to work within the months of March to October, inclusive. The construction of Melrose Drive and Corintia Street shall commence as soon as possible after the Notice to Proceed is issued. Coordination with the City of San Marcos Public Works Department Rancho Santa Fe Road project and the associated utility undergrounding project may be required. The Contractor shall submit a materials management and placement plan to the Engineer for approval at least 30-days prior to setting-up any crushing or materials processing plant on the project site. Crushing or processing of materials shall not commence until the Engineer has approved the plan. The plan shall include, among other things, a crushing/processing schedule, location of the plant and materials stockpiles, transportation schedule and identification of where the stockpiled material will be placed, and a detailed description of how the material will be stockpiled so that the Engineer can test the material for compliance with the specifications. Stockpiling of material shall be done in a manner that allows the Engineer to identify and locate the material after completion of compliance testing. Under no circumstance shall the Contractor place any crushed/processed material until it has been tested by the Engineer and verified to meet specification. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in the schedule for the Engineer to complete the quality assurance and testing of the crushedlprocessed material prior to placement. Should there be any discrepancy between quality assurance and quality control testing - -* b 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 119 of 414 companies, a third party will be used that is agreeable to both the Engineer and the Contractor. Environmental Fencing shall be placed as shown on the grading plans prior to performance of any clearing of brush or unclassified excavation. Vegetation removal that is needed to accomplish the construction activities shall be conducted only between September 15 and February 15 of each year, immediately prior to construction activities beginning. The work shall be performed in conformance with the stages of construction shown on the plans unless otherwise approved. Nonconflicting work in subsequent stages may proceed concurrently with work in preceding stages, provided satisfactory progress is maintained in said preceding stages of construction. The Contractor shall schedule partial or full street closures during off-peak traffic hours and shall comply with all traffic control requirements of the City of Carlsbad. The uppermost lift of new pavement shall not be placed until all underlying conduits and loop detectors have been installed and all temporary striping necessary for the direction of public traffic as a result of construction staging is no longer needed. Construction of the new structural section adjacent to the existing traveled way shall be performed in successive and, once all operations are under way, concurrent operations of excavating, preparing subgrade, placing base materials and paving. Excavation within 8 feet of the existing traveled way shall not precede the paving operation more than 4 working days unless approved in writing by the Engineer. At the end of each working day if a difference in excess of 0.15 feet exists between the elevation of the existing pavement and the elevation of any excavation within 8 feet of the traveled way, material shall be placed and compacted against the vertical cuts adjacent to the traveled way. During excavation operations, native material may be used for this purpose, however, once the placing of the structural section commences, structural material shall be used. The material shall be placed to the level of the elevation of the top of existing pavement and tapered at a slope of 4:l or flatter to the bottom of the excavation. Treated base shall not be used for the taper. Full compensation for placing the material on a 4:l slope, regardless of the number of times it is required, and subsequent removing or reshaping of the material to the lines and grades shown on the plans shall be considered as included in the contract price paid for the materials involved and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. No payment will be made for material placed in excess of that required for the structural section. The Contractor shall be limited to the Construction activities and work as required by the resource agency permits. The Contractor is directed to Section 7-5.1 and Section 7-5.2 of these Special Provisions. Attention is directed to the vegetation removal restrictions in San Marcos Creek between March 15 and July 31 as detailed in the Streambed Alteration Agreement, (Appendix 'B"). Full compensation for conforming to above requirements will be considered as included in the prices paid for the various contract items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Add the following: 6-2.3 Project Meeting. Progress meetings shall be held by the Engineer at the dates and times scheduled at the preconstruction meeting unless changes are agreed to by all parties and appropriate notification of such changes has been given. The meetings shall be attended by the Engineer and the Contractor's representative. When requested by the Engineer or the Contractor, subcontractors and others shall also attend. At each meeting, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a two-week "look ahead" bar'chart schedule showing activities to be performed in the following two weeks. No separate payment for attendance of the Contractor, the Contractor's Representative or any other employee or subcontractor or subcontractor's employee at these meetings, or for providing the two-week look ahead schedule, will be made. - G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 120 of 414 6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor. Add the following: The Contractor will not be compensated for damages incurred due to delays associated with impacts to sensitive habitat as required by the resource agency permits and the HCP. The Contractor is directed to Section 7-5.1 and Section 7- 5.2 of these Special Provisions. 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer within two hours of the beginning of any period that the Contractor has placed any workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each working day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each workman and supervisor and the make and model of each piece of equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor‘s opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice@) required by this section the Contractor agrees that no damage has been incurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefor. Modify as follows: 6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION Add the following: The Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work to completion within 360 working days after the starting date specified in the Notice to Proceed. Add the following: The Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work required in Stage II as shown in the Plans. The shutdown of San Elijo Road shall be kept to a minimum timeframe as possible. Construction of Stage IIA cannot begin until Stage II is complete and Detour 1A is open to traffic. 6-7.2 Working Day. Add the following: Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:OO a.m. and 4:OO p.m. on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays. All construction shall be conducted during daytime hours; night lighting shall not occur except in emergency situations. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contractor desires to work outside said hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work. The Engineer may approve work outside the hours and/or days stated herein when, in hisher sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the inspection costs of such work. 6-8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Delete the second paragraph and add the following: The Engineer will not accept the Work or any portion of the Work before all of the Work is completed and all outstanding deficiencies that may exist are corrected by the Contractor and the Engineer is satisfied that all the materials and workmanship, and all other features of the Work, meet the requirements of all of the specifications for the Work. Use, temporary, interim or permanent, of all, or portions of, the Work does not constitute acceptance of the Work. If, in the Engineer‘s judgment, the Work has been completed and is ready for acceptance the Engineer will so certify. Upon acceptance of the Work the Engineer will cause a “Notice of Completion” to be recorded in the office of the San Diego County Recorder. - Add the following as the last sentence to the third paragraph: Twenty-five percent of the faithful performance bond shall be retained as a warranty bond for the one year warranty period. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 121 of 414 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Modify the last sentence of the first paragraph and the first sentence of the second paragraph and add the following: For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified for completion of Work, as adjusted in accordance with Section 6-6, the Contractor shall pay the Agency, or have withheld monies due it, the sum of one thousand two hundred dollars ($1,200.00). Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that $1,200.00 per day is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the Contractor to complete the Work 'within the allotted time. Any progress payments made after the specified completion date shall not constitute a waiver of this paragraph or of any damages. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 122 of 414 SECTION 7 - RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 7-1 CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES No equipment storage or material storage shall be allowed within areas designated on plans as HCP areas or ESA areas. No equipment storage or material storage shall be allowed outside of areas to receive grading or improvements. Add the following: The Contractor‘s equipment shall adhere to the following requirements: Engine idling of equipment while waiting to load or unload equipment or materials shall be no longer than 10 minutes. If a piece of equipment is anticipated to be waiting to load or unload equipment or materials more than IO minutes, the engine shall be turned off until the piece of equipment is scheduled be moved. Obstruction of through traffic lanes from construction equipment or activities shall be kept to a minimum. All on-site construction equipment shall receive low-NOxemmision tune-ups at a minimum of ninety (90) days. The Contractor shall provide rideshare incentives for construction personnel. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer proof that such a program is in place. The Contractor shall avoid material blow-off from hauling vehicles with the use of covers and/or tarps on all vehicles hauling dirt or spoils on public roadways. The Contractor shall use low sulfur fuel (0.5% by weight) for construction equipment. Contractor’s stationary equipment shall be placed such that emitted noise is directed away from sensitive noise receivers such as residential areas. Contractor’s vehicle staging areas shall be located as far as practical from occupies dwellings. Contractor‘s equipment, including trucks used for hauling roadbed material, shall have exhaust and muffler systems in compliance with state standards for emission and noise control. 7-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE Add the following: The Contractor, by entering into a contract with the City of Carlsbad (City) for Rancho Santa Fe Road North Phase 2 Improvements and the Recycled Water Improvements certifies and guarantees to the City, CMWD, and WD that the insurance which the Contractor furnishes for the contract will provide for the following in addition to the requirements of the Districts and the City: The Contractor shall hold harmless, indemnify and defend the City of Carlsbad and their consultants, CMWD and their consultants, VWD and their consultants, and each of their officers, agents and employees from any and all liability, claims, losses or damage arising out of or alleged to arise from the Contractor’s negligence in the performance of the work described in the construction contract documents, but not including liability that may be due to the sole negligence of the City, their consultants, CMWD or their consultants, VWD or their consultants, or -* 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 123 of 414 their officers, agents and employees. Furthermore, the Contractor shall provide comprehensive/mmmercial general liability insurance, including completed operations and contractual liability, with the latter coverage sufficient to insure the contractor’s indemnity, as above required; and, such insurance will include the City, their consultants, CMWD and their consultants, VWD and their consultants, and each of his oficers, agents, and employees as additional insureds. All insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key Rating Guide of at least A-:V and are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official . publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California. 7-4 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE Add the following: All insurance is to be placed with insurers that are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California. Policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meet the requirement for workers’ compensation insurance. 7-5 PERMITS Delete the first sentence and add the following four sentences: Except as specified herein the agency will assist in obtaining all encroachment, right-of-way, grading, blasting, resource agency and building permits necessary to perform work for this contract on Agency property, in streets, highways (except State highway right-of-way), railways or other rights-of-way. Contractor shall not begin work until all permits incidental to the work are obtained. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all materials removed from the project. The cost of said permit(s) shall be included in the price bid for the appropriate bid item and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Payment for obtaining and complying with permits during construction, including, but not limited to, NPDES permits, building permits, encroachment permits, excavation permits, drilling permits, blasting permits, disposal permits, temporary easements, licenses, inspection fees, and Federal, State and local taxes will be included in prices bid for work for which such costs are appurtenant. Payment for coordinating with agencies, developers, utilities, events and persons described will be included in prices bid for work to which coordination is appurtenant. Add the following section: 7-5.1 Resource Agency Permits. Resource agency permits for the Work are included in Appendix ‘B’ of these supplemental provisions and shall be readily available at worksites at all times during periods of active work. The Contractor shall provide a copy of all agency permits to all on site employees and subcontractors. Resource agency permits pertaining to this project include: 1) California Department of Fish and Game permit number SAA #5-142-00 issued in May 2001. 2) California Water Quality Control Board permit number OOC-045 issued on January 8,2001. 3) United States Amy Corps of Engineers permit number 200001251 issued on August 24, 2000. The Contractor shall read Appendix ‘B’ in its entirety prior to initiation of work and require that all employees and subcontractors read Appendix ’B’ in its entirety. Specific requirements per the permits in Appendix ‘B’ are included in these specifications. However, meeting all conditions of the specifications does not relieve the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the conditions of the permits and ensure that all appropriate permit conditions are implemented as intended. Add the following: *. ‘Et. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 124 of 414 7-5.2 Federal, State and Local Permits. The Contractor shall obtain, pay for, and comply with required permits, licenses, work permits and authorizations from appropriate agencies, including the following: 1) State and federal permits a. b. Excavation Permit from Cal OSHA Safety Permit from California Division of Industrial Safety 2) Local permits a. City of Carisbad Blasting Permit The Contractor shall have these permits on-hand (i.e. issued by the regulatory agency) prior to commencement of construction. 7-6 THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE Add the following: The Contractor shall provide a letter identifying Contractor's on-site representative, safety officer, and traffic control coordinator, including emergency telephone numbers and signature authorization, and listing names, addresses and telephones for subcontractors. 7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK Add the following section: 7-7.1 Coordination. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with all the utility companies during the relocation or construction of their lines. The Contractor may be granted a time extension if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay is caused by the utility company. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for any such delay. Six weeks prior to beginning work on the SDG&E Electric Conduit Supports, the contractor shall initiate a pre-construction meeting with SDG&E. The Engineer, along with SDG&E electric representative, SDG&E civil/structural representative and general foreman for installation shall be present. Contact information is as follows: SDG&E representative: SDG&E civillstructural manager: Steve Campbell (858) 636-3955 Jim H. Wight (858) 654-1638 Rancho Santa Fe Road North, Phase 1 will be under construction by the City of Carlsbad southerly of the project site during the progress of this contract. In addition, private development work adjacent to the project site will be ongoing during the progress of this contract. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with adjacent developers and the Phase 1 Contractor to meet the requirements of Section 7-7 of the SSPWC. Rancho Santa Fe Road will be under construction by the City of San Marcos northerly of the project site during the progress of this contract. Contractor is advised that coordination with SDG&E may be necessary in this area. 7-8 PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE 7-8.1 Cleanup and Oust Control. Add the following: Cleanup and dust control required herein shall also be executed on weekends and other non-working days when needed to preserve the health safety or welfare of the public. The Contractor shall conduct effective cleanup and dust control throughout the duration of the Contract. The Engineer may require increased levels of cleanup and dust control that, in hidher sole discretion, are necessary to preserve the health, safety and welfare of the public. Cleanup and dust control shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made therefor. '3 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 125 of 414 7-8.6 Water Pollution Control. Add the following: The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Water Pollution Control requirements found in Section 300-1 3 of these Supplemental Provisions. 7-8.7 Drainage Control. Add the following: Storm water management operations shall be conducted and maintained as needed to prevent runoff or seepage from entering excavations and to control erosion in conformance with Federal, State and local regulations. Add the following section: 7-8.8 Noise Control. All internal combustion engines used in the construction shall be equipped with mufflers in good repair when in use on the project with special attention to the City Noise Control Ordinance, Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 8.48. Every effort shall be made to create the greatest distance between noise sources and receptors during construction operations. 7-9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS Add the following: Where connections or disruptions have been made to existing work, repair, reactivate, refill and recharge components, restoring them to preconstruction conditions. Follow procedures of authorities having Ownership or jurisdiction for work involving existing utilities and services. 7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY 7-10.1 Traffic and Access. Add the following: The Contractor shall construct and maintain access or haul roads required for project, and personnel movement into and within construction and excavation areas. The Contractor shall install and remove earth ramps as needed to protect concrete and asphalt curbs. Areas used for temporary access, haul roads and access from public roads shall be graded and restored to original. 7-10.2 Storage of Equipment and Materials in Public Streets, add the following: Storage yard description shall describe Contractor's proposed methods for dust and noise control in storage areas to satisfaction of the Engineer. It is the Contractor's responsibility to secure and provide a staging area (storage yard) for materials and equipment. Property owner's written approval of storage yard shall be submitted along with City Planning Department permit for use of property used as storage yard for project. The Contractor shall conform to setbacks and other conditions required by City, Districts or County regulations or permits. Storage yard shall be fenced. 7-10.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. Add the following: Traffic controls shall be in accordance with the plans, Chapter 5 of the California Department of Transportation "Manual of Traffic Controls," 1996 (Revision 2) edition and these Supplemental Provisions. If any component in the traffic control system is damaged, displaced, or ceases to operate or function as specified, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately repair said component to its original condition or replace said component and shall restore the component to its original location. In the event that the Contractor fails to install and/or maintain barricades or such other traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices as may be required herein, the Engineer may, at hidher sole option, install the traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices and charge the Contractor twenty-five dollars ($25.00) per day per traffic sign or device, or the actual cost of providing such traffic control facility, whichever is the greater. Barricades shall conform to the details shown on the plans and shall be as specified in this Section. Barricades shall be constructed of lightweight commercial quality materials, as approved by the Engineer. Stay bracing for "A"-frame designs shall not be rigid. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 126 of 414 Markings for barricade rails shall be alternate orange and white stripes. The entire area of orange and white stripes shall be Type-lI reflective sheeting as specified in the special provisions. The color of the orange reflective sheeting shall conform to PR No. 6, Highway Orange, of the Federal Highway Administration's Color Tolerance Chart. Reflective sheeting shall be placed on rail surfaces in such a manner that no air bubbles or voids are present between the rail surface and reflective sheeting. The predominate color for barricade components other than rails shall be white, except that unpainted galvanized metal or aluminum may be used. 'Owner identification shall not be imprinted on the reflectorized face of any rail, but may be imprinted elsewhere. Ballasting shall be by means of sand filled bags placed on the lower parts of the frame or stays, but shall not be placed on top of the barricade or over any reflectorized barricade rail face facing traffic. If the barricades are displaced or are not in an upright position, from any cause, the barricades shall immediately be replaced or restored to their original location, in an upright position, by the Contractor. Add the following section: 7-1 0.3.1 Construction Area Signs and Control Devices. 7-10.3.1.1 Signs All temporary construction area signs shall conform to the provisions of section 206- 7.2 et seq. 7-10.3.1.2 Reflective Pavement Markers All temporary reflective pavement markers shall conform to the provisions of section 214-5.1 .et seq. 7-10.3.1.3 Reflective Channelizers All temporary reflective channelizers shall conform to the provisions of section 214-5.2 et seq. 7-10.3.1.4 Striping & Pavement Marking Paint All paint for temporary traffic striping, pavement marking, and curb marking shall conform to the provisions of section 210-1.6 et seq. except that all temporary paint shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to section 21 0-1.6 for materials and section 31 0-5 et seq. for workmanship. 7-10.3.1.5 Warning & Advisory Signs, Lights and Devices Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices required for temporary traffic control, direction and/or warning shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor. Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices shall be promptly removed by the Contractor when no longer required. (a) Warning and Advisory Signs. Warning and advisory signs that remain in place overnight shall be stationary mounted signs. Stationary signs that warn of nonexistent conditions shall be removed from the traveled way and from the view of motorists in the traveled way or shielded from the view of the traveling public during such periods that their message does not pertain to existing conditions. Care shall be used in performing excavation for sign posts in order to protect underground facilities. All excavation required to install stationary construction area signs shall be performed by hand methods without the use of power equipment. Warning and advisory signs that are used only during working hours may be portable signs. Portable signs shall be removed from the traveled way and shielded from the view of the traveling public during non-working hours. During the hours of darkness, as defined in Division 1, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code, portable signs shall be illuminated or, at the option of the Contractor, shall be in conformance with the -0 k 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 127 of 414 provisions in section 206-7.2 et seq. The Contractor shall post signs at high volume intersections four weeks prior to starting construction indicating that motorists may experience temporary delays due to construction. The locations include, but are not limited to: 1. 2. 3. Southbound lanes at the intersection of Alga Road and Melrose Drive Northbound lanes at the intersection of Rancho Santa Fe Road and Olivenhain Road Eastbound lanes at the intersection of La Costa Avenue and El Camino Real The Engineer shall approve the final locations of all signs. The signs shall be 36" x 36" in size and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to posting. The signs shall indicate the approximate dates and times that traffic may be interrupted on Rancho Santa Fe Road from La Costa Avenue to Melrose Drive due to construction. The signs shall remain in place for the duration of the project and shall be replaced with new signs every six months after the start of construction with the most current approximate dates and times that traffic may be interrupted (b) Traffic Cones. If illuminated traffic cones rather than post-type delineators are used during the hours of darkness, they shall be affixed or covered with reflective cone sleeves as specified in CALTRANS "Standard Specifications", except the sleeves shall be 180 mm (7") long. Flashing Arrow Signs. Flashing arrow signs shall be finished with commercial quality flat black enamel and shall be equipped with yellow or amber lamps that form arrows or arrowheads as required. Each lamp shall be provided with a visor and the lamps shall be controlled by an electronic circuit that will provide between 30 and 45 complete operating cycles per minute in each of the displays and modes specified. The control shall include provisions for dimming the lamps by reducing the voltage to 50 percent, *5 percent, for nighttime use. Type I signs shall have both manual and automatic photoelectric dimming controls. Dimming in both modes shall be continuously variable over the entire dimming range. Each flashing arrow sign shall be mounted on a truck or on a trailer and shall be capable of operating while the vehicle is moving and shall be capable of being placed and maintained in operation at locations as shown on the plans, as specified in the special provisions or as directed by the Engineer. Flashing arrow signs shall be mounted to provide a minimum of 7 feet between the bottom of the sign and the roadway. Trailers on which flashing arrow signs are mounted shall be equipped so that they can be leveled and plumbed. The signs shall be solar operated. The supply of electrical energy shall be capable of operating the sign in the manner specified. Portable Delineators Portable delineators, including the base, shall be composed of a material that has sufficient rigidity to remain upright when unattended and shall be either flexible or collapsible upon impact by a vehicle. The base shall be of such shape as to preclude roll after impact. The base shall be of sufficient weight or shall be anchored in a manner such that said delineator shall remain in an upright position. Ballast, if used for the bases of portable delineators, shall be sand or water. - G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 728 of 414 If the portable delineators are displaced or are not in an upright position, from any cause, said delineators shall immediately be replaced or restored to their original location, in an upright position, by the Contractor. The vertical portion of the portable delineators shall be of a fluorescent orange or predominantly orange color. The posts shall be not less than 3 inches in width or diameter. The minimum height shall be 36 inches above the traveled way. A minimum of 2 reflective bands, each not less than 3 inches wide, shall be mounted a minimum of 1% inches apart and at a height on the post so that one reflective band will be between 2.5 feet and 3 feet above the roadway surface. Reflective bands shall be white and shall be fabricated from flexible reflective sheeting as specified in the special provisions. The reflective bands shall be visible at 1,000 feet at night under illumination of legal high beam headlights, by persons with vision of or corrected to 20/20. Only one type of portable delineator shall be used on the project. The type of portable delineator proposed for use on the project shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to placement on the project. Changeable Message Signs The Contractor shall place changeable message signs at the high volume intersections adjacent to the Work three days prior to starting construction expected to create traffic delays. The locations include, but are not limited to: 1. Southbound Melrose Drive north of the Rancho Santa Fe Road intersection. 2. Southbound Rancho Santa Fe Road north of the Melrose Drive intersection. 3. Westbound San Elijo Road east of the Rancho Santa Fe Road intersection. 4. Northbound Rancho Santa Fe Road north of the La Costa Avenue intersection. The Engineer shall approve all final locations of the changeable message signs. 7-10.3.1.6 Contractors Vehicles 8 Equipment Personal vehicles of the Contractor's employees shall not be parked within the traveled way, including any section closed to public traftic. Whenever the Contractor's vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within 1.8 m (6') of a traffic lane, the shoulder area shall be closed with fluorescent traffic cones or portable delineators placed on a taper in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the pavement at not less than 7.6 m (25') intervals to a point not less than 7.6 m (25) past the last vehicle or piece of equipmerlt. A minimum of nine (9) cones or portable delineators shall be used for the taper. A C23 (Road Work Ahead) or C24 (Shoulder Work Ahead) sign shall be mounted, as required herein, on a signpost or telescoping flag tree with flags. The signpost or flag tree shall be placed where directed by the Engineer. Add the following section: 7-10.3.2 Maintaining Traffic. During the entire construction, a minimum of one paved traffic lane, not less than 3.6m (12') wide, shall be open for use by public traffic in each direction of travel except as shown on plans or as provided for below. Add the following section: 7-10.3.3 Traffic Control Systems. A traffic control system consists of modification of traffic lanes or pedestrian walkways in accordance with the details shown on the plans, CALTRANS "Manual of Traffic Control", 1996 (Revision 2) edition and provisions under "Maintaining Traffic" elsewhere in these Supplemental Provisions. The provisions in this section will not relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to provide such additional devices or take such measures as may be necessary to maintain public safety, and complete the Work. Any traffic handling plans provided are not meant to be a complete set for completion of all work on the project. The Contractor must submit for approval any additional traffic control plans necessary to complete the Work. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 129 of 414 When lanes are closed for only the duration of work periods, all components of the traffic control system, except portable delineators placed along open trenches or excavation adjacent to the traveled way, shall be removed from the traveled way and shoulder at the end work period. If the Contractor so elects, said components may be stored at selected central locations, approved by the Engineer, within the limits of the right-of-way. Add the following section: 7-10.3.4 During traffic stripe operations, traffic shall be controlled with lane closures, as provided for under “Traffic Control Systems” of these Supplemental Provisions or by use of an alternative traffic control plan proposed by the Contractor and approved ‘by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not start traffic striping operations using an alternative plan until the Contractor has submitted its plan to the Engineer in accordance with Section 2-5.3 and has received the Engineer‘s written approval of said plan. Traffic Control for Permanent and Temporary Traffic Striping. Add the following section: 7-1 0.3.5 Temporary Pavement Delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be furnished, placed, maintained and removed in accordance with the minimum standards specified in Chapter 5 of the Traffic Manual”, 1996 (Revision 2) edition published by CALTRANS. Whenever the work causes obliteration of pavement delineation, temporary or permanent pavement delineation shall be in place prior to opening the traveled way to public traffic. Lane line or centerline pavement delineation shall be provided at all times for traveled ways open to public traffic. All work necessary, including any required lines or marks, to establish the alignment of temporary pavement delineation shall be performed by the Contractor. When temporary pavement delineation is removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed by grinding. Surfaces to receive temporary pavement delineation shall be dry and free of dirt and loose material. Temporary pavement delineation shall not be applied over existing pavement delineation or other temporary pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be maintained until superseded or replaced with permanent pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be removed when, as determined by the Engineer, the temporary pavement delineation conflicts with the permanent pavement delineation or with a new traffic pattern for the area and is no longer required for the direction of public traffic. When temporary pavement delineation is required to be removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed. Add the following section: 7-10.3.6 Preparation of New, or Modifications and Additions to Existing, Traffic Control Plan Sheets. If no traffic control plans (TCP) or Traffic Control Staging plans (TCP) are included in the project plans, or if the Contractor elects to modify TCP included in the project plans, the Contractor shall have such new or modified TCP prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any and all construction activities that are located within the traveled way. The Contractor shall have TCP prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any construction activities that are a part of this project that are not included in the project plans. The Contractor must submit the TCP for the Engineer‘s review in conformance with the requirements of section 2-5.3, et seq. and obtain the Engineer‘s approval of the TCP prior to implementing them. New or revised TCP submittals shall include all TCP needed for the entire duration of the Work. Each phase of the TCP shall be shown in sufficient scale and detail to’show the lane widths, transition lengths, curve radii, stationing of features affecting the traffic control plan and the methodology proposed to transition to the subsequent TCP phase. When the vertical alignment of the traveled surface differs from the finished pavement elevation vertical curves must also be shown. The level of detail, format, and graphics shall be of quality and size no less than those on “Standard Specifications Reference Traffic Control Plan“ Drawing number 368-5. Such modifications, supplements and/or new design of TCP shall meet the requirements of the Engineer and of the “MANUAL OF TRAFFIC CONTROLS”, 1996 (Revision 2) Edition as published by the State of California Department of 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 130 of 414 Transportation. Such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new design of TCP shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer appropriately registered in the State of California. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the suitability and quality of any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to TCP. The Engineer may approve any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to the TCP when, in the Engineer’s sole opinion, such modifications, supplements, andlor new designs to the TCP prepared by the registered professional engineer retained by the Contractor will be beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. Such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new design shall not be implemented and no work shall be commenced that is contingent on such approval until the changed TCP are approved by the Engineer. The preparation of such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new designs of TCP shall not presuppose their approval or obligate the Agency in any fashion. Submittal and review requirements for such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to TCP shall conform to the requirements of section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and Submittals. Add the following section: 7-1 0.3.7 Payment. The contract unit prices for temporary pavement marker, temporary barricade, portable delineator, construction area sign, temporary railing (type K), temporary crash cushion, temporary signal systems, temporary traffic striping and all associated appurtenances as shown on the plans or required in the specifications shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in applying, installing, maintaining and removing temporary pavement markers, temporary barricades, portable delineators, construction area signs, temporary railing (type K), temporary crash cushions, temporary signal systems, temporary traffic striping, and appurtenances, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. Payment for temporary crash cushions and temporary railing (type K) shall include the installation, grading for installation, grading for the approach path, maintenance, painting and repainting, replacement of damaged units and removal shall be included in contract unit prices for each controlling item. Payment for relocation of temporary railing (type K) and temporary crash cushions when not shown on the plans and requested by the Engineer shall be made per Section 3-3, Extra Work, SSPWC and temporary railing and temporary crash cushions will not be measured in the new position. Add the following section: 7-10.4.4 Safety and Protection of Workers and Public. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials. Add the following: 7-10.4.5 Asbestos Materials 1) General: It is the specific intent of these Contract Documents to exclude from the work any and all products or materials containing asbestos. While no products containing asbestos shall be incorporated into the work, it will be necessary to join and remove existing asbestos cement pipe for work in Bid Schedule C and D (see Items 3 and 4 below). If unanticipated asbestos materials are encountered during any work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing. Removal of existing asbestos material shall be performed by a Contractor registered by CAUOSHA and certified by the State Contractors Licensing Board for asbestos removal. Copies of the certification shall be submitted to the Engineering prior to the commencement of any asbestos removal activities. The Contractor or subcontractor shall comply with all State and Federal laws regarding handling and removal of asbestos materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper identification, removal and disposal of all asbestos materials. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 131 of 414 2) Health Hazard: The Contractor is warned that asbestos is a known human carcinogen when inhaled and poses serious health risks. Asbestos fibers are easily inhaled and can result in chronic respiratory illness, cancer and other severe adverse health effects. 3) Joining Existing Asbestos Cement Pipe: In the specific instance of making piping connections to existing asbestos cement pipe, the Contractor shall construct the connection using a stainless steel tapping sleeve of the proper size to fit the existing asbestos cement pipe. The Contractor shall perform all tapping and cutting of the asbestos cement pipe in strict conformance with the tapping sleeve manufacturer's recommendations and all applicable CAUOSHA, EPA and governing health agency requirements. 4) Cutting and Handling Asbestos Cement Pipe: The Contractor shall perform all cutting and handling of asbestos cement pipe in strict conformance with all applicable CAL/OSHA, EPA and governing health agency requirements. The Contractor shall provide suficient supervision and monitoring to assure said conformance. 5) Payment: Joining, cutting, handling and disposing of asbestos cement pipe is a required portion of the work of Bid Schedule C and D. Payment for such work shall be included in the appropriate pay items requiring the joining, cutting and handling of asbestos cement pipe, and no additional payment shall be made. Removal and disposal of unanticipated asbestos material will be considered extra work, and payment will be made in accordance with Section 3-3.2 of the SSPWC. Add the following: 7-10.4.6 Construction Aids. Scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services needed to safely deliver and install products shall be provided. Remove same from premises when installation is complete. 7-10.4.7 Compliance With State Safety Codes. All necessary machinery guards, railings, and other protective devices shall be provided as specified andlor required by the State of California Division of Industrial Safety and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. It is assumed that all fabricators, electrical and machinery manufacturers and other equipment suppliers are conversant with such regulations and they shall be responsible for the industrial safety aspects of such equipment. All equipment shall comply with all rules and regulations of the Safety Orders of the State of California Division of Industrial Safety and all local building, plumbing, and electrical codes and ordinances. Safety guards shall be galvanized and painted after fabrication and shall be easily removed to permit inspection, removal and repair of the moving parts. 7-10.4.8 Fire Control. Fire danger shall be minimized at and near construction site. Protect surrounding private property from fire damage resulting from construction operations. 7-10.4.9 Responsibility For Job Site Conditions. Contractor agrees that he shall assume sole and complete responsibility for job site conditions during the course of construction of this project, including safety of all persons and property; that this requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours; and that the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold the City and the design consultant harmless from any and all liability except for that arising from the sole negligence of the City. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to protect the safety of employees from construction-related conditions or activities. 7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED Add the following: Municipal ordinances that affect this work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction project which would be subject to Section 1601 or Section 1603 of the Fish and Game Code, the conditions established pursuant to Section 1601 et seq. of the Fish and Game 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 132 of 414 Code shall become conditions of the contract. Add the following: ' 7-15 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES 7-15.1 Scope. The Contractor shall perform all construction necessary to complete connections and tie- ins to existing facilities under City and CMWD or WVD Supervision depending on the Schedule of Work being performed. The Contractor shall keep existing facilities in operation, unless othewise specifically permitted in these Specifications or approved by City and Districts (CMWD or WD). The Contractor shall perform all construction activities so as to avoid interference with operations of the facility and the work of others. The Contractor shall provide potholing for locating and field verifying all existing piping, structures and equipment affected by the Work. All potholing shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City prior to submittal of Shop Drawings. Delays in the Work, as a result of insufficient potholing, will be solely the Contractors responsibility. No time extensions will be allowed for Contract Work that is delayed as a result of insufficient potholing and field verification. 7-15.2 Sequencing And Operations. All operations of existing valves and gates required for the Work shall be done by the District having jurisdiction of the facility either CMWD or WD. Insofar as possible, all equipment shall be tested and in operating condition before the final tie-ins are made to connect equipment to the existing facility. Contractor shall carefully coordinate all Work and schedules and shall provide Ci written notice before shutdowns or by-passes are required. 7-1 5.3 Submittals. Submit detailed schedule of proposed connections, listing sequence and durations of all activities including shut-downs and tie-ins in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3.1 and 2-5.3.7. Add the following: 7-16 FIELD TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS AND OPERATION All mechanical equipment installed by the Contractor shall be operated and tested by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the owner. Tests shall be made to determine whether the equipment has been properly assembled, aligned, adjusted, and connected. Any changes, adjustments or replacements of equipment which are due to errors or omissions on the part of the Contractor shall be done at his own expense. Equipment shall be tested at rated pressures for required performance. The Contractor shall furnish the water for testing purposes. Add the following: A qualified Paleontologist andlor Paleontological Monitor will be provided by the City of Carlsbad for this project. The Paleontologist will attend the preconstruction meetings to make comments and/or suggestions concerning the construction monitoring program. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 5 days in advance of any excavation. In the event that unanticipated resources are discovered, the Paleontologist shall have the Engineer divert or temporarily halt ground disturbance operations in the area of discovery to allow the evaluation of resources. Excavation shall be suspended until the Paleontologist and Engineer authorize it to be resumed. The Paleontologist shall contact the City at the time of discovery and be allowed to evaluate the resources in the area of excavation. The importance of the discovered resources 7-17 PALEONTOLOGY @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 133 of 414 shall be determined by the paleontologist, in consultation with the City, Department and FHWA. The City, Department and FHWA shall concur with the evaluation before construction resumes. A monitoring report and/or evaluation report, if appropriate, which describes the results, analysis, and conclusions to the paleontological monitoring program (with appropriate graphics) shall be submitted to and approved by the City, Department and FHWA. If suspension delays the current controlling operation, the Contractor will be granted an extension of time as provided in Section 6-9, ‘Liquidated Damages,’ of these special provisions. . If such suspension delays the current controlling operation more than 2 working days, the delay will be considered a delay by the City, and the Contractor will be compensated for such delay as provided in Section 5-5 ‘Delays,’ of the standard specifications. Add the following: In the event that during grading or construction of proposed facilities, underground storage tanks or hazardous waste is encountered, the City will ensure compliance with Federal Regulations 40CFR 261 -268 and 29CFR 1910.120 and with the State of California CCR Title 23 Health and safety Regulations as mandated by the San Diego County Environmental Health Department, Hazardous Materials Management Division. In the event that the Contractor encounters underground storage tanks or hazardous waste, the Contractor shall cease excavation operations and notify the Engineer immediately. The Engineer shall take action as set forth in the appropriate documents. 7-18 HAZARDOUS WASTE If suspension delays the current controlling operation, the Contractor will be granted an extension of time as provided in Section 6-9, ‘Liquidated Damages,’ of these special provisions. If such suspension delays the current controlling operation more than 2 working days, the delay will be considered a delay by the City, and the Contractor will be compensated for such delay as provided in Section 5-5 ‘Delays,’ of the standard specifications. SECTION 9 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK 9-1.1 General. Add the following: Work Not Listed in the Bid Schedule: Costs for related work and appurtenances which are required and/or implied by the General Provisions, Technical Specifications, Special Provisions and Plans and are not listed as a separate bid item but are necessary to complete the project shall be included in the appropriate bid item or items within the proposal. 9-1.4 Units of Measurement. Modify as follows: U.S. Standard Measures. The system of measure for this contract shall be the 9-3 PAYMENT Payment for obtaining and complying with permits during construction, including, but not limited to, NPDES permits, building permits, encroachment permits, excavation permits, drilling permits, disposal permits, temporary easements, licenses, inspection fees, and Federal, State and local taxes will be included in prices bid for work for which such costs are appurtenant. - Payment for coordinating with agencies, developers, utilities, events and persons described will be included in prices bid for work to which coordination is appurtenant. % 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 134 of 414 9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. Delete the second paragraph and substitute the following: Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the work performed to the closure date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on contract unit prices, completed change order work and as provided for in Section 9-2 of the Standard Specifications (SSPWC). Progress payments shall be made no later than thirty (30) calendar days after the closure date. Five (5) working days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete the detailed progress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor's information. Should the Contractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within ten (10) days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether the supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental payment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than seven (7) days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a document setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. In conformance with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the City shall make payments within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed supplemental payment request is not made within thirty (30) days after receipt by the Engineer, then the City shall pay interest to the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure . . Delete the third paragraph and substitute the following: The Agency shall retain 10 percent of such estimated value of the work done as part security for the fulfillment of the contract by the Contractor, except that at any time after 50 percent of the work has been completed, if the Engineer finds that satisfactory progress is being made, the Agency may reduce the total amount being retained from payment pursuant to the above requirements to 5 percent of the total estimated value of said work and may also reduce the amount retained from any of the remaining partial payments to 5 percent of the estimated value of such work and materials. In addition, on any partial payment made after 95 percent of the work has been completed, the Agency may reduce the amount withheld from payment pursuant to the requirements of this Section to such lesser amounts as the Engineer determines is adequate security for the fulfillment of the balance of the work and other requirements of the contract, but in no event will said amount be reduced to less than 125 percent of the estimated value of the work yet to be completed as determined by the Engineer. Such reduction will only be made upon the written request of the Contractor and shall be approved in writing by the surety on the Performance Bond and by the surety on the Payment Bond. The approval of the surety shall be submitted to the Engineer; the signature of the person executing the approval for the surety shall be properly acknowledged and the power of attorney authorizing the person executing the approval to give such consent must either accompany the document or be on file with the Agency. Add paragraph 6 et seq. as follows: After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the contract bid item and change order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the contract. All prior estimates and progress payments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate. The Contractor shall have 30 calendar days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make written statement disputing any bid item or change order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit the statement and supporting documentation within the time specified, the Contractor acknowledges that full and final payment has been made for all contract bid items and change order items. If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the '3 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 135 of 414 Engineer will review the disputed item within 30 calendar days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in subsection 3-5, Disputed Work. The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor's claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items. 9-3.2.1 Payment for Claims. Add the following: Except for those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in subsection 9-3.2 all claims of any dollar amount shall be submitted in a written statement by the Contractor no later than the date of receipt of the Final Payment Estimate. Those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in subsection 9-3.2 shall be submitted no later than 30 days after receipt of the Final Payment estimate. No claim will be considered that was not included in this written statement, nor will any claim be allowed for which written notice or protest is required under any provision of this contract including sections 34 Changed Conditions, 3-5 Disputed Work, 6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor, 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report, or 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, unless the Contractor has complied with notice or protest requirements. The claims filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said claims. The Engineer will consider and determine the Contractor's claims and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying the claims. Payment for claims shall be processed within 30 calendar days of their resolution for those claims approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall proceed with informal dispute resolution under subsection 3-5, Disputed Work, for those claims remaining in dispute. Add the following section: 9-3.3.1 Delivered Materials. the will not be included in the progress estimate. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into Add the following section: 9-3.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Payment for mobilization and preparatory work will be made at the stipulated lump-sum price bid therefor in the bid schedule. The Contract lump sum price paid for mobilization and Preparatory work shall not exceed five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000.00), and includes full compensation for furnishing all insurance, bonds, licenses, labor, materials, utilities, tools, equipment, and for doing all the work involved in mobilization and preparatory work and operations, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidental to preparing to conduct work on and off the project site and other offsite facilities necessary for work on the project; for all other facilities, sureties, work and operations which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on various contract items on or off the project site, excepting those specifically paid for under separate sections of these specifications. The Contractor hereby agrees that the stipulated lump sum amount is sufficient for mobilization and preparatory work, as described in this section, and that the Contractor shall have no right to additional compensation for mobilization and preparatory Work. Progress payments for mobilization and preparatory Work will be made as follows: For the first progress payment (after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed), forty percent (40%) of the amount bid for mobilization and preparatory Work will be allowed. For the second progress payment, an additional sixty percent (60%) of the amount bid for mobilization and preparatory work will be allowed 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 136 of 414 therefor. Add the following: 9-3.5 Final Pay Quantities. When an item of work is designated as (F) or (S-F) in the Engineer's Estimate, the estimated quantity for that item of work shall be the final pay quantity, unless the dimensions of any portion of that item are revised by the Engineer, or the item or any portion of the item is eliminated. If the dimensions of any portion of the item are revised, and the revisions result in an in- crease or decrease in the estimated quantity of that item of work, the final pay quantity for the item will be revised in the amount represented by the changes in the dimensions. If a final pay item is eliminated, the . estimated quantity for the item will be eliminated. If a portion of a final pay item is eliminated, the final pay quantity will be revised in the amount represented by the eliminated portion of the item of work. The estimated quantity for each item of work designated as (F) or (S-F) in the Engineer's Estimate shall be considered as approximate only, and no guarantee is made that the quantity which can be determined by computations, based on the details and dimensions shown on the plans, will equal the estimated quantity. No allowance will be made in the event that the quantity based on computations does not equal the estimated quantity. In case of discrepancy between the quantity shown in the Engineer's Estimate for a final pay item and the quantity or summation of quantities for the same item shown on the plans, payment will be based on the quantity shown in the Engineer's Estimate. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 137 of 414 SECTION 10 - FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FEDERAL-AID CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS 10-1.01 GENERAL The bidder's attention is directed to the federal requirements in the proposal section of these special provisions for the requirements and conditions which the bidder must observe in the preparation of the proposal form and the submission of the bid. In addition to the subcontractors required to be listed, each proposal shall have therein the portion of work that will be done by each subcontractor listed. A sheet for listing the subcontractors is included in the Proposal. IN conformance with Public Contract Code Section 7106, a Noncollusion Affidavit is included in the proposal. Signing the Proposal shall also constitute signature of the Noncollusion Affidavit. The Contractor, sub recipient or subcontractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin or sex in performance of this contract. The contractor shall carryout applicable requirements of 49 CFR part 26 in the award and administration of DOT assisted contracts. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such remedy as the recipient deems appropriate. Each subcontract signed by the bidder must include this assurance. 10-1.02 SUBCONTRACTOR AND DBE RECORDS. The Contractor shall maintain records of all subcontracts. The records shall show those subcontracts entered into with certified DBE subcontractors and records of materials purchased from certified DBE suppliers. Such records shall show the name and business address of each DBE subcontractor or vendor and the total dollar amount actually paid each DBE subcontractor or vendor. Upon completion of the contract, a summary of these records shall be prepared on "Final Report - Utilization of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises - (DBE), First-Tier Subcontractors" (Exhibit 17-F/Form CEM-2402) and certified correct by the Contractor or his authorized representative, and shall be furnished to the Engineer. 10-1.03 PERFORMANCE OF DBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS The DBEs listed by the Contractor in response to the requirements in the section of these special provisions entitled "Submission of DBE Information, Award, And Execution Of Contract," which are determined by the Department to be certified DBEs, shall perform the work and supply the materials for which they are listed unless the Contractor has received prior written authorization to perform the work with other forces or to obtain the materials from other sources. Authorization to utilize other forces or sources of materials may be requested for the following reasons: (1) The listed DBE, after having had a reasonable opportunity to do so, fails or refuses to execute a written contract, when such written contract, based upon the general terms, conditions, plans and specifications for the project, or on the terms of such subcontractor's or supplier's written bid, is presented by the Contractor. (2) The listed DBE becomes bankrupt or insolvent. (3) The listed DBE fails or refuses to perform his subcontract or furnish the listed materials. (4) The Contractor stipulated that a bond was a condition of executing a subcontract and the listed DBE subcontractor fails or refuses to meet the bond requirements of the Contractor. (5) The work performed by the listed subcontractor is substantially unsatisfactory and is not in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications, or the subcontractor is substantially delaying or disrupting the progress of the work. (6) It would be in the best interest of the State. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment for such work or material unless it is performed or supplied by the listed DBE or by other forces (including those of the Contractor) pursuant to prior written authorization of the Engineer. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 138 of 414 10-1.04 BUY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS. Attention is directed to the "Buy America" requirements of the Surface Transportation Assistance Act of 1982 (Section 165) and the lntermodal Surface Transportation Efficiency Act of 1991 (ISTEA) Sections 1041 (a) and 1048(a), and the regulations adopted pursuant thereto. In accordance with said law and regulations, all manufacturing processes for steel and iron materials furnished for incorporation into the work on this project shall occur in the United States; with the exception that pig iron and processed, pelletized and reduced iron ore manufactured outside of the United States may be used in the domestic manufacturing process for such steel and iron materials. The application of coatings, such as epoxy coating, galvanizing, painting, and any other coating that protects or enhances the value of such steel or iron materials shall be considered a manufacturing process subject to the "Buy America" requirements. A Certificate of Compliance, conforming to the provisions in Section 4-1.5, Certification, of the SSPWC and these Special Provisions, shall be furnished for steel and iron materials. The certificates, in addition to certifying that the materials comply with the specifications, shall also specifically certify that all manufacturing processes for the materials occurred in the United States, except for the exceptions allowed herein. The requirements imposed by said law and regulations do not prevent a minimal use of foreign steel and iron materials if the total combined cost of such materials used does not exceed one-tenth of one percent (0.1%) of the total contract cost or $2,500, whichever is greater. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer acceptable documentation of the quantity and value of any foreign steel and iron prior to incorporating such materials into the work. 10-1.05 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT The bidder's attention is directed to these special provisions for the requirements and conditions concerning award and execution of contract. The award of the contract, if it be awarded, will be to the lowest responsible bidder whose proposal complies with all the requirements prescribed and who has met the goal for DBE participation or has demonstrated, to the satisfaction of the City/County, adequate good faith efforts to do so. Meeting the goal for DBE participation or demonstrating to the satisfaction of the City/County, adequate good faith efforts to do so is a condition for being eligible for award of contract. 10-1.06 SUBCONTRACTING Pursuant to the provisions in Section 1777.1 of the Labor Code, the Labor Commissioner publishes and distributes a list of contractors ineligible to perform work as a subcontractor on a public works project. This list of debarred contractors is available from the Department of Industrial Relations web site at http://www.dir.ca.gov/dir/Labor-law/DLSE/Debar. html. The provisions of the Standard Specifications, that the Contractor shall perform with the Contractor's own organization contract work amounting to not less than 50 percent of the original contract price, is not changed by the Federal Aid requirement specified under "Federal Requirements for Federal-Aid Construction Contracts" in Section 10 of these special provisions that the Contractor perform not-less than 30 percent of the original contract work with the Contractor's own organization. Each subcontract and any lower tier subcontract that may in turn be made shall include the "Federal .Requirements for Federal-Aid Construction Contracts" in Section 10 of these special provisions. This requirement shall be enforced as follows: A. Noncompliance shall be corrected. Payment for subcontracted work involved will be withheld from progress payments due, or to become due, until correction is made. Failure to comply may result in termination of the contract. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 139 of 414 In conformance with the Federal DBE regulations Sections 26.53(f)(1) and Title 49 CFR: 26.53(f)(2) Part 26, A. The Contractor shall not terminate for convenience a DBE subcontractor listed in response to Section 2-1.028, "Submission of DBE Information," and then perform that work with its own forces, or those of an affiliate without the written consent of the Department, and B. If a DBE subcontractor is terminated or fails to complete its work for any reason; the Contractor will be required to make good faith efforts to substitute another DBE subcontractor for the original DBE subcontractor, to the extent needed to meet the contract goal. The requirement in Section 2-1.02, "Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE)," of these special provisions that DBEs.must be certified on the date bids are opened does not apply to DBE substitutions after award of the contract. 10-1.07 PROMPT PROGRESS PAYMENT TO SUBCONTRACTORS Attention is directed to the provisions in Sections 10262 and 10262.5 of the Public Contract Code and Section 71 08.5 of the Business and Professions Code concerning prompt payment to subcontractors. 10-1.08 PROMPT PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS TO SUBCONTRACTORS The Contractor shall return all moneys withheld in retention from the subcontractor within 30 days after receiving payment for work satisfactorily completed, even if the other contract work is not completed and has not been accepted. This requirement shall not be construed to limit or impair any contractual, administrative, or judicial remedies otherwise available to the Contractor or subcontractor in the event of a dispute involving late payment or nonpayment by the Contractor or deficient subcontract performance or noncompliance by a subcontractor. FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS (CONTINUED)- SEE ATTACHED SHEETS. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 140 of 414 Local Assistance Procedures Manual PS&E Checklist Instructions EXHIBIT 12-E Attachment A SECTION 14. FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FEDERALAID CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS GENERAL.-The work herein proposed will be financed in whole or in part with Federal funds, and therefore all of the statutes, rules and regulations promulgated by the Federal Gov- ernment and applicable to work financed in whole or in part with Federal funds will apply to such work. The "Required Contract Provisions, Federal-Aid Construction Contracts, "Form FHWA 1273, are included in this Section 14. Whenever in said required contract provisions references are made to "SHA contracting officer," "SHA resident engineer," or "authorized representative of the SHA," such references shall be construed to mean "Engineer" as defined in Section 1-1.18 of the Standard Specifications. PERFORMANCE OF PREVIOUS CONTRACT.-In ad- dition to the provisions in Section II, "Nondiscrimination," and Section VU, "Subletting or Assigning the Contract," of the re- quired contract provisions, the Contractor shall comply with the following: The bidder shall execute the CERTIFICATION WITH RE- TRACTS OR SUBCONTRACTS SUBJECT TO THE EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE AND THE FILING OF GARD TO THE PERFORMANCE OF PREVIOUS CON- REQUIRED REPORTS located in the proposal. No request for subletting or assigning any portion of the contract in excess of $10,000 will be considered under the provisions of Section VI1 of the required contract provisions unless such request is accompanied by the CERTIFICATION referred to above, executed by the proposed subcontractor. NON-COLLUSION PROVISION.-The provisions in this section are applicable to all contracts except contracts for Federal Aid Secondary projects. Title 23, United States Code, Section 112, requires as a condi- tion precedent to approval by the Federal Highway Administrator of the contract for this work that each bidder file a sworn statement executed by, or on behalf of, the person, firm, association, or corporation to whom such contract is to be awarded, certifying that such person, firm, association, or corporation has not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion. or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with the submitted bid. A form to make the non-collusion affidavit statement required by Section 112 as a certification under penalty of perjury rather than as a sworn statement as permitted by 28, USC, Sec. 1746, is included in the proposal. TERPRISES IN SUBCONTRACTING.-Part 26, Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations applies to this Federal-aid project. Pertinent sections of said Code are incorporated in part or in its entirety within other sections of these special provisions. Schedule &Information for Determining Joint Venture Eli- gibility PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS EN- (This form need not be filled in if all joint venture firms are DBE owned.) 1. Name of joint venture 2. Address ofjoint venture 3. Phone number ofjoint venture ~ 4. Identify the firms which comprise the joint venture. (The DBE partner must complete Schedule A.) a. Describe the role of the DBE firm in the joint venture. b.Describe very briefly the experience and business qualifications of each non-DBE joint venturer: ~~~~ ___~ - 5. Nature of the joint venture's business ~~ ~~~ - 6. Provide a copy of the joint venture agreement. 7. What is the claimed percentage of DBE ownership? - 8. Ownership of joint venture: (This need not be filled in if described in the joint venture agreement, provided by question 6.). FR-1 Revised 3-95 08-07-95 EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment A PS&E Checklist Instructions ,- a. Profit and loss sharing. b. Capital contributions, including equipment- c. Other applicable ownership interests. 9. Control of and participation in this contract. Identify by name, race, sex, and "firm" those individuals (and their titles) who are responsible for day-to-day management and policy decision making, including, but not limited to, those with prime responsibility for: ..................................................................................................... Name of Firm Name of Firm Signature Signature ..................................................................................................... Name Name Title Title a. Financial decisions b. Management decisions, such as: 1. Estimating ~ ~~~ ~ 2. Marketing and sales ~~ ~~ 3. Hiring and firing of management personnel - 4. Purchasing of major items or supplies c. Supervision of field operations Note.-If, after filing this Schedule B and before the comple- tion of the joint venture's work on the contract covered by this regulation, there is any significant change in the information submitted, the joint venture must inform the grantee, either di- rectly or through the prime contractor if the joint venture is a subcontractor. Amdavit "The undersigned swear that the foregoing statements are cor- rect and include all material information necessary to identify and explain the terms and operation of our joint venture and the intended participation by each joint venturer in the undertaking. Further, the undersigned covenant and agree to provide to grantee cumnt, complete and accurate information regarding actual joint venture work and the payment therefor and any pro- posed changes in any of the joint venture arrangements and to permit the audit and examination of the books, records and files of the joint venture, or those of each joint venturer relevant to the joint venture, by authorized representatives of the grantee or the Federal funding agency. Any material misrepresentation will be grounds for terminating any contract which may be awarded and for initiating action under Federal or State laws concerning false statements." ..................................................................................................... Date Date Date state of county of day of On this - , 19 - before me appeared (Name) , to me personally known, who, being duly sworn, did execute the foregoing affi- davit, and did state that he or she was properly authorized by (Name of firm) to execute the affidavit and did so as his or her free act and deed. Notary Public Commission expires Pall Date State of county of On this - day of , 19 - before me appeared (Name) to me personally known, who, being duly sworn, did execute the fotegoing affidavit, and did state that he or she was properly authorized by (Name of firm) to execute the affidavit and did so as his or her free act and deed. Notary Public Commission expires [Seal] Rwircd 3-95 08-07-95 FR-2 Local Assistance Procedures Manual EXHIBIT 12-E PS&E Checklist Instructions Attachment B REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS FEDERALAID CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (Exclusive of Appalachian Contracts) 1. 11. 111. IV. V. VI. Vll. VIII. IX. X. XI. XII. page General ....................................................................... 3 Nondiscrimination ..................................................... 3 Nonsegregated Facilities ............................................ 5 Payment of Predetermined Minimum Wage .............. 6 Statements and Payrolls ............................................. 8 Record of Materials, Supplies, and Labor .................. 9 Subletting or Assigning the Contract ......................... 9 Safety: Accident Prevention ..................................... 10 False Statements Concerning Highway Project .......... 10 lmplementation of Clean Air Act and Federal Water Pollution Control Act .................................................. IO Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility, and Voluntary Exclusion ...................... 11 Certification Regarding Use of Contract Funds for Lobbying .................................................................... 12 ATTACHMENTS A. Employment Preference for Appalachian Contracts (included in Appalachian contracts only) I. GENERAL 1. These contract provisions shall apply to all work performed on the contract by the contractor's own organization and with the assistance of workers under the contractor's immediate superintendence and to all work performed on the contract by piecework, station work, or by subcontract. 2. Except as otherwise provided for in each section, the con- tractor shall insert in each subcontract all of the stipulations contained in these Required Contract Provisions, and further re- quire their inclusion in any lower tier subcontract or purchase order that may in turn be made. The Required Contract Provisions shall not be incorporated by reference in any case. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with these Required Contract Provisions. 3. A breach of any of the stipulations contained in these Re- quired Contract Provisions shall be sufficient grounds for termi- nation of the contract. 4. A breach of the following clauses of the Required Contract Provisions may also be grounds for debarment as provided in 29 CFR 5.12: Section 1, paragraph 2; Section lV, paragraphs 1,2,3,4, and 7; Section V, paragraphs 1 and 2a through 2g. 5. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of Section IV (except paragraph 5) and Section V of these Required . Contract Provisions shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accor- dance with the procedures of the U.S. Department of Labor (DOL) as set forth in 29 CFR 5,6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the DOL, or the contractor's employees or their representatives. FR-3 6. Selection of Labor: During the performance of this contract, a. discriminate against labor from any other State, possession, or territory of the United States (except for employment preference for Appalachian contracts, when applicable, as specified in Attachment A), or b. imploy convict labor for any purpose within the limits of the project unless it is labor performed by convicts who are on parole, supervised release, or probation. II. NONDISCRIMINATION the contractor shall not: (Applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts of S10,OOO or more.) I. Equal Employment Opportunity: Equal employment opportunity (EEO) requirements not to discriminate and to take affirmative action to assure equal opportunity as set forth under laws, executive orders, rules, regulations (28 CFR 35, 29 CFR 1630, and 41 CFR 60) and orders of the Secretary of Labor as modified by the provisions prescribed herein, and im- posed pursuant to 23 U.S.C. 140 shall constitute the EEO and specific affirmative action standards for the contractor's project activities under this contract. The Equal Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications set forth under 41 CFR.60-4.3 and the provisions of the American Disabilities Act of 1990 (42U.S.C. 12101 et seq.) set forth under 28 CFR35 and 29 CFR 1630 are incorporated by reference in this contract. In the execution of this contract, the contractor agrees to comply with the following minimum specific requirement activities of EEO: a.The contractor will work with the State highway agency (SHA) and the Federal Government in canying out EEO obli- gations and in their review of hidher activities under the con- tract. b.The contractor will accept as his operating policy the following statement: "It is the policy of this Company to assure that applicants are employed and that empioyees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, religion, sex, color, national origin, age or disabi!i@. Such action shall include: employment, upgrading. demotion, or transfer; recruitment or remitment ad- vertising; layofl or termination; rates of poy or other forms of compemation; and selection for training, including apprentice- ship, preapprenticeship, and/or on-the-job training. 2. EEO Officer: The contractor will designate and make known to the SHA contracting officers an EEO Officer who will have the responsibility for and must be capable of effectively EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment B PS&E Checklist Instructions administering and promoting an active contractor program of EEO and who must be assigned adequate authority and responsibility to do so. 3. Dissemination of Policy: All members of the contractor’s staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and discharge employees, or who recommend such action, or who are substantially involved in such action, will be made fully cognizant of, and will implement, the contractor’s EEO policy and contractual responsibilities to provide EEO in each grade and classification of employment. To ensure that the above agreement will be met, the following actions will be taken as a minimum: a. Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees will be conducted before the start of work and then not less often than once every six months, at which time the contractor’s EEO policy and its implementation will be re- viewed and explained. The meetings will be conducted by the EEO Officer. b. All new supervisory or personnel office employees will be given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO Officer, covering all major aspects of the contractor’s EEO obligations within thirty days following their reporting for duty with the contractor. c. All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for the project will be instructed by the EEO Officer in the contractor’s procedures for locating and hiring minority group employees. d. Notices and posters setting forth the contractor’s EEO policy will be placed in areas readily accessible to employees, applicants for employment and potential employees. e. The contractor’s EEO policy and the procedures to im- plement such policy will be brought to the attention of em- ployees by means of meetings, employee handbooks, or other appropriate means. 4. Recruitment: When advertising for employees, the contractor will include in all advertisements for employees the notation: “An Equal Opportunity Employer.” All such adver- tisements will be placed in publications having a large circulation among minority groups in the area from which the project work force would normally be derived. a. The contractor will, unless precluded by a valid bargaining agreement, conduct systematic and direct recruitment through public and private employee referral sources likely to yield qualified minority group applicants. To meet this requirement, the contractor will identify sources of potential minority group employees, and establish with such identified sources procedures whereby minority group applicants may be referred to the contractor for employment consideration. b. In the event the contractor has a valid bargaining agreement providing for exclusive hiring hall referrals, he is expected to observe the provisions of that agreement to the extent that the system permits the contractor’s compliance with EEO contract provisions. (The DOL has held that where implementation of such agreements have the effect of dis- criminating against minorities or women, or obligates the contractor to do the same, such implementation violates Ex- ecutive Order 1 1246, as amended.) Form 1273 -Revid 3-95 08-07-95 E. The contractor will encowage his present employees to refer minority group applicants for employment. Information and procedures with regard to referring minority group applicants will be discussed with employees. 5. Personnel Actions: Wages, working conditions, and employee benefits shall be established and administered, and personnel actions of every type, including hiring, upgrading, promotion, transfer, demotion, 1ayoK and termination, shall be taken without regard to race, color, religion, sex, MtiOnal origin, age or disability. The following procedures shall be followed a. The contractor will conduct periodic inspections of project sites to ensure .that working conditions and employee facilities do not indicate discriminatory treatment of project site personnel. b. The contractor will periodically evaluate the spread of wages paid within each classification to determine any evidence of discriminatory wage practices. c. The contractor will periodically review selected personnel actions in depth to determine whether there is evidence of discrimination. Where evidence is found, the contractor will promptly take corrective action. If the review indicates that the discrimination may extend beyond the actions reviewed, such corrective action shall include all affected persons. d. The contractor will promptly investigate all complaints of alleged discrimination made to the contractor in connection with his obligations under this contract, will attempt to resolve such complaints, and will take appropriate corrective action within a reasonable time. If the investigation indicates that the discrimination may affect persons other than the complainant, such corrective action shall include such other persons. Upon completion of each investigation, the contractor will inform every complainant of all of his avenues of appeal. 6. Training and Promotion: a. The contractor will assist in locating, qualifying, and increasing the skills of minority group and women employees, and applicants for employment. b. Consistent with the contractor’s work force requirements and as permissible under Federal and State regulations, the contractor shall make full use of training programs, i.e., apprenticeship, and on-the-job training programs for the ge- ographical area of contract performance. Where feasible, 25 percent of apprentices or trainees in each occupation shall be in their first year of apprenticeship or training. In the event a special provision for training is provided under this contract, this subparagraph will be superseded as indicated in the special provision. c. The contractor will advise employees and applicants for employment of available training programs and entrance re- quirements for each. promotion potential of minority group and women employees and will encourage eligible employees to apply for such training and promotion. d. The contractor will periodically review the training and . Farm 1273 - Revised 3-95 08-07-95 FR-4 Local Assistance Procedures Manual EXHIBIT 12-E PS&E Checklist Instructions Attachment B 7. Unions: If the contractor relies in whole or in part upon unions as a source of employees, the contractor will use hisher best efforts to obtain the cooperation of such unions to increase opportunities for minority groups and women within the unions, and to effect referrals by such unions of minority and female employees. Actions by the contractor either directly or through a contractor's association acting as agent will include the procedures set forth below: aThe contractor will use best efforts to develop, in coop eration with the unions, joint training programs aimed toward qualifying more minority group members and women for membership in the unions and increasing the skills of minority group employees and women so that they may qualify for higher paying employment. b. The contractor will use best efforts to incorporate an EEO clause into each union agreement to the end that such union will be contractually bound to refer applicants without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability. c. The contractor is to obtain information as to the referral practices and policies of the labor union except that to the extent such information is within the exclusive possession of the labor union and such labor union refuses to furnish such information to the contractor, the contractor shall so certify to the SHA and shall set forth what efforts have been made to obtain such information. d. In the event the union is unable to provide the contractor with a reasonable flow of minority and women referrals within the time limit set forth in the collective bargaining agreement, the contractor will, through independent recruitment efforts, fill the employment vacancies without regard to race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability; making full efforts to obtain qualified andor qualifiable minority group persons and women. (The DOL has held that it shall be no excuse that the union with which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement providing for exclusive referral failed to refer minority employees.) In the event the union referral prac- tice prevents the Contractor from meeting the obligations pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and these special provisions, such contractor shall immediately notify the SHA. 8. Selection of Subcontractors, Procurement of Materials and Leasing of Equipment: The contractor shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, age or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. a The contractor shall notify all potential subcontractors and suppliers of hisher EEO obligations under this contract. b. Disadvantaged business enterprises (DBE), as defined in 49 CFR 26, shall have equal opportunity to compete for and perform subcontracts which the contractor enters into pursuant to this contract. The contractor will use his best efforts to solicit bids from and to utilize DBE subcontractors or subcontractors with meaningful minority group and female representation among their employees. Contractors shall obtain lists of DBE construction firms from SHA personnel. c. The contractor will use his best efforts to ensure subcon- tractor compliance with their EEO obligations. 9. Records and Reports: The contractor shall keep such records as necessary to document compliance with the EEO requirements. Such records shall be retained for a period of three years following completion of the contract work and shall be available at reasonable times and places for inspection by au- thorized representatives of the SHA and the FHWA. a.The records kept by the contractor shall document the (1)The number of minority and non-minority group members and women employed in each work classification on the project; (2)The progress and efforts being made in cooperation with unions, when applicable, to increase employment op- portunities for minorities and women; (3) The progress and efforts being made in locating, hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading minority and female employees; and (4)The progress and efforts being made in securing the services of DBE subcontractors or subcontractors with meaningfbl minority and female representation among their employees. b. The contractors will submit an annual report to the SHA each July for the duration of the project, indicating the number of minority, women, and non-minority group employees currently engaged in each work classification required by the contract work. This information is to be reported on Form FHWA-1391. If on-the-job training is being required by special provision, the contractor will be required to collect and report training data 111 NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES (Applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all a. By submission of this bid, the execution of this contract or subcontract, or the consummation of this material supply agreement or purchase order, as appropriate, the bidder, Federal- aid construction contractor, subcontractor, material supplier, or vendor, as appropriate, certifies that the firm docs not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated facilities at MY of its establishments, and that the fum does not permit its employees to perform their services at any location, under its control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The firm agrees that a breach of this certification is a violation of the EEO provisions of this contract. The firm further certifies that no employee will be denied access to adequate facilities on the basis of sex or disability. b. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and washrooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms, and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive, or are, in fact, seg- regated on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, age or disability, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. The only exception will be for the disabled when the demands for accessibility override (e.g. disabled parking). . following: related subcontracts of $10,000 or more.) Form 1273 - Rwiwd 3-95 08-07-95 FR-5 EXHIBIT 124 Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment B . PS&E Checklist Instructions C. The contractor agrees that it has obtained or will obtain identical certification from proposed subcontractors or material suppliers prior to award of subcontracts or consummation of material supply agreements of $10,000 or more and that it will retain such certifications in its files. IV. PAYMENT OF PREDETERMINED MINIMUM WAGE (Applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts exceeding $2,000 and to all related subcontracts, except for projects located on roadways classified as local roads or nual minor collectors, which are exempt.) 1. General: a. All mechanics and laborers employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account [except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations (29 CFR 3)] issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) the full amounts of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment. The payment shall be computed at wage rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor (hereinafter "the wage determination") which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor or its subcontractors and such laborers and mechanics. The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under paragraph 2 of this Section IV and the DOL poster (WH-1321) or Form FHWA-1495) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. For the purpose of this Section, contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section l(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a) on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of Section IV, paragraph 3b, hereof. Also, for the purpose of this Section, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage deter- mination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in paragraphs 4 and 5 of this Section IV. b. Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein, provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. c. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon Act and related acts contained in 29 CFR 1,3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. Form 1273 - Rcviscd 3-95 08-07-95 FR-6 2. Classification: a. The SHA contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics employed under the contract, which is not listed in the wage determination, shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. b. The contracting oficer shall approve an additional classification, wage rate and fringe benefits only when the following criteria have been met: (1) the work to be performed by the additional classifi- cation requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; (2) the additional classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; (3) the proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination; and (4)with respect to helpers, when such a classification prevails in the area in which the work is performed. c. If the contractor or subcontractors, as appropriate, the laborers and mechanics (if known) to be employed in the addi- tional classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the DOL, Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Wage and Hour Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting otlicer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. d. In the event the contractor or subcontractors, as appro- priate, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the addi- tional classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Wage and Hour Administrator for determination. Said Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting otlicer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary e. The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraph 2c or 2d of this Section IV shall be paid to all workers performing work in the additional classification from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. 3. Payment of Fringe Benefits: a. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the con- tract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor or subcontractors, as appropriate, shall either pay the benefit Local Assistance Procedures Manual EXHIBIT 12-E PS&E Checklist Instructions Attachment B as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly case equivalent thereof. b. If the contractor or subcontractor, as appropriate, does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, hdshe may consider as a part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the Written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. 4. Apprentices and Trainees (Programs of the U.S. DOL) . and Helpers: a. Apprentices: (1) Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the DOL, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in hidher first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State apprenticeship agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. (2) The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeyman-level employees on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any employee listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate listed in the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor or subcontractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman-level hourly rate) specified in the contractor’s or subcontractor’s registered program shall be observed. (3) Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice’s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the joumeyman- level hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship pro- gram. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator for the Wage and Hour Division determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. (4) In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor or subcontractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the comparable work performed by regular employees until an acceptable program is approved. b. Trainees: (1) Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the DOL, Employment and Training Administration. (2) The ratio of trainees to journeyman-level employees on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. (3)Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for hidher level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman-level hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman-level wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices, in which case such trainees shall re- ceive the same fringe benefits as apprentices. (4) In the event the Employment and Training Adminis- tration withdraws approval of a training program, the con- tractor or subcontractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. c. Helpers: Helpers will be permitted to work on a project if the helper classification is specified and defined on the applicable wage determination or is approved pursuant to the conformance procedure set forth in Section IV.2. Any worker listed on a payroll at a helper wage rate, who is not a helper under an approved definition, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. Form 1273 - Revised 3-95 08-07-95 FR-7 EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment B ' PS&E Checklist Instructions 5. Apprentices and Trainees (Programs of the U.S. DOT): Apprentices and trainees working under apprenticeship and skill baining programs which have been certified by the Secretary of Transportation as promoting EEO in connection with Federal-aid highway construction programs are not subject to the requirements of paragraph 4 of this Section IV. The straight time hourly wage rates for apprentices and trainees under such programs will be established by the particular programs. The ratio of apprentices and trainees to journeymen shall not be greater than permitted by the terms of the particular program. 6. Withholding: The SHA shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the DOL withhold, or cause to be withheld, from the contractor or subcontractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements which is held by the same prime contractor, as much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the SHA contracting officer may, after written notice to the contractor, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further paymenf advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. 7. Overtime Requirements: No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers, mechanics, watchmen, or guards (including apprentices, trainees, and helpers described in paragraphs 4 and 5 above) shall require or permit any laborer, mechanic, watchman, or guard in any workweek in which he/she is employed on such work, to work in excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer, mechanic, watchman, or guard receives compensation at a rate not less than one-and-one-half times hidher basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek. 8. Violation: Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages: In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph 7 above, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible thereof shall be. liable to the affected employee for hisher unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory) for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer, mechanic, watchman, or guard employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph 7, in the sum of SI0 for each calendar day on which such employee was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard work week of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph 7. 9. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages: The SHA shall upon its own action or upon written request of any authorized representative of the DOL withhold, or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph 8 above. V. STATEVENTS AND PAYROLLS (Applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts exceeding $2,000 and to all related subcontracts, except for projects located on roadways classified as local roads or rural collectors, which are exempt.) 1. Compliance with Copeland Regulations (29 CFR 3): The contractor shall comply with the Copeland Regulations of the Secretary of Labor which are herein incorporated by reference. 2. Payrolls and Payroll Records: a Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor and each subcontractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of 3 years from the date of completion of the contract for all laborers, mechanics, apprentices, trainees, watchmen, helpers, and guards working at the site of the work. b. The payroll records shall contain the name, social security number, and address of each such employee; his or her correct classification; hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalent thereof the types described in Section l(b)(2)@) of the Davis Bacon Act); daily and weekly number of hours worked; deductions made; and actual wages paid. In addition, for Appalachian contracts, the payroll records shall contain a notation indicating whether the employee does, or does not, normally reside in the labor area as defined in Attachment A, paragraph 1. Whenever the Secretary of Labor, pursuant to Sec- tion IV, paragraph 3b, has found that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section l(b)(2)(B) of the Davis Bacon Act, the contractor and each subcontractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and show the cost anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing benefits. Contractors or subcontractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprentices and trainees, and ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. Form 1273 -Revised 3-95 08-07-95 FR-8 Local Assistance Procedures Manual EXHIBIT 12-E PS%E Checklist Instructions Attachment B c. Each contractor and subcontractor shall furnish, each week in which any contract work is performed, to the SHA resident engineer a payroll of wages paid each of its employees (including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, described in Section IV, paragraphs 4 and 5, and watchmen and guards en- gaged on work during the preceding weekly payroll period). The payroll submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under paragraph 2b of this Section V. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal stock number 029-005-0014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. d.Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or sub- contractor or hidher agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) that the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under paragraph 2b of this Section V and that such information is comet and complete; (2) that such laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in the Regulations, 29 CFR 3; (3) that each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less that the applicable wage rate and fringe benefits or cash equivalent for the classification of worked performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. e. The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph 2d of this Section V. f. The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor to civil or criminal prosecution under 18 U.S.C. 1001 and31 U.S.C. 231. g. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records re- quired under paragraph 2b of this Section V available for in- spection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the SHA, the FHWA, or the DOL, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the re- quired records or to make them available, the SHA, the FHWA, the DOL, or all may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such actions as may be nec- essary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. VI. LABOR RECORD OF MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, AND 1. On all Federal-aid contracts on the National Highway Sys- tem, except those which provide solely for the installation of protective devices at railroad grade crossings, those which are constructed on a force account or direct labor basis, highway beautification contracts, and contracts for which the total final construction cost for roadway and bridge is less than S1,OOO,OOO (23 CFR 635) the contractor shall: a.Become familiar with the list of specific materials and supplies contained in Form FHWA-47, "Statement of Materials and Labor Used by Contractor of Highway Construction Invoking Federal Funds," prior to the commencement of work under this contract. b. Maintain a record of the total cost of all materials and supplies purchased for and incorporated in the work, and also of the quantities of those specific materials and supplies lited on Form FHWA-47, and in the units shown on Form FHWA-47. c. Furnish, upon the completion of the contract, to the SHA resident engineer on Form FHWA-47 together with the data required in paragraph lb relative to materials and supplies, a final labor summary of all contract work indicating the total hours worked and the total amount earned. 2. At the prime contractor's option, either a single report covering all contract work or separate reports for the contractor and for each subcontract shall be submitted. VII. 1. The contractor shall perform with its own organization contract work amounting to not less than 30 percent (or a greater percentage if specified elsewhere in the contract) of the total original contract price, excluding any specialty items designated by the State. Specialty items may be performed by subcontract and the amount of any such specialty items performed may be deducted from the total original contract price before computing the amount of work required to be performed by the contractor's own organization (23 CFR 635). a. "Its own organization" shall be construed to include only workers employed and paid directly by the prime contractor and equipment owned or rented by the prime contractor, with or without operators. Such term does not include employees or equipment of a subcontractor, assignee, or agent of the prime contractor. b. "Specialty Items" shall be construed to be limited to work that requires highly specialized knowledge, abilities, or equipment not ordinarily available in the type of contracting organizations qualified and expected to bid on the contract as a whole and in general are to be limited to minor components of the overall contract. SUBLElTING OR ASSIGNING THE CONTRACT Form 1273 - ReviKd 3-95 08-07-95 FR-9 EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment B PS&E Checklist Instructions 2. The contract amount upon which the requirements set forth in paragraph 1 of Section VI1 is computed includes the cost of material and manufactured products which are to be purchased or produced by the contractor under the contract provisions. 3. The contractor shall furnish (a) a competent superintendent or supervisor who is employed by the firm, has full authority to direct performance of the work in accordance with the contract requirements, and is in charge of all construction operations (regardless of who performs the work) and (b) such other of its own organizational resources (supervision, management, and engineering services) as the SHA contracting officer determines is necessary to assure the performance of the contract. 4. No portion of the contract shall be sublet, assigned or otherwise disposed of except with the written consent of the SHA contracting officer, or authorized representative, and such consent when given shall not be construed to relieve the contractor of any responsibility for the fulfillment of the contract. Written consent will be given only after the SHA has assured that each subcontract is evidenced in writing and that it contains all pertinent provisions and requirements of the prime contract. VIII. SAFETY: ACCIDENT PREVENTION 1. In the performance of this contract the contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws gov- erning safety, health, and sanitation (23 CFR 635). The contractor shall provide all safeguards, safety devices and protective equipment and take any other needed actions as it determines, or as the SHA contracting officer may determine, to be reasonably necessary to protect the life and health of employees on the job and the safety of the public and to protect property in connection with the performance of the work covered by the contract. 2. It is a condition of this contract, and shall be made a con- dition of each subcontract, which the contractor enters into pur- suant to this contract, that the contractor and any subcontractor shall not permit any employee, in performance of the contract, to work in surroundings or under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to hisher health or safety, as determined under construction safety and health standards (29 CFR 1926) promulgated by the Secretary of Labor, in accordance with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333). 3. Pursuant to 29 CFR 1926.3, it is a condition of this contract that the Secretary of Labor or authorized representative thereof, shall have right of entry to any site of contract performance to inspect or investigate the matter of compliance with the construction safety and health standards and to carry out the duties of the Secretary under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333). IX. FALSE STATEMENTS CONCERNING HIGHWAY PROJECTS In order to assure high quality and durable construction in conformity with approved plans and specifications and a high degree of reliability on statements and representations made by engineers, contractors, suppliers, and workers on Federal-aid highway projects, it is essential that all persons concerned with the project perform their functions as carefully, thoroughly, and honestly as possible. Willful falsification, distortion, or mis- representation with respect to any facts related to the project is a violation of Federal law. To prevent any misunderstanding re- Form 1273 - Revised 3-95 08-07-95 garding the seriousness of these and similar acts, the following notice shall be posted on each Federal-aid highway project (23 CFR 635) in one or more places where it is readily available to all persons concerned with the project: NOTICE TO ALL PERSONNEL ENGAGED ON FEDERAGAID HIGHWAY PROJECTS 18 U.S.C. 1020 reads as follows: "Whoever being an oflicr, agent, or employee ofthe United States, or any State or Territory, or whoever, whether a person, association, firm, or corporation, knowingly makes any false statement, false representation, or false report as to the character, quality, quantity, or cost of the material used or to be used, or the quantity or quality of the work performed or to be performed, or the cost thereof in connection with the submission of plans, maps, specQications, contracts, or costs of construction on any highway or related project submitted for approval to the Secretary of Transportation; or Whoever knowingly makes any false statement, false repre- sentation, false report or false claim with respect to the character, quality, quantityp or cost of any work performed or to be per- formed, or materials furnished or to be finished, in connection with the construction of any highway or related project approved by the Secretary of Transportation; or Whoever knowingly makes any false statement or false repre- sentation as to moterial fact in any statement, certifcate, or report submitted pursuant to provisions of the Federal-aid Rod Act approved Jdy I, 1916, (39 Stat. 355), as amended and sup- plemented; FR-10 Shall be fined not more that $10,000 or imprisoned not more than 5 years or both. " X. IMPLEMENTATION OF CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT (Applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts of $100,000 or more.) By submission of this bid or the execution of this contract, or subcontract, as appropriate, the bidder, Federal-aid construction contractor, or subcontractor, as appropriate, will be deemed to have stipulated as follows: 1. That any facility that is or will be utilized in the performance of this contract, unless such contract is exempt under the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 1857 et seq., as amended by Pub. L. 91-604), and under the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq., as amended by Pub. L. 92-500), Executive Order 11738, and regulations in implementation thereof (40 CFR 15) is not listed, on the date of contract award, on the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) List of Violating Facilities pursuant to 40 CFR 15.20. 2. That the firm agrees to comply and remain in compliance with all the requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act and Section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act and all regulations and guidelines listed thereunder. 3. That the firm shall promptly notify the SHA of the receipt of any communication from the Director, Oflice of Federal Ac- tivities, EPA, indicating that a facility that is or will be utilized Local Assistance Procedures Manual EXHIBIT 12-E PS&E Checklist Instructions Attachment B for the contract is under consideration to be listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities. 4. That the firm agrees to include or cause to be included the requirements of paragraph 1 through 4 of this Section X in every nonexempt subcontract, and further agrees to take such action as the government may direct as a means of enforcing such re- quirements. XI. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION 1. Instructions for Certification - Primary Covered Transactions: (Applicable to all Federal-aid contracts - 49 CFR 29) a.By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective primary participant is providing the certification set out below. b. The inability of a person to provide the certification set out below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this covered transaction. The prospective participant shall submit an explanation of why it cannot provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with the department or agency's determination whether to enter into this transaction. However, failure of the pmpective primary participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such a person from participation in this transaction. c. The certification in this clause is a material qresentation of fact upon which reliance was placed when the department or agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective primary participant knowingly rendered an emneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause of default. d. The prospective primary participant shall provide im- mediate written notice to the department or agency to whom this proposal is submitted if any time the prospective primary participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed c i r c u m s tan c e s . e. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "lower tier covered transaction," "participant," "person," "primary covered transaction," "principal," "proposal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the department or agency to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. f. The prospective primary participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency entering into this transaction. g. The prospective primary participant further apes by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transaction," provided by the department or agency entering into this covered transaction, without modification. in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions. h. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the el- igibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not requlred to, check the nonprocuremt portion of the "Lists of Parties Excluded From Federal Procurement or Nonprocurement Programs'' (Nonprocurement List) which is compiled by the General Services Administration. i. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. j.Except for transactions authorized under paragraph f of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the de- partment or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default. *e*** Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Primary Covered Transactions 1. The prospective primary participant certifies to the best of a.Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency; b. Have not within a 3-year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for cornmission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property; c. Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph 1 b of this certification; and its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals: Form 1273 -Revised 3-95 08-07-95 FR-11 EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment B PS&E Checklist Instructions d. Have not within a 3-year period preceding this ap plicatiodproposal had one or more public transactions (Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default. 2. Where the prospective primary participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. ****e 2. Instructions for Certification -Lower Tier Covered Transactions: (Applicable to all subcontracts, purchase orders and other lower a. By signing and Submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier is providing the certification set out below. b. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension andor debarment. c. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. d. The terms "covered transaction," "debamd," "suspended," "ineligible," "primary covered transaction," "participant," "person," "principal," "proposal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those. regulations. e. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated. f. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include this clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transaction," without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions. g. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the el- tier transactions of $25,000 or more - 49 CFR 29) igibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Nonprocurement List. h. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. i.Except for transactions authorized under paragraph e of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the de- partment or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue availdle remedies, including suspension andor debarment. ***** Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-Lower Tier Covered Transactions 1. The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals IS presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency. 2. Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. **e** XII. CERTIFICATION REGARDING USE OF CONTRACT FUNDS FOR LOBBYING (Applicable to all Federal-aid construction contracts and to all related subcontracts which exceed $lOO,OoO - 49 CFR 20) 1. The prospective participant certifies, by signing and submitting this bid or proposal, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: a. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an oflicer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the makiig of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. b. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, ' Fan 1273 - Revised 3-95 08-07-95 FR-12 EXHIBIT 12-E Attachment B Local Assistance Procedures Manual PS&E Checklist Instructions grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions. 2. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or en- tered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than S10,OOO and not more than S100,OOO for each such failure. 3. The prospective participant also agrees by submitting his or her bid or proposal that he or she shall require that the language of this certification be included in all lower tier subcontracts, which exceed S100,OOO and that all such recipienls shall certify and discloseaccordingly. FEDERALAID FEMALE AND MINORITY GOALS In accordance with Section 11, "Nondiscrimination," of 177 Sacramento, CA: "Required Contract Provisions Federal-aid Construction Contracts" the following are the goals for female utilization: SMSA Counties: 6920 Sacramento, CA .................................. Goal for Women CA Placer, CA Sacramento; (applies nationwide) .............. (percent) ........ 6.9 CA Yolo. The following are goals for minority utilization: Non-SMSA Counties. ....................................... CALIFORNIA ECONOMIC AREA Goal 174 Redding, CA Non-SMSA Counties ................................... CA Lassen;CA Mob; CA Plumas; CA Shasta; CA Siskiyou; CA Tehama 175 Eureka, CA: Non-SMSA Counties ................................... CA Del Norte; CA Humboldt; CA Trinity. 176 San Francisco-Oakland-San Jose, CA SMSA Counties: 7120 Saliias-Seaside- Monterey, CA ........................................... CA Monterey. CA Alameda; CA Contra Costa; CA Marin; CA San Francisco; CA SanMateo. CA SantaClara. CA SantaCm. CA Sonoma. CA NapqCA Solano 7360 San Francisco-Oakland, CA ................. 7400 San Jose, CA ........................................ 7485 Santa Cruz, CA. ................................... 7500 Santa Rosa, CA .................................... 8720 Vallejo-Fairfield- Napa, CA ................ Non-SMSA Counties ........................................ CA Lake; CA Mendocino; CA SanBenito. (Percent) 6.8 6.6 28.9 25.6 19.6 14.9 9.1 17.1 23.2 CA Butte;CA Colusa; CA El Dorado; CA Glenn; CA NevadqCA Sierra; CA SutteGCA Yuba. 178 Stockton-Modesto, CA: SMSA Counties: 5170 Modesto, CA ...................................... 8120 Stockton, CA ...................................... Non-SMSA Counties ........................................ CA Stanislaus. CA SanJoaquin. CA Alpine; CA Amador; CA Calaveras;CA Mariposa; CA Merced; CA Tuolumne. 179 Fresno-Bakersfield CA SMSA Counties: 0680 Bakersfield, CA .................................. 2840 Fresno, CA .......................................... Non-SMSA Counties ........................................ CA Kern. CA Fresno. CA Kings;CA Madera; CA Tulare. 180 Los Angeles, CA. SMSA Counties: 0360 Anaheim-Santa Ana-Garden Grove, CA. ............................................... CA Orange. Beach, CA ................................................ CA Los Angeles. Ventura, CA ............................................. CA Ventura. 4480 Los Angeles-Long 6000 Oxnard-Simi Valley- 16.1 14.3 12.3 24.3 19.8 19.1 26.1 23.6 11.9 28.3 21.5 Form 1273 - Revixd 3-95 08-07-95 FR-13 EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual Attachment B PS&E Checklist Instructions 6780 Riverside-San Bernardino- Ontario, CA. ............................................. 19.0 CA Riverside; CA San Bernardino. Lompoc, CA ............................................. 19.7 CA SantaBtubara. Non-SMSA Counties ........................................ 24.6 CA 1nyo;CA Mono; CA San Luis Obispo. 7480 Santa Barbara-Santa Maria- 18 1 -Sari Diego, CA SMSA Counties 7320 San Diego, CA .................................... 16.9 Non-SMSA Counties ........................................ 18.2 CA SanDiego. CA Imperial. In addition to the reporting requirements set forth elsewhere in this contract the Contractor and subcontractors holding subcontracts, not including material supplies, of S10,OOO or more, shall submit for every month of July during which work is performed, employment data as contained under Form FHWA PR-1391 (Appendix C to 23 CFR, Part 230), and in accordance with the instructions included thereon. Form 1273 - Rcvid 3-95 08-07-95 FR-14 EXHIBIT 12-E Local Assistance Procedures Manual PS&E Checklist Instructions Attachment N (To be used, when applicable, in Federal-aid projects) *Insert number of trainees. FEDERAL REQUIREMENT TRAINING SPECIAL PROVISIONS FEDERAL REQUIREMENT TRAINING SPECIAL PROVISION. -- AS part of the Contractor's equal employment oppornmity afiirmative action program, training shall be provided as follows: The Contractor shall provide on-the-job training to develop full joumeymen in the types of & or job classification involved. The goal for the number of trainees or apprentices to be mined under the requirements of this special provision will be \o(.kn) In the event the Contractor subntracts a portion of the contract work, he shall determine how many, if any, of the trainees or apprentices are to be trained by the subcontractor, provided however, that the Contractor shall retain the primary responsibility for meeting the training requirements imposed by this special provision. The Contnrctor shall also ensue that this Training Special provision is made applicable to such subcontract Where feasible, 25 percent of trainees or apprentices in each occupation shall be. in their first year of apprenticeship or training. The number of trainees or apprentices shall be distributed among the work classifications on the basis of the Contractor's needs and the availability of journeymen in the various classifications within a reasonable area of recruitment Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall submit to the Department for approval the number of trainees or apprentices to be trained in each selected classification and training program to be used. Furthermore, the Contractor shall specify the starting time for training in each of the classifications. The contractor will be credited for each trainee or apprentice employed by him on the contract work who is currently enrolled or becomes enrolled in an approved program and will be reimbursed for such trainees or apprentices as provided hereinafter. Tmining and upgrading of minorities and women toward journeymen status is a primary objective of this Training Special Provision. Accordingly, the Contractor shall make every effort to enroll minority and women trainees or apprentices (e.g., by conducting systematic and direct recruitment bugh public and private sources likely to yield minority and women trainees or apprentices) to the extent such persons are available within a reasonable area of recruitment. The Contractor will be responsible for demonstrating the steps that he has taken in pursuance thereof, prior to a determination as to whether the Contractor . is in compliance with this Training Special Provision. This training commitment is not intended, and shall not be used, to discriminate against any applicant for training, whether a member of a minority group or not No employee shall be mployed as a trainee or apprentice in any classification in which he has successllly completed a training coulse leading to journeyman status or in which he has been employed as a journeyman. The Contractor should satisfy this requirement by including '~ppmpriate questions in the employee application or by other suitable means. Regardless of the method used the Contractor's records should document the findings in each case. The minimum length and type of training for each classification will be as established in the training program selected by the Contractor and approved by both the Depamnent and the Federal Highway Adminisbation. The Department and the Federal Highway Administration will approve a program if it is reasonably calculated to meet the equal employment opportunity obligations of the Contractor and to qualify the average trainee or apprentice for journeyman status in the classification concerned by the end of the training period. Furthermore, apprenticeship progmms registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Trainin& or with the State of California, Department of hdu&iai Relations, Division of Apprenticeship Standards recognized by the Bureau and training programs approved but not necessarily sponsored by the U.S. Department of Labor, Manpower Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training shall also be considered acceptable provided it is being administered in a manner consistent with the equal employment obligations of Federal-aid highway construction contracts. Approval or acceptance of a training program shall be obtained from the State prior to commencing work on the classification covered by the program. It is the intention of these provisions that training is to be provided in the construction crafts rather than clerk-typists or secretarial-type positions. Training is permissible in lower level management positions such as office engineers, estimators, timekeepers, etc., where the training is oriented towad construction applications. Training in the laborer classification may be permitted provided that significant and meaningful training is provided and approved by the division office. Some offsite training is permissible as long as the training is an integral part of an approved training program and does not comprise a significant part of the overall training. Except as otherwise noted below, the Contractor will be reimbursed 80 mts per hour of training given an employee on this contract in accordance with an approved training program. As approved by the Engineer, reimbursement will be made for training of persons in excess of the number specified herein. F-15 EXHIBIT 12-E Attachment N This reimbursement will be made even though the Contractor receives additional training program funds from other sowes, provided such other source does not specifically prohibit the Contractor from receiving other reimbursement. Reimbursement for ofkite training indicated above may only be made to the Contractor where he does one or more of the following and the trainees or apprentices are concurrently employed on a Federal-aid project; contributes to the cost of the Wg, provides the instruction to the trainee or apprentice or pays the trainee's or apprentice's wages during the offsite tlaining period. No payment shall be made to the Conhactor if either the failure to provide the required training, or the Wure to hire the trainee or apprentice as a journeyman, is caused by the Contractor and evidences a lack of good faith on the part of the Conhactor in meeting the requirements of this Tmining Special Provision. It is normally expected that a trainee or apprentice will begin his training on the project as soon as feasible after start of work utilizing the skill involved and remain on the project as long as training opportunities exist in his work classification or Until he Local Assistance Procedures Manual PS&E Checklist Instructions has completed his training prognm. It is not required that all trainees or apprentices be on board for the entire length of the mntract A Conbaaor will have fulfilled his nsponsibilities under this Training Special Provision if he has provided acceptable training to the number of trainees or apprentices specified. The number trained shall be determined on the basis of the %tal number enrolled on the contract for a significant period. Only trainees or apprentices registered in a program approved by the State of California's State Administrator of Apprenticeship may be employed on the project and said trainees or apprentices shall be paid the standard wage specified uncjer the regulations of the craft or hade at which The Contractor shall furnish the trainee or apprentice a The Contractor shall provide each trainee or apprentice with a certification showing the type and length of training satisfactorily completed. records and furnish periodic reports documenting his perhmance under this Training Special Provision they are employed. copy of the program he will follow in providing the training. The Contractor will provide for the maintenance of FR-16 I * c, GENE= DECISION: CA20030001 CAI Date: June 13, 2003 General Decision Number: ~0030001 Superseded General Decision No. CA020001 State: California Construction Type: BUILDING DREDGING HEAVY HIGHWAY RESIDENTIAL County (ies) : SAN DIEGO BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS; DREDGING PROJECTS (does not include hopper dredge work); HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include water well drilling); HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS; RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (consisting of single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories) Modification Number Publication Date 0 06/13/2003 COUNTY(ies): SAN DIEGO ASBE0005B 08/05/2002 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/INSULATOR Includes the application of all insulating materials, protective coverings, coatings, &i finishes to all types of mechanical systems 33 - 06 8.11 ................................................................ ASBE0005D 01/01/2003 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS REMOVAL WORKER / HAZARDOUS MATERIAL HANDLER Includes preparation, wetting, stripping, removal, scrapping, vacuuming, bagging and disposing of all insulation materials from mechanical systems, whether they contain asbestos or not 15.75 .- Rates Fringes 31.96 13.30 BRCA0004M 11/01/2002 BRCA0018F 12/01/2000 Rates Fringes TERRAZZO WORKER 26.78 5.34 CARP0002B 07/01/2001 DIVERS : Diver, wet Rates Fringes 486.08 per day 5.61 CARP0002L 07/01/2002 Rates Fringes CARPENTER : Residential/Light Commercial 19.68 6.68 Commercial Building 24.60 6.68 Bridge 28.78 6.68 MILLWRIGHT 29.15 6.68 PILEDRIVER 28.78 6.68 CARP0002U 07/01/2001 Rates Fringes work on wood framed construction of single family residences, apartments or condominiums under four (4) stories: DRYWALL INSTALLER/LATHER 19.00 5.18 DRYWALL STOCKER/SCRAPPER 9.28 5.42 CARP0003H 08/01/2002 Rates Fringes MODmAR FURNITURE INSTALLER 14.00 5.16 FULL WALL TECHNICIAN 20.14 5.16 MOBILE FILING SYSTEM INSTALLERS 13.10 4.66 ELEC0569A 12/01/2002 Rates Fringes ELEC0569E 06/01/2001 Rates Fringes Work on family residences, single family homes, duplexes, condominiums, apartments that do not exceed three (3) stories: ELECTRICIAN 17.00 3.73 ____________________-------------------------------------------- Rates Fringes 19.98 3%+5.14 ELEC0569F 07/01/2001 SOUND TECHNICIAN TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT SOUNDMAN TECHNICIAN 16.59 3%+5.14 14.98 3%+4.22 SOUND TECHNICIAN: Terminating, operating and performing SOUNDMAN: Wire-pulling, splicing, assembling and final check-out installing devices SCOPE OF WORK Assembly, installation, operation, service and maintenance of components or systems as used in closed circuit television, amplified master television distribution, CATV on private property, intercommunication, burglar alarm, fire alarm, life support and all security alarms, private and public telephone and related telephone interconnect, public address, paging, audio, language, electronic, background music system less than line voltage or any system acceptable for class two wiring for private, commercial, or industrial use furnished by leased wire, frequency modulation or other recording devices, electrical apparatus by means of which electricity is applied to the amplification, transmission, transference, recording or reproduction of voice, music, sound, impulses and video. Excluded from this Scope of Work - transmission, service and maintenance of background music. All of the above shall include the installation and transmission over fiber optics. ................................................................ ELEC05 6 9G 0 7 / 0 1 /2 00 1 Rates Fringes Work on street lighting; traffic signals; and underground systems and/or established easements outside of buildings: Utility technician #I 16.38 3%+2.99 Utility technician #2 10.56 3%+2.49 STREET LIGHT & TRAFFIC SIGNAL WORK: UTILITY TECHNICIAN #1: Installation of street lights and traffic signals, including electrical circuitry, programmable controller, pedestal-mounted electrical meter enclosures and laying of pre-assembled cable in ducts. systems and comunication installation including proper position of trench depths, and radius at duct banks, location for manholes, street lights and traffic signals. The layout of electrical UTILITY TECHNICIAN #2: Distribution of material at jobsite, installation of underground ducts for electrical, telephone, cable TV land communication systems. The setting, leveling, grounding and racking of precast manholes, handholes and transformer pads. ................................................................ ELEC0569H 07/01/2001 Tunnel work: Rates Fringes ELEC1245A 06/01/2002 Rates Fringes LINE CONSTRUCTION Lineman: Cable splicer 33.16 4.5%+7.08 Equipment specialist (operates crawler tractors, commercial motor vehicles, backhoes, trenchers, cranes (50 tons and below), and overhead and underground distribution line equipment 1 28.19 4 - 5%+6.80 Groundman 21.56 4.5%+6.80 Powderman 31.51 4.5%+6.84 ELEV0018A 09/15/2001 ELEVATOR MECHANIC Rates Fringes 33.695 7.455 FOOTNOTE : Vacation Pay: 8% with 5 or more years of service, 6% for 6 months to 5 years service. Paid Holidays: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Friday after, and Christmas Day. ................................................................ ENGI0012B 06/16/2002 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 GROUP 8 GROUP 9 GROUP 10 GROUP 11 GROUP 5 Rates 27.85 28.63 28.92 30.21 30.43 30.54 30.66 30.83 30.93 30.96 31.04 Fringes 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11 - 85 11.85 11.85 11.85 GROUP 12 GROUP 13 GROUP 14 GROUP 15 GROUP 16 GROUP 17 GROUP 18 GROUP 19 GROUP 20 GROUP 21 CRANES, PILEDRIVING & HOISTING : GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 GROUP 8 GROUP 9 GROUP 10 GROUP 11 GROUP 12 GROUP 13 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS - TUNNEL: GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 FOOTNOTES: Premium pay of $2.75 per power equipment operator work within Pendleton. Workers required to suit material environment: $1.00 per hour 31.16 31.33 31.43 31.54 31.66 31.83 31.93 32.04 32.16 32.33 29.00 29.78 30.07 30.21 30.43 30.54 30.66 30.83 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 30.28 30.57 30.71 30.93 31.04 31.16 31.46 11.. 85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11. a5 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 11.85 hour shall be paid on all the boundaries of Camp up and work in a hazardous additional. Combination mixer and compressor operator on gunite work shall be classified as a concrete mobile mixer operator. POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Bargeman; Brakeman; Compressor operator; Ditch witch, with seat or similar type equipment; Elevator operator-inside; Engineer oiler; Generator operator; Generator, pump or compressor plant operator; pump operator; Signalman; Switchman GROUP 2: Asphalt-rubber plant operator (nurse tank operator); Concrete mixer operator - skip type; Conveyor operator; Fireman; Hydrostatic pump operator; Oil crusher (asphalt or concrete plant); PJU side dump jack; Screening and Conveyor machine operator (or similar types); Skiploader (wheel up to 3/4 yd. without attachment); Tar pot fireman; Temporary heating plant operator; Trenching machine oiler GROUP 3: Asphalt-rubber blend operator; Skid steer (loader; Equipment greaser (rack); Ford Ferguson (with dragtype attachments); Helicopter radioman (ground); Stationary pipe wrapping and cleaning machine operator ,,- GROUP 4: Asphalt plant fireman; Backhoe operator (mini-max or similar type); Boring machine operator; Boxman or mixerman (asphalt or concrete), chip spreading machine operator;, Cconcrete cleaning decontamination machine operator; Concrete pump operator (small portable); Drilling machine operator, small auger types (Texoma super economatic or similar types - Hughes 100 or 200 or similar types - drilling depth of 30' maximum); Guard rail post driver operator; Highline cableway signalman; Horizontal directional drilling machine; Hydra-hammer-aero stomper; Micro Tunneling (above ground tunnel); Power concrete curing machine operator; Power concrete saw operator; Power -driven jumbo form setter operator; Power sweeper operator; Roller operator (compacting); Screed operator (asphalt or concrete); Trenching machine operator (up to 6 ft.) Vacuum or muck truck GROUP 5: Articulating material hauler; Asphalt plant engineer; Batch plant operator; Bit sharpener; Concrete joint machine operator (canal and similar type); Dandy digger; Concrete planer operator; Deck engine operator; Derrick (oilfield type); Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types Calweld 100 bucket or similar types - Watson 1000 auger or similar types - Texoma 330, 500 or 600 auger or similar types - drilling depth of 45' maximum); Drilling machine operator (including water well drilling); Equipment greaser (grease truck), Hydrographic seeder machine operator (straw, pulp or seed); Jackson track maintainer, or similar type; Kalamazoo switch tamper, or similar type; Machine tool operator; Maginnis internal full slab vibrator; Mechanical berm, curb or gutter (concrete or asphalt), Mechanical finisher operator (concrete, Clary-Johnson-Bidwell or similar); Pavement breaker operator (truck mounted), Road oil mixing machine operator; Roller operator (asphalt or finish); Rubber- tired earth-moving equipment (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck), self-propelled tar pipelining machine operator; Skiploader operator (Crawler and wheel type, over 3/4 yd. and up to and including 1-1/2 yds.); Slip form pump operator (power driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms); Tractor operator-bulldozer, tamper-scraper (single engine, up to 100 h.p. flywheel and similar types, up to and including D-5 and similar types); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum); Ultra high pressure waterjet cutting tool system operator; Vacuum blasting machine opera tor GROUP 6: Asphalt or concrete spreading operator (tamping or finishing); Asphalt paving machine operator (Barber-Greene or similar type); Asphalt-rubber distributor operator; Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.), small Ford, Case or similar; Cast-in-place pipe laying machine operator; Combination mixer and compressor operator (gunite work); Compactor operator (self-propelled); Concrete mixer operator (paving); Crushing plant operator; Drill doctor; Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld 150 bucket or similar types - Watson 1500, 2000, 2500 auger or similar types - Texoma 700, 800 auger or similar types - drilling depth of 60' maximum); Elevating grader operator; Grade checker; Gradall operator; Grouting machine operator; Heavy-duty repairman; heavy equipment robotics operator; Kalamazoo balliste regulator or similar type; Kolman belt loader and similar type; Le Tourneau blob compactor or similar typel; Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar typeso; Ozzie padder or similar types; Pneumatic concrete placing machine operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type); Pumpcrete gun operator; Rotary drill operator (excluding caisson type); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single engine, Caterpillar,Euclid, Athey wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (multiple engine up to and including 25 yds. struck); Rubber- tired scraper operator (self-loading paddle wheel type - John Deere, 1040 and similar single unit); Self-propelled curb and gutter machine operator; skiploader operator (crawler and wheel type over 1-1/2 yds. up to and including 6-1/2 yds.); Soil remediation plant operator; Surface heaters and planer operator; Tractor compressor drill combination operator; Tractor operator (any type larger than 0-5- 100 flywheel h.p. and over, or similar - bulldozer, tamper, scraper and push tractor, single engine); Tractor operator (boom attachments); Traveling pipe wrapping, cleaning and bending machine operator; Trenching machine operator (over 6 ft. depth capacity, manufacturer’s rating); Ultra High pressure waterjet cutting tool system mechanic GROUP 7: Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld 200 B bucket or similar types - Watson 3000 or 5000 auger or similar types - Texoma 900 auger or similar types - drilling depth of 105’ maximum); Dual drum mixer; Dynamic compactor LDC350 (or similar types); Monorail locomotive operator (diesel, gas or electric); Motor patrol-blade operator (single- engine); Multiple-engine tractor operator (Euclid and similar type-except Quad 9 cat.); Pre-stressed wrapping machine operator; Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single-engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (multiple-engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds.); Tower crane repairman; Tractor loader operator (Crawler and wheel type over 6-1/2 yds.); Woods mixer operator (and similar Pugmill equipment) GROUP 8: Auto grader operator; Automatic slip form operator; Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld, auger 200 CA or similar types - Watson auger 6000 or similar types - drilling depth of 175’ maximum); Hoe ram or similar with compressor; Mass excavator operator (less than 750 cu. yds.); Mechanical finishing machine operator; Mobile form traveler operator; Motor patrol operator (multi-engine); Pipe mobile machine operator; Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (multiple-engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck), Rubber-tired self-loading scraper operator (paddle-wheel auger type self-loading-two (2) or more units) GROUP 9: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator operating equipment with push-pull system, (single-engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 10: Canal liner operator; Canal trimmer operator; Remote- control earth-moving equipment operator (operating a second piece of equipment: $1.00 per hour additional); wheel excavator operator (over 750 cu. yds.) GROUP 11: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (single engine, caterpillar, Euclid, Athey wagon, and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple-engine - up to and including 25 yds. struck) ,-. *I GROUP 12: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (single-engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple-engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) GROUP 13: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple-engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar, over 50 cu. yds. struck); Tandem tractor operator (operating crawler-type tractors in tandem- Quad 9 and similar type) GROUP 14: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units-single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 15: Rotex concrete belt operator (or similar type); Rubber- tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - single-engine, caterpillar, Euclid, Athey wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple-engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck GROUP 16: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - single-engine, over 50 yds. struck), rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck 1 GROUP 17: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple-engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar, over 50 cu. yds. struck) GROUP 18 : Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 19: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (single- engine, caterpillar, Euclid, Athey wagon and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating with the tandem push-pull system (multiple-engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) GROUP 20: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (single- engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) GROUP 21: Concrete pump operator-truck mounted; Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system (multiple-engine, Euclid, caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck) CRANES, PILEDRIVING AND HOISTING CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Engineer oiler, fork lift operator (includes loed, lull or similar types) GROUP 2: Truck crane oiler GROUP 3: A-frame or winch truck operator, Ross carrier operator (jobsite) GROUP 4: Bridge-type unloader and turntable operator, helicopter hoist operator GROUP 5: Stinger crane (Austin-Western or similar type), tugger hoist operator (1 drum) GROUP 6: Bridge crane operator, Cretor crane operator, hoist operator (Chicago boom and similar type), lift mobile operator, lift slab machine operator (Vagtborg and similar types), material hoist operator, polar gantry crane operator, shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over 3/4 yd. and up to 5 cu. yds. mrc), tugger hoist operator (2 drum) GROUP 7: Pedestal crane operator; Shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over 5 cu. yds. mrc), tower crane repair, tugger hoist operator (3 drum) GROUP 8: Crane operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity), crawler transporter operator, derrick barge operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity), hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (up to and including 25 ton capacity), shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over 7 cu. yds. mrc 1 GROUP 9: Crane operator (over 25 tons and up to and including 50 tons mrc), derrick barge operator (over 25 tons up to and including 50 tons mrc), highline cableway operator, hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 25 tons up to and including 50 tons mrc), K-crane operator, polar crane operator GROUP 10: Crane operator (over 50 tons and up to and inc'lvding 100 tons mrc), derrick barge operator (over 50 tons up to and including 100 tons mrc), hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 50 tons up to and including 100 tons mrc), mobile tower crane operator (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 ton M.R.C.), tower crane operator and tower gantry GROUP 11: Crane operator (over 100 tons and up to and including 200 tons mrc), derrick barge operator (over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc), hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc), mobile tower crane operator (over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc) GROUP 12: Crane operator (over 200 tons up to and including 300 tons mrc), derrick barge operator (over 200 tons up to and including 300 tons mrc), hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 tons mrc), mobile tower crane operator (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 tons mrc) GROUP 13: Crane operator (over 300 tons), derrick barge operator (over 300 tons), helicopter pilot, hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 300 tons), mobile tower crane operator (over 300 tons) TUNNEL CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd. without attachment) GROUP 2: Power-driven jumbo form setter operator GROUP 3: Dinkey locomotive or motorperson (up to and including 10 tons) GROUP 4: Bit sharpener; Equipment greaser (grease truck); Slip form pump operator (power-driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms; Tugger hoist operator (1 drum); Tunnel locomotive operator (over 10 and up to and including 30 tons) GROUP 5: Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.); Small Ford, Case or similar; Drill doctor; Grouting machine operator; Heading shield operator; Heavy-duty repair person; Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types); Mucking machine operator (1/4 yd., rubber-tired, rail or track type); Pneumatic concrete placing machine operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type); Pneumatic heading shield (tunnel); Pumpcrete gun operator; Tractor compressor drill combination operator; Tugger hoist operator (2 drum); Tunnel locomotive operator (over 30 tons) GROUP 6: Heavy-duty repairman ENGIO012D 08/01/2002 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: DREDGING : Leverman 34.65 11.85 Dredge dozer 31.18 11.85 De ckma t e 31.07 11.85 Winch operator (stern winch on Fireman; deckhand and bargeman 29.98 11.85 Barge mate 30.59 11.85 dredge 1 30.52 11.85 ____-______________---------------------_----------------------- IRONOOOlF 07/01/2002 Rates Fringes IRONWORKERS: Fence erector 26.97 * 16.29 Ornamental, reinforcing and structural 26.86 16.29 LAB00089A 07/01/2002 Rates Fringes LABORERS : wood or metal frame construction of single family residences, apartments and condominums - excluding (a) projects that exceed three stories over a garage level, (b) any utility work such as telephone, gas, water, sewer and other utilities and (c) any fine grading work, utility work or paving work in the future street and public right-of-way; but including all rough grading work at the job site behind the existing right of way: Cleanup, landscaping, fencing (chain link and wood) 18.49 Other work on such projects 19.49 5.58 5.58 OTHER RESIDENTIAL AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION LABORERS : GROUP 1 20.87 7.68 GROUP 2 21 - 42 7.68 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS 21.97 23.52 23.87 7.68 7.68 7.68 GROUP 1: Cleaning and handling of panel forms; Concrete Screeding for Rought Strike-off; Concrete, water curing; Demolition laborer; Flagman; Gas, oil and/or water pipeline laborer; General Laborer; General clean-up laborer; Landscape laborer; Jetting laborer; Temporary water and air lines laborer; Material hoseman (walls, slabs, floors and decks); Plugging, filling of Shee-bolt holes; Dry packing of concrete; Railroad maintenance, Repair Trackman and road beds, Streetcar and railroad construction trac laborers; Slip form raisers; Slurry seal crews (mixer operator, applicator operator, squeegee man, Shuttle man, top man), filing of cracks by any method on any surface; Tarman and mortar man; Tool crib or tool house laborer; Window cleaner; Wire Mesh puling-all concrete pouring operations GROUP 2: Asphalt Shoveler; Cement Dumper (on 1 yard or larger mixer and handling bulk cement); Cesspool digger and installer; Chucktender; Chute man, pouring concrete, the handling of the cute from ready mix trucks, such as walls, slabs,.decks, floors, foundations, footings, curbs, gutters and sidewalks; Concrete curer-impervious membrane and form oiler; Cutting torch operator (demoliton); Guinea chaser; Headboard man-asphlt; Laborer, packing rod steel and pans; membrane vapor barrier installer; Power broom sweepers (small); Riiprap, stonepaver, placing stone or wet sacked concrete; Roto scraper and tiller; Tank sealer and cleaner; Tree climber, faller, chain saw operator, Pittsburgh Chipper and similar type brush shredders; Underground laborers, including caisson bellower GROUP 3: Buggymobile; Concrete cutting torch; Concrete cutting torch; Concrete pile cutter; Driller, jackhammer, 2 1/2 feet drill steel or longer; Dri Pak-it machine; High sealer (including drilling of same); Hydro seeder and similar type; Impact wrench, mult-plate; Kettlemen, potmen and mean applying asphalt, lay- kold, creosote, line caustic and similar type materials (applying means applying, dipping, brushing or handling of such materials for pipe wrapping and waterproofing); Operators of pneumatic, gas, electric tools, vibratring machines, pavement breakers, air blasting, come-along, and similar mechanic1 tools not separately classified herein; Pipelayers back up man coating, grouting, making of joints, sealing, caulking, diapering and inclduing rubber gasket joints, pointing and any and all other services; Rotary Scarifier or multiple head concrete chipping scaarifier; Steel header board man and guideline setter; Tampers, Barko, Wacker and similar type; Trenching machine, hand propel led GROUP 4: Asphalt raker, luterman, ironer, apshalt dumpman and asphalt spreader boxes (all types); Concrete core cutter (walls, floors or ceilings), Grinder or sander; Concrete saw man; cutting walls or flat work, scoring old or new concrete; Cribber, shorer, lagging, sheeting and trench bracing, hand-guided lagging hammer; Laser beam in connection with laborer’s work; Oversize concrete vibrator operator 70 pounds and over; Pipelayer performing all services in the lay8ing, installation and all forms of connection of pipe from the point of receiving pipe in the ditch until completion of oepration, including any and all forms of tubular material, whether pipe, metallic or non-metallic, conduit, and any other stationary type of tubular device used for the conveying of any substance or element, whether water, sewage, solid, gas, air or other product whatsoever and without regard to the nature of material from which the tubular material is fabricated; No joint pipe and stripping of same; Prefabricated manhole installer; Sandblaster (nozzleman), Porta shot-blast, water blasting GROUP 5: Blasters Powdennan-All work of loading holes, placing and blasting of all pwder and explosives of whatever type, regardless of method used for such loading and placing; Driller- all power drills, excluding jackhammer, whether core, diamond, wagon, track, multiple unit, and any and all other types of mechanical drills without regard to the form of motive power. ................................................................ LAB00089B 05/01/2002 BRICK TENDER Rates Fringes 19.00 8.24 FOOTNOTES: Work on refractory stack work in excess of 100 ft. in height:fifty cents ($0.50) per hour additional. Work on refractory work where extreme heat prevents continuous work: fifty ($0.50) per hour additional. Work with carbon brick, acid brick or phenolic mortar: fifty ($0.50) per hour additional. Work on a swinging scaffold above fifty ft.: thirty-five cents ($0.35) per hour additional. ................................................................ LAB00089C 08/07/2002 Rates Fringes RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCITON (excluding North Island Naval Air Station, Cornado Naval Amphibious Base and Imperial Beach Naval Air Station) Work on single family homes, apartments and condominiums not exceeding three stories: PLASTER TENDER PLASTER CLEAN-UP TENDER LABORER ALL OTHER RESIDENTIAL AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION: PLASTER TENDER PLASTER CLEAN-UP LABORER North Island Naval Air Station, Cornado Naval Amphibious Base and Imperial Beach Naval Air Station) Work on single family homes, apartments and condominiums not exceeding three stories: PLASTER TENDER PLASTER CLEAN-UP TENDER LABORER ALL OTHER RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION AND BUILDING CNSTRUCTIONl PLASTER TENDER PLASTER CLEAN-UP TENDER LABORER 21.00 18.45 23.00 20.45 10.17 10.17 10.17 10.17 24.00 10.17 20.45 10.17 26.00 10.17 23.45 10.17 LAB00089D 07/01/2002 Rates Fringes HEAVY AND HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION LABORERS : GROUP 1 20.85 7.58 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GUNITE WORK : TUNNEL WORK : 21.20 21.45 21.85 18.91 19.21 19.41 19.21 19.41 19.66 7.58 7.58 7.58 7.18 7.18 7.18 7.18 7.18 7.18 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Laborer (general construction); Asphalt ironer - spreader; Boring machine tender; Carpenter tender; Caulker; Cesspool digger and installer; Chucktender (except tunnels); Concrete curer (impervious membrane and form oiler); Concrete water curing (excluding use of water trucks); Cutting torch operator (demolition); Driller's tender (caisson) including bellowers; Dri-pak-it machine, concrete cutting torch; Dry packing of concrete, plugging, filling of shee bolt holes; Fence erector; Fine grader on highways, streets and airport paving (sewer and drainage lines when employed); Flag person; Form blower; Gas and oil pipeline laborer; Guinea chaser; Housemover; Jet; Landscape gardener and nursery; Packing rod steel and pans; Pipelayer's backup (coating, grouting, making of joints, sealing, caulking, diapering and including rubber gasket joints, pointing and any and all other service railroad work); Laborer; Rigging and signaling; Riprap stonepaver; Sandblaster (pot tender); Scaler; Septic tank digger and installer (lead); Tank scaler and cleaner; Tool shed checker; Window cleaner GROUP 2: Buggymobile; Cement dumper (on 1 yd. or larger mixers and handling bulk cement); Concrete saw (excluding tractor type), roto-scraper, chipping hammer, concrete core cutter, concrete grinder and sander; Cribber - shorer, lagging and trench bracing, hand-guided lagging hammer; Driller - all power drills, including jackhammer, whether Core, Diamond, Wagon, Track, multiple unit, and all types of mechanical drills without regard to the form of motive power; Driller (all other where drilling is for use of explosives); Gas and oil pipeline wrapper (pot tender and form); Gas and oil pipeline wrapper (6-inch pipe and over); Operator and tender of pneumatic, gas and electric tools, concrete pumps, vibrating machines, multi-plate impact wrench and similar mechanical tools not separately classified herein; Pipelayer (excludes all pressurized and vacuum piping) (performing all services outside the building line in the laying and installation of pipe from the point of receiving pipe until completion of the operation, including any and all forms of tubular material, whether pipe, metallic or non-metallic conduit and-any other stationary type of tubular device used for the conveying of any substance or element, whether water, sewage, solid, gas, air or other products whatsoever and without regard to the nature of material from which the tubular material is fabricated); Powder blasters' tender; Prefabricated manhole installer; Rock slinger; Sandblaster, waterblaster & nozzle operator); Scaler (using bos'n chair, safety belt); Steel headerboard; Tree climber, using mechanical tools; Welding in connection with laborer's work GROUP 3: Asphalt raker; Layton box spreader (or similar type) GROUP 4: Blasters Powderman-All work of loading holes, placing and blasting of all pwder and explosives of whatever type, regardless of method used for such loading and placing GUNITE LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Rebound man GROUP 2: Gun man GROUP 3: Nozzle man TUNNEL LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Bull gang, mucker, track; Chucktender, cabletender; Concrete crew (includes rodder and spreader); Dump; Grout crew; Tender for steel form raisers and setters; Mucker - tunnel (hand or machine); Nipper; Swamper (brake and switch on tunnel work); Vibrator, jackhammer, pneumatic tools (except driller) multi- plate impact wrench GROUP 2: Blaster, driller, powder; Cherry picker; Grout gun; Kemper and other pneumatic concrete placer operator; Miner in short dry tunnels under streets, highways and similar places; Miner - tunnel (hand or machine); Powder (tunnel work); Steel form raiser and setter; Timber, retimber wood or steel GROUP 3: Powder - primer house (licensed) on tunnel work; Shaft and raise miner; Shifter; Blaster (licensed) all work of loading holes, placing & blasting all powder & explosives of whatever type regardless of method used for such loading and LAB00882A 01/01/2003 ASBESTOS REMOVAL LABORER Rates Fringes 22.00 7.90 SCOPE OF WORK: includes site mobilization, initial site clean-up, site preparation, removal of asbestos-containing material and toxic waste (including lead abatement and any other toxic materials), encapsulation, enclosure and disposal of asbestos- containing materials and toxic waste (including lead abatement and any other toxic materials) by hand or with equipment or machinery; scaffolding, fabrication of temporary wooden barriers, and assembly of decontamination stations. LAB01184A 07/01/2002 Rates Fringes LABORERS - STRIPING: GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 20.65 8.42 21.50 8.42 23. a2 8.42 26.02 8.42 LABORERS - STRIPING CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Protective coating, pavement sealing, including repair and filling of cracks by any method on any surface in parking lots, game courts and playgrounds; carstops; operation of all related machinery and equipment; equipment repair technician GROUP 2: Traffic surface abrasive blaster; pot tender - removal of all traffic lines and markings by any method (sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding, etc.) and preparation of surface for coatings. Traffic control person: controlling and directing traffic through both conventional and moving lane closures; operation of all related machinery and equipment GROUP 3: Traffic delineating device applicator: Laydout and application of pavement markers, delineating signs, rumble and traffic bars, adhesives, guide markers, other traffic delineating devices including traffic control. This category includes all traffic related surface preparation (sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding) as part of the application process. Traffic protective delineating system installer: removes, relocates, installs, permanently affixed roadside and parking delineation barricades, fencing, cable anchor, guard rail, reference signs, monument markers; operation of all related machinery and equipment; power broom sweeper GROUP 4: Striper: layout and application of traffic stripes and markings; hot thermo plastic; tape traffic stripes and markings, including traffic control; operation of all related machinery and equipment PAIN0036D 07/01/2002 Rates Fringes BUILDING AND HEAVY CONSTRUCTION: PAINTER (includes lead abatement) 25.02 5.89 PAIN0036K 10/01/2002 Rates Fringes RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION: Applies to work performed on exterior and interior wood framing apartments, single family homes and multi-duplexes up to and including four stories: DRYWALL FINISHER 18.00 4 -26 All other residential work : DRYWALL FINISHER 20.40 7.28 BUILDING AND HEAVY CONSTRUCTION: DRYWALL FINISHER 20.40 7.28 PAIN0036N 01/01/2003 GLAZIERS Rates Fringes 27.35 8.69 PLAS0200E 08/07/2002 Rates Fringes NORTH ISLAND NAVAL AIR STATION; COLORADO NAVAL AMPHIBIOUS BASE; IMPERIAL BEACH NAVAL AIR STATION: PLASTERER 29.77 6.76 REMAINDER OF COUNTY: PLASTERER 26.77 6.76 PLAS0500A 06/30/2002 Rates Fringes Work shall include work inside the building line, meeting the following criteria: (1) a residential wood frame (2) work classified as Type 111, (3) interior tenant improvement project of any size IV or Type V construction work regardless the size of the project four stories or less (4) Any wood frame project of CEMENT MASON 21.97 4.80 (5) work classified as type I and CEMENT MASONS 23.62 4.80 I1 construction PLUM0016F 07/01/2002 Rates Work on strip malls, light commercial, tenant improvement and remodel work PLUMBER; PIPEFITTER; STEAMFITTER 23 Fringes 03 8.24 Work on new additions and remodeling of single family homes, bars, restaurants, stores and commercial buildings, not to exceed 5,000 sq. ft. of floor space PLUMBER; PIPEFITTER; STEAMFITTER 28.92 9.44 All other work: Camp Pendleton: PLUMBER; PIPEFITTER; STEAMFITTER; AIR Remainder of County CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION 32.06 . 10.01 PLUMBER; PIPEFITTER; STEAMFITTER 29.81 10.01 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION WORK PLUMBER; PIPEFITTER 23.27 9.56 PLUM0016K 07/01/2002 WORK PERFORMED ON THE FOLLOWING STRUCTURES: a. One or two family dwellings b. All multiple family dwelling units which are permitted to have a single exterior up to and including four stories; and c. Townhouses, condoniniums or similar structures with units stacked vertically up to and including four stories PLUMBERS AND PIPEFITTERS Rates Fringes 24.31 7.42 ROOF0045B 07/01/2002 ROOFERS Rates Fringes 21.20 3.88 SHEE0206A 08/01/2002 Rates Fringes CAMP PENDLETON both single and multi-family, where each unit is heated a. Existing residetial buildings, and/or cooled by a separate system b. New single family residential buildings including tracts. c. New multi-family residential buildings, not exceeding five stories of living space in height, provided each unit is heated or cooled by a separate system. Hotels and motels are excluded. metal, heating and air conditioning work performed on a project where the total construction cost, excluding land, is under $1,000,000 e. TENANT IMPROVEMENT WORK: Any work necessary to finish interior spaces to conform to the occupants of commercial buildings, after completion of the building shell d. LIGHT COMMERCIAL WORK: Any sheet SHEETMETAL TECHNICIAN 17.83 All other Work SHEETMETAL WORKER REMAINDER OF COUNTY both single and multi-family, where each unit is heated and/or cooled by a separate system b. New single family residential buildings including tracts. c. New multi-family residential buildings, not exceeding five stories of living space in height, provided each unit is heated or cooled by a separate system. Hotels and motels are excluded. d. LIGHT COMMERCIAL WORK Any sheet metal, heating and a. Existing residetial buildings, air conditioning work performed on a project where the total construction cost, excluding land, is under $1,000,000 e. TENANT IMPROVEMENT WORK: Any work necessary to finish interior spaces to conform to the occupants of commercial buildings, after completion of the building shell SHEETMETAL TECHNICIAN 27.90 17.83 2.52 11-00 2 42 TEAM0036A 06/01/2002 Rates Fringes TRUCK DRIVERS: GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 GROUP 7 10.76 11.12 20.35 11.12 20.55 11.12 20.75 11.12 20.95 11.12 21.45 11.12 22.95 11.12 FOOTNOTE: HAZMAT PAY: Work on a hazmat job, where hazmat certification is required, shall be paid, in addition to the classification working in, as follows: Levels A, B and C - +$1.00 per hour. Workers shall be paid hazmat pay in increments of four (4) and eight (8) hours. TRUCK DRIVER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Swamper; fuel person (fueler without trucks) GROUP 2: Two-axle dump trucks; two-axle flat bed; bunkerman concrete pumping truck; industrial lift truck; forklift under 15,000 lbs GROUP 3: Two-axle water truck: three-axle dump truck; three- axle flat bed; erosion control nozzleman; dumpcrete truck less than 6 1/2 ydOO; forklift 15,000 lbs. and over; Prell truck; pipeline work truck driver; road oil spreader, cement distributor or slurry driver; bootman; Ross carrier GROUP 4: Off-road dump trucks under 35 tons mfg rated capacity; four axles but less than seven axles; low-bed truck and trailer; transit mix trucks under 8 yds.; three axle water trucks; erosion control drive; grout mixer truck; dumpcrete, 6- 1/2 yds. and over; dumpster trucks; DW lo's, 20's and over; fuel truck and dynamite; truck greaser; truck mounted mobile sweeper: winch truck, two axles GROUP 5: Off-road dump trucks 35 tons and over mfg rated capacity; 7 axles or more; transit mix trucks 8 yds. and over; A- frame trucks or Swedish crane; tireman, winch truck 3 axles or more GROUP 6: Off-road special equipment (including but not limited to water pull tankers, Athey wagons, DJB, B70 Euclids or like equipment 1 Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (ii)). In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under that identifier do not reflect collectively WAIS Document Retrieval bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. Other designations WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be : * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U. S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U. S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 4.1 All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION SECTION 11 - STATE REQUIREMENTS FOR STATE-AID CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS 11-1.01 GENERAL The bidder's attention is directed to the State of California requirements in the proposal section of these special provisions for the requirements and conditions, which the bidder must observe in the preparation of the proposal form and the submission of the bid. This section applies explicitly to the work and materials included in Bid Schedules "D". 11-1.02 REGULATIONS AND GUIDANCE The regulations at 43 CFR, Part 12, Subparts A - F are hereby incorporated by reference as though set forth in full text. The following Office of Management and Budget (OMB) Circulars, as applicable, and as implemented by 43 CFR Part 12, are also incorporated by reference and made a part of this agreement. Failure of a recipient to comply with any provision may be the basis for withholding payments for proper charges made by the recipient and for termination of support. Copies of OMB Circulars are available on the Internet at httD://www.whitehouse.gov/OMB/circulars/index.htm. The implementation of the circulars at 43 CFR Part 12 is available at httD://www.access.aDo.aov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.htmI#paael. (1) Agreements with colleges and universities shall be in accordance with the following circulars: Circular A-21, revised August 8, 2000, "Cost Principles for Educational Institutions" Circular A-1 10, as amended September 30, 1999, "Uniform Administrative Requirements for Grants and Agreements with Institutions of Higher Education, Hospitals, and Other Non-Profit Organizations" Circular A-133, revised June 24, 1997, "Audits of States, Local Governments, and Non-Profit Organizations" (2) Agreements with State and local governments shall be in accordance with the provisions of the following circulars: Circular A-87, as amended August 29, 1997, "Cost Principles for State, Local, and Indian Tribal Governments" Circular A-102, as amended August 29, 1997, "Grants and Cooperative Agreements with State and Local Governments" (Grants Management Common Rule, Codification by Department of Interior, 43 CFR 12) Circular A-133, revised June 24, 1997, "Audits of States, Local Governments, and Non-Profit organizations" (3) Agreements made with nonprofit organizations shall be in accordance with the following circulars and provisions: Circular A-110, as amended September 30, 1999, "Uniform Administrative Requirements for Grants and Agreements With Institutions of Higher Education, Hospitals, and Other Non-Profit Organizations" Circular A-122, revised May 19, 1998, "Cost Principles for Non-Profit Organizations" Circular A-133, revised June 24, 1997, "Audits of States, Local Governments, and Non-Profit organizations" a 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 141 of 414 (4) All agreements with organizations other than those indicated above shall be in accordance with the basic principles of OMB Circular A-11 0, and cost principles shall be in accordance with 48 CFR Subpart 31.2 titled “Contracts with Commercial Organizations” which is available on the Internet at httD://www.access.arx,.aov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.htmI#Daael. 11-1.03 ASSURANCE INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE The provisions of the Assurances executed by the Recipient in connection with this agreement shall apply with full force and effect to this agreement as if fully set forth in these General Provisions. Such Assurances include, but are not limited to, the promise to comply with all applicable Federal statutes and orders relating to nondiscrimination in employment, assistance, and housing; the Hatch Act; Federal wage and hour laws and regulations and work place safety standards; Federal environmental laws and regulations and the Endangered Species Act; and Federal protection of rivers and waterways and historic and archeological preservation. 11-1.04 COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES The recipient warrants that no person or agency has been employed or retained to solicit or secure this agreement upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee, excepting bona fide employees or bona fide offices established and maintained by the recipient for the purpose of securing agreements or business. For breach or violation of this warranty, the Government shall have the right to annul this agreement without liability or, in its discretion, to deduct from the agreement amount, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such commission, percentage, brokerage, or contingent fee. 11-1.05 CONTRACTING WITH SMALL AND MINORITY HIRES, AND WOMEN’S BUSINESS ENTERPRISE It is a national policy to award a fair share of contracts to small and minority business firms. The Department of the Interior is strongly committed to the objectives of this policy and encourages all recipients of its grants and cooperative agreements to take affirmative steps to ensure such fairness. (1) The grantee and subgrantee shall take all necessary affirmative steps to assure that minority (2) Affirmative steps shall include: firms, and women’s business enterprises are used when possible. (a) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women’s business enterprises on solicitation lists; (b) Assuring that small and minority businesses, and women’s business enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources; (c) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and minority business, and women’s business enterprises; (d) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which encourage participation by small and minority business, and women’s business enterprises; (e) Using the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration, and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce as appropriate, and. (9 Requiring the prime contractor, if subcontracts are to be let, to take the affirmative steps listed in 2.(a) through (e) above. 4 1-1.06 NOTICE REGARDING BUY AMERICAN ACT In accordance with Section 502 of the Energy and Water Development Appropriations Act, 2002, Pub. L. 107-66, please be advised of the following: e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 142 of 414 It is the sense of the Congress that, to the greatest extent practicable, all equipment and products purchased with funds made available in this Act should be American-made. <- 11-1.07 RESOLVING DISAGREEMENTS When entering into a cooperative agreement with a recipient, Reclamation commits itself to working with the recipient in a harmonious manner to achieve the objectives of the project successfully. When disagreements arise between the parties, they must be resolved according to the procedures discussed below: (1) Reclamation shall attempt first to resolve disagreements with the recipient through informal discussion among the Grants or Contract Specialist, the Program Officer, and the recipient's Project Director. (2) If the disagreement cannot be resolved through informal discussion between these parties, the Grants Specialist and the Program officer shall document the nature of the disagreement and bring it to the attention of the Grants Officer. :3) After reviewing the facts of the disagreement, as presented by the Grants and Program offices, the Grants Officer will arrange a formal meeting. If agreement still cannot be reached, the parties will collectively decide on any varied approaches which might be used to resolve the disagreement. The parties shall be responsible for their individual expenses related to any approach utilized to resolve the disagreement. If attempts at resolving the disagreement fail, the Chief, Acquisition and Assistance Management Services, or the Regional Director, whichever is applicable, shall make a decision which shall be final and conclusive. (4) Nothing herein shall be construed to delay or limit Reclamation's right to take immediate and appropriate action, as set forth at 43 CFR Subpart 12.83 or 12.962, as applicable, in the event of material noncompliance by the recipient, and no attempts at informal resolution shall be necessary. Any post award issue will be open or resolution in accordance with the above procedures, with the exception of disagreements regarding continuation of the agreement (termination must be in accordance with 43 CFR 12), or other matters specifically addressed by the agreement itself. 11-1.08 LOBBYING RESTRICTIONS In accordance with Section 501 of the Energy and Water Development Appropriations Act, 2002, Pub. L. 107-66, please be advised of the following: None of the funds appropriated by this Act may be used in any way, directly or indirectly, to influence Congressional action on any legislation or appropriation matters pending before Congress, other than to communicate to Members of Congress as described in 18 U.S.C.1913. 11-1.09 ELECTRONIC FUNDS TRANSFER (EFT) In accordance with the Debt Collection Improvement Act of 1996,31 CFR 208, effective January 2,1999, all Federal payments to recipients must be made by EFT unless a waiver has been granted in accordance with 31 CFR 208.4. Upon award of a financial assistance agreement, Reclamation will provide the recipient with further instructions for implementation of EFT payments or a certification form to request exemption from EFT. -1 1-1 .IO INCREASING SEAT BELT USE IN THE UNITED STATES In accordance with 43 CFR 12.2(e), if you are awarded a grant or cooperative agreement, the following provision, is applicable, and shall be incorporated into any grant or cooperative agreement which the recipient a%ards to a subrecipient: a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 143 of 414 Recipients of grants/cooperative agreements and/or sub-awards are encouraged to adopt and enforce on-the-job seat belt use policies and programs for their employees when operating company-owned, rented, or personally owned vehicles. These measures include, but are not limited to, conducting education, awareness, and other appropriate programs for their employees about the importance of wearing seat belts and the consequences of not wearing them. 11-1.11 ENDROSEMENT OF COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS AND SERVICES In accordance with 43 CFR 12.2(d) this provision applies to grants and cooperative agreements whose principal purpose is a partnership where the recipient contributes resources to promote agency programs, publicize agency activities, assists in fund-raising, or provides assistance to the agency. If the agreement is awarded to a recipient, other than a State government, a local government, or a federally- recognized Indian tribal government, and the agreement authorizes joint dissemination of information and promotion of activities being supported, the following provision shall be made a term and condition of the award: Recipient shall not publicize or otherwise circulate, promotional material (such as advertisements, sales brochures, press releases, speeches, still and motion pictures, articles, manuscripts or other publications) which states or implies governmental, Departmental, bureau, or government employee endorsement of a product, service or position which the recipient represents. No release of information relating to this award may state or imply that the Government approves of the recipient‘s work products, or considers the recipient’s work product to be superior to other products or services. All information submitted for publication or other public releases of information regarding this project shall carry the following disclaimer: “The views and conclusions contained in this document are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing the opinions or policies of the US. Government. Mention of trade names or commercial products does not constitute their endorsement by the U.S. Government.” Recipient must obtain prior Government approval for any public information releases concerning this award which refer to the Department of the Interior or any bureau or employee (by name or title). The specific text, layout photographs, etc. of the proposed release must be submitted with the request for approval. A recipient further agrees to include this provision in a subaward to any subrecipient, except for a subaward to a State government, a local government, or to a federally-recognized Indian tribal government. 11-1.12 CERTIFICATIONS The following certifications are incorporated by reference and made a part of this agreement: Certifications Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters, Drug-free Workplace Requirements and Lobbying (DI-2010) @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 144 of 414 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION Sieve Sizes 50-mm (2") 37.5-mm (I '/Zn) 19-mm (3/4") 12.5-mm (l/?) 9.5-mm (98") 4.75-mm (No. 4) 2.36-mm (No. 8) 75-pm (no. 200) PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS Percentage Passing Type A Type B - 100 - 95-1 00 100 50- 1 00 95-1 00 - 70-1 00 15-55 0-55 0-25 0-1 0 0-5 0-3 0-3 SECTION 200 - ROCK MATERIALS Sieve Sizes 25-mm (1 ") 19-mm ('/4") 9.5-mm 4.75-mm (No. 4) 2.36-mm (No. 8) 600-pm (No. 30) 300-pm (No. 50) 75ym (no. 200) 200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS Percentage Passing 100 90-1 00 40-1 00 25-40 18-33 5-1 5 0-7 0-3 Add the following section: 200-1.2.2 Permeable Material. Permeable material shall consist of hard, durable, clean sand, gravel, or crushed stone, and shall be free from organic material, clay balls, or other deleterious substances. Class 1 and Class 2 permeable material shall have a Durability Index of not less than 40. Class 2 Permeable material shall have a Sand Equivalent value of not less than 75. Class 1 permeable material shall conform to the requirements in this section and Table 200-1 .2.2(A). Class 2 permeable material shall conform to the requirements in this section and Table 200-1.2.2(B). When permeable material is required and the class or kind is not specified, Class 1 permeable material shall be used. The alternative gradings within Class 1 permeable material are identified by types. Unless otherwise shown on the plans the Contractor will be permitted to furnish and place any one of the types provided for this class. The percentage composition by mass of permeable material in place shall conform to the gradings in Tables 200-1.2.2(A) and 200-1.2.2(8). e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 145 of 414 200-1.5 Sand. Add the following section: 200-1.5.6 Sand for Rip-Rap Energy Dissipator. Sand for Rip Rap Energy Dissipator shall conform to the requirements of Section 200-1 55 of the Standard Specifications for portland cement concrete. 200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS 200-2.1 General. Delete this section and add the following: base may consist of one of the following: Materials for use as crushed aggregate Crushed Aggregate Base per Section 200-2.2 of the SSPWC Crushed Miscellaneous Base per Section 200-2.4 of the SSPWC Class 2 Aggregate Base per requirements of this section One type of aggregate base shall be used for the entire project unless othenrvise approved by the Engineer. 200-2.2.1 General. Add the following: Aggregate for crushed aggregate base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base. Aggregate may include or consist of material processed from reclaimed asphalt concrete, portland cement concrete, lean concrete base, cement treated base, glass or a combination of any of these materials. Aggregate base incorporating reclaimed glass shall not be placed at locations where surfacing will not be placed over the aggregate base. Add the following section: 200-2.7 Class 2 Aggregate Base. Aggregate for Class 2 aggregate base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base. Aggregate may include material processed from reclaimed asphalt concrete, portland cement concrete, lean concrete base, cement treated base or a combination of any of these materials. The amount of reclaimed material shall not exceed 50 percent of the total volume of the aggregate used. Aggregate shall conform to the grading and quality requirements shown in the following tables. AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS Percentage Passing 31'4" Maximum Operating Sieve Sizes Range 1 " ........................... 100 314" ......................... 90-1 00 No. 4 ...................... 35-60 No. 30 ..................... 10-30 No. 200 .................. 2-9 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Tests Range Resistance (R-value) 78 Min. Sand Equivalent 25 Min. Durability Index 35 Min. Operating 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 146 of 414 The aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemical material before the Durability Index test is performed. If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements specified for "Operating Range" but meet the "Contract Compliance" requirements, placement of the aggregate base may be continued for the remainder of that day. However, another day's work may not be started until tests, or other information, indicate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the next material to be used in the work will comply with the requirements specified for "Operating Range." If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the requirements specified for "Contract Compliance," the aggregate base which is represented by these tests shall be removed. However, if requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the aggregate base may remain in place and the Contractor shall pay to the City $2.25 per cubic yard for such aggregate base left in place. The City may deduct this amount from any moneys due, or that may become due, the Contractor under the contract. If both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent do not conform to the "Contract Compliance" requirements, only one adjustment shall apply Type of Construction Trench Backfill Slurry Street Light Foundations and Survey Monuments Traffic Signal Foundations Concreted-Rock Erosion Protection No single aggregate grading or Sand Equivalent test shall represent more than 500 cubic yards or one day's production, whichever is smaller. Concrete Maximum Class Metric Units (US Standard Units) Slump mm (Inches) 1 15-E-3 200 (8") 33O-C-23 100 (4") 35O-C-27 100 (4") (1 90-E-400) (56O-C-3250) (590-C-3750) (520-C-25OOP) 31 0-C-17 per Table 300-1 1.3.1 SECTION 201 - CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS 201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 201-1 2.4 Chemical Admixtures. (e) Air-entraining Admixtures. Substitute the following: The air content shall not deviate from the percentage specified or permitted by more than 1-1/2 percentage points. The air content of freshly mixed concrete will be determined by California Test Method No. 504. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 147 of 414 201 -1.2.5 Fly Ash. Add the following before the first paragraph: Mineral admixture shall be combined with cement to make cementitious material. The calcium oxide content of mineral admixtures shall not exceed 10 percent and the available alkali, as sodium oxide equivalent, shall not exceed 1.5 percent when determined in conformance with the requirements in ASTM Designation: C 618. The amounts of cement and mineral admixture used in cementitious material shall be sufficient to satisfy the minimum cementitious material content requirements elsewhere in these specifications and shall conform to the following: . A. The minimum amount of cement shall not be less than 75 percent by mass of the specified minimum cementitious material content; B. The minimum amount of mineral admixture to be combined with cement shall be determined using one of the following criteria: 1. When the calcium oxide content of a mineral admixture is equal to or less than 2 percent by mass, the amount of mineral admixture shall not be less than 15 percent by mass of the total amount of cementitious material to be used in the mix; 2. When the calcium oxide content of a mineral admixture is greater than 2 percent, the amount of mineral admixture shall not be less than 25percent by mass of the total amount of cementitious material to be used in the mix; 3. When a mineral admixture that conforms to the provisions for silica fume in Section 90-2.04, "Admixture Materials," is used, the amount of mineral admixture shall not be less than 10 percent by mass of the total amount of cementitious material to be used in the mix C. The total amount of mineral admixture shall not exceed 35 percent by mass of the total amount of cementitious material to be used in the mix. Where the specified mix design requires a maximum cementitious content in kilograms per cubic meter, the total mass of cement and mineral admixture per cubic meter shall not exceed the specified maximum cementitious material content. 201-2.1 General. Add the following after the first paragraph: Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of Section 52-1.02B of Caltrans Standard Specifications, with the following exception. Representative samples of epoxy and coated bars shall be provided to the Engineer. SECTION 202 - MASONRY MATERIALS Add The Following Section: 202-3 Articulated Block The Contractor shall submit a summary of materials to be used as Articulated Block, including manufacturer's name and material properties for the approval by the Engineer. No material shall be ordered prior to the written approval of the Engineer. Masonry block for Articulated Block shall conform to the requirements of Section 202-2, Masonry Units. Cable anchors and fittings, such as sleeves, clamps, and stops shall be corrosion resistant, and according to manufactures recommendations. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 148 of 414 SECTION 203 - BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE 203-6.1 General. Add the following: The Contractor shall submit a design mix report and verification data for review by the Engineer for each source of supply and type of mixture specified. The design mix report shall indicate the results of all testing requirements identified in sections 203-1.2 and 203-6.3 of ’ the standard specifications for public works construction and these special provisions. 203-6.2 Materials. Add the following: Asphalt concrete shall be class C2-AR-4000 for surface course, and B-AR 4000 for base course. Asphalt concrete shall be class D2-AR-4000 for dikes and class E-AR-8000 for ditches. 203-6.3 Asphalt Concrete Mixtures. 203-6.3.2 Composition and Grading. Add the following: Evaluation of asphalt concrete shall be determined from samples of asphalt concrete taken after completion of all processing (Wet Mix) or by core sample analysis of the in-place asphalt concrete or by direct central plant inspection that confirms the production of a particular mix design and verifies using samples of aggregate taken before the addition of asphalt and mineral filler (Bin). All samples shall be taken in accordance with Calif. Test 125 When Wet Mix or Core samples of asphalt concrete are to be used for evaluation, sufficient size samples shall be taken to ensure representative and adequate quantity of material for: 1. Asphalt Content and Gradation by Extraction using Calif. Test 382 or ASTM 21 72, and Calif. Test 202. 2. Stability’ using: a. Stabilometer Value2 using Calif. Test 366 and shall be the average of three individual Stabilometer Values Marshall Stability in accordance with the Asphalt Institute’s MS-2 fabricated and tested for traffic volume and shall be the average of three specimens. Andlor b. 1. Stability will be waived provided the extracted asphalt content is within +/-.5 of mix design and the extracted gradation complies with Table 203-6.3.2 (A). 2. Use Marshall Stability when the deviation between individual Stabilometer are greater than +/-4. When using core sample analysis, the samples must be properly prepared to safeguard against influx of outside contaminates and so that the cut surfaces do not influence the test results. The amount of asphalt binder used in asphalt concrete placed in dikes, gutters, gutter flares, overside drains and aprons at the ends of drainage structures shall be increased one percent by mass of the aggregate over the amount of asphalt binder determined for use in asphalt concrete placed on the traveled way. 203-6.3.3 Acceptance. Wet Mix or Core sampled asphalt concrete will be considered in confomiance with the mix design when the asphalt content is within +/- .5 of the design mix and the gradation conforms to the grading as shown in table 203-6.3.2 (A). Deviations in gradation may be considered in conformance with the mix design provided the stability of the completed mix complies with the requirements for Stabilometer Value per table 203-6.3.2 (A) Marshall Stability using Asphalt Institute MS- 2. - Plant inspected asphalt concrete will be considered in conformance with the mix design when visually 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 149 of 414 inspected and the combined gradation of the Bin samples show conformance to the grading as shown in Table 203-6.3.2 (A). USES Headers for bituminous pavement up to 50 mm x 100 203-6.6.1, Batch Plant Method. modify as follows: Third paragraph, last sentence, delete “and from the Engineer’s field laboratory”. Last paragraph, add after D 21 72: “method A or B.” 203-6.7 Asphalt Concrete Storage. add the following: Open graded asphalt concrete stored in excess of 2 hours, and any other asphalt concrete stored in excess of 18 hours, shall not be used in the work. GRADES Construction grade Redwood or preservative SECTION 204 - LUMBER AND TREATMENT WITH PRESERVATIVES mm (2”x4”) Headers for bituminous pavement larger than 50 mm 204-1 LUMBER AND PLYWOOD treated construction grade Douglas Fir Number 1 grade Redwood, or preservative treated - x 100 mm (Z”x4”) I number 1 grade Douglas Fir SECTION 205 - PILES 205-3.3.2 Piles Cast in Drilled Holes Add the following before the first paragraph: See also Section 305 of the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions for additional requirements for Cast in Drilled Hole Pile construction. SECTION 206 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS Add the following section: 206-7 TRAFFIC SIGNS Add the following section: 206-7.1 Permanent Traffic Signs Permanent traffic signs shall consist of 10-gage and 12-gage cold- rolled steel perforated tubing. This includes all signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic upon the completion of the Work unless othewise shown on the plans. Add the following section: 206-7.1.1 General. Materials, legend, proportion, size, and fabrication of all signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall conform to the requirements of “SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993”, Sheets 1 through 5 that accompany “SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993” of dimensions and details, dated April 1987, and “OPAQUE COLOR CHART”, dated February 1980, all published by the State of California, Department of Transportation, Division of Procurement Services, Office of Material Operations, 1900 Royal Oaks Drive, Sacramento, CA 95819 and as modified herein. Where the “SPECIFICATION FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993” require the Contractor or supplier to notify the Department of Transportation or to certify compliance to said ’ am ts 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 150 of 414 SPECIFICATIONS, to provide a quality control program or to allow testing, approval, observation of employees or officials, such rights shall be vested in the Engineer. - manufacturing or assembly operations by the State of California, Department of Transportation and/or its Add the following section: 206-7.1.2 Sign Identification. Modify the "SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993" as follows: Sign identification shall be as per "SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFLECTIVE SHEETING SIGNS, October 1993", except that the notation shall be "PROPERTY OF THE CITY OF CARLSBAD". Add the following section: 206-7.1.3 Drawings. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as follows: Standard signs shall be as per the most recently approved "Approved Sign Specification Sheets" of the State of California, Department of Transportation. The date of approval shall be the date most closely preceding the date of manufacture of the sign(s) or the date of the "Notice to Proceed" of this contract, whichever is most recent. Add the following section: 206-7.1.4 Reflective Sheeting. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as follows: All advisory signs, warning signs and all regulatory signs shall be fabricated with Type Ill encapsulated lens sheeting conforming to the requirements of this specification. All sign designations shall be as per the "Traffic Manual", 1996 (Revision 2), as published by the California Department of Transportation. Add the following section: 206-7.1.5 Substrate. Modify the 'Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as follows: All permanent traffic signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall use aluminum substrate. Add the following section: 206-7.1.6 Mounting Traffic Signs. Traffic signs shall be installed on IO-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts as shown on San Diego Regional Standard drawing M-45 or, when the sign area exceeds the maximum area allowed for on that drawing, on multiple ?Osage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts. The number of posts shall be determined by the parameters in SDRS drawing M-45 or as approved by the Engineer. Traffic signs will be provided with back braces and mounting blocks as approved by the Engineer consisting of 1 O-gage or 1 2-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing when multiple posts are used. Add the following section: 206-7.1.7 Traffic Sign Posts. perforated tubing posts as shown on San Diego Regional Standard drawing M-45. Posts shall be constructed of 10-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel Add the following section: 206-7.2 Temporary Traffic Signs. Temporary traffic signs shall consist of all signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic during the Contractor's performance of the Work. Temporary traffic signs include both stationary and portable signs. Add the following section: 206-7.2.1 General. Materials, legend, proportion, size, and fabrication of all temporary traffic signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall conform to the requirements of "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993", Sheets 1 through 5 that accompany "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" of dimensions and details, dated April 1987, and "OPAQUE COLOR CHART", dated February 1980, all published by the State of California, Department of Transportation, Division of Procurement Services, Office of Material 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 151 of 414 Operations, 1900 Royal Oaks Drive, Sacramento, CA 95819 and as modified herein. Where The "Specification For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" require the Contractor or supplier to notify the Department of Transportation or to certify compliance to said "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993", to provide a quality control program or to allow testing, approval, observation of manufacturing or assembly operations by the State of California, Department of Transportation and/or its employees or officials, such rights shall be vested in the Engineer. Add the following section: 206-7.2.2 Drawings. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as follows: Standard temporary traffic signs shall be as per the most recently approved "Approved Sign Specification Sheets" of the State of California, Department of Transportation. The date of approval shall be the date most closely preceding the date of manufacture of the sign(s) or the date of the "Notice to Proceed" of this contract, whichever is most recent. Add the following section: 206-7.2.3 Reflective Sheeting. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as follows: All advisory signs, warning signs and all regulatory signs shall be fabricated with Type Ill encapsulated lens sheeting conforming to the requirements of this specification. All sign designations shall be as per the "Traffic Manual", 1996 (Revision 2), as published by the California Department of Transportation. Add the following section: 206-7.2.4 Substrate. Modify the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993" as follows: Excepting only construction warning signs used at a single location during daylight hours for not more than five (5) consecutive days, all signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic shall be stationary mounted and shall use aluminum substrate. Add the following section: 206-7.2.5 Stationary Mounted Temporary Traffic Signs. Stationary mounted temporary traffic signs shall be installed on IO-gage and 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts in the same manner shown on the State of California, Department of Transportation "Standard Plans" 1995 edition standard plans numbers RS1 , RS2, RS3 and RS4 for installation of roadside signs, except as follows: a) Wood posts shall not be used. b) Back braces and blocks for sign panels will not be required. c) The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least 2.1 m (7'). d) Unless otherwise shown on the plans traffic sign posts shall conform in materials and installation to SDRS drawing M-45 and shall have one post provided for each 0.48 m2 (5 @)of sign area, or the signs may be installed on existing lighting standards when approved by the Engineer. e) Sign panels mounted on temporary traffic sign posts shall conform to the requirements specified for aluminum signs in the "Specifications For Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993". Add the following section: 206-7.2.6 Temporary Traffic Sign Posts. Posts shall be 10-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing used for the support and stabilization of stationary mounted temporary signs. Post size and number of posts shall be as shown on the plans, except that when stationary mounted signs are installed and the type of sign installation is not shown on the plans, post size and the number of posts will be determined by the Engineer. Sign panels for stationary mounted signs shall consist of reflective sheeting applied to a sign substrate. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 152 of 414 Add the following section: 206-7.2.7 Portable Temporary Traffic Signs. Each portable temporary traffic sign shall consist of a base, standard or framework and a sign panel. The units shall be capable of being delivered to the site of use and placed in immediate operation. Sign panels for portable signs shall conform to the requirements of sign panels for stationary mounted signs in the "Specifications for Reflective Sheeting Signs, October 1993, or shall be cotton drill fabric, flexible industrial nylon fabric, or other approved fabric. Fabric signs shall not be used during the hours of darkness. Size, color, and legend requirements for portable signs shall be as described for stationary mounted sign panels in section 206-7.2 of these Supplemental Provisions. The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least 0.3-m (12"). All parts of the sign standard or framework shall be finished with 2 applications of orange enamel which will match the color of the sign panel background. Testing of paint will not be required. Add the following section: 206-8 LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING AND CONNECTORS Add the following section: 206-8.1 General. This Section pertains to 10gage and 12gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing used for the support and stabilization of signs. All shapes shall have a galvanized finish and shall be cold-roll-formed steel conforming to ASTM Designation A-446, Grade A. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A-525, Designation G-90. Galvanizing shall be performed after all forming and punching operations have been completed. Cold-rolled steel perforated tubing shall be perforated on all four faces with 1 Imm (7/16") holes on 25 mm (1") centers. Add the following section: 206-8.2 Tolerances. Wall thickness tolerance shall not exceed +0.28 mm, -0.13 mm (+0.01 l", -0.005"). Convexity and concavity measured in the center of the flat side shall not exceed a tolerance of +0.25 mm (+0.010") applied to the specific size determined at the comer. Straightness tolerance variation shall not exceed 1.6 mm in 1 m (1116 " in 3'). Tolerance for comer radius is 4.0mm (5/32"), plus or minus 0.40 mm (1/64"). Weld flash on comer-welded square tubing shall permit 3.60 mm (9/64") radius gage to be placed in the comer. Using 10gage or 12-gage square tube, consecutive size tubes shall telescope freely for 3.lm (10'). Tolerance on hole size is plus or minus 0.40 mm (1/64") on a size. Tolerance on hole spacing is plus or minus 3.2 mm in 6.1 m (1/8" in 20'). In addition, for the following specific sizes of light gage steel tubing, dimensional tolerances shall not exceed those listed in tables 206-8.2 (A) and 206-8.2(6). @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 153 of 414 TABLE 206-8.W) LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING SIZE TOLERANCE Nominal Outside Dimensions I Outside Tolerance for All Sides at Comers TABLE 206-8.24B) (I) Tubing may have its sides failing to be 90 degrees to each other by the tolerance listed. (') Twist is measured by holding down the edge of one end of a square tube on a surface plate with the bottom side of the tube parallel to the surface plate, and noting the height that either corner on the opposite end of the bottom side is above the surface plate. Add the following section: 206-8.3 Fasteners. Fasteners used to assemble cold-rolled steel perforated tubing shall be steel "pull- through" electro galvanized rivets with 9.5 mm (3/8") diameter shank, 22 mm (7/8") diameter head, and a grip range of from 5 mm (0.200") to 0.90 mm (0.356"). The fasteners shall conform to ASTM 6-633, Type Ill Add the following section: 206-9.1 Structural Steel. Steel work shall conform to the latest AlSC "Code Of Standard Practice" for the design, fabrication, and erection of structural steel for building. All welding shall comply with AWS D1.l Structural Welding Code. Qualifications of welders shall be in accordance with the "Standard Qualification Procedures" of the AWS. All steel shapes and plates shall be ASTM A-36 steel; structural tubing shall be ASTM A500 grade 6. E7OXX electrodes shall be used for welding of structural steel. Unless otherwise noted: all anchor bolts and connection bolts shall be A-307. Bolt hole diameters shall be bolt size plus 1/16" for connection bolts. Anchor bolts shall be cast-in-place. All bolts shall be galvanized and tightened to their proof loads by the "tum-of -nut" method. Fabricator shall provide proper drain holes per ASTM A385 for tubular sections for galvanizing. 206-9 MATERIALS FOR ELECTRIC CONDUIT SUPPORTS a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 154 of 414 All structural steel shall be galvanized according to ASTM A123 and A153. Fabricator shall comply with ASTM A143, A304, and A385 Anchor bolts and connection bolts shall be galvanized U.N.O. Damaged galvanizing shall be touched up by 2 coats of SDG&E approved zinc-rich paint. Shop drawings shall be submitted for SDG&E approval prior to fabrication. 206-9.2 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Products. Structural shapes shall be made from a premium grade polyester or vinyl ester resin with fire retardant additives to meet Class 1 flame rating of ASTM E- 84 and meet the self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D-635. All structural shapes shall contain a U.V. inhibitor. FRP products shall be manufactured by the pultrusion process. Structural FRP members composition shall consist of a glass fiber reinforced polyester or vinyl ester resin matrix, approximately 50% resin to glass ratio. A synthetic surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior surfaces. Glass strand rovings shall be used internally for longitudinal strength. Continuous strand glass mats shall be used internally for transverse strength. Cut, notched & scratched surfaces or edges shall be sealed with epoxy resin & hardener. Snug fit shall be achieved at the bolted joints of FRP and steel members. No gaps shall exist between the connected parts at the bolt holes. Structural FRP members shall be STRONGWELL EXTREN SERIES 625 as manufactured by Strongwell Bristol Division, Bristol, Virginia (Tel no. 800-848-1 141) or approval equal. SECTION 207 - PIPE 207-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 207-2.1 General. Add the following: The concrete design strength in these reaches shall be f c=5,000 psi for velocities exceeding 20 fps and f'c=6,000 psi for velocities exceeding 30 fps. 207-2.4.2 Location of Reinforcement. Add the following: The concrete cover on the inside of all reinforced concrete pipe must be increased to provide a minimum of 1%" over the reinforcing when the design velocities exceed 20 fps. 207-2.5 Joints. Add the following: When watertight joints are indicated on the plans they shall be of the rubber-gasketed type meeting the requirements of ASTM Standard Specification designations C 361 and C 443. Pipe designated in the plans as "pressure pipe" or with a 100-year hydraulic grade line at or above the soffit shall be bell and groove spigot joint with "0" rings conforming to ASTM C-443 and C-361 for the limits shown on the plans. 207-9 IRON PIPE AND FlITlNGS 207-9.2.2 Pipe Joints Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all joints shall be the push-on type joint. Joints and accessories shall conform to the requirements and dimensions specified in ANSI A21.11, AWWA C111. Rubber gasket material shall conform to 208-1.2 and AWWA CI I1 and ANSI A21 .I 1-90 207-9.2.3 Fittings. Add the following: Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI 21 30, AWWA C150 and ANSI 21 51, AWWA C151, and shall be of the sizes and thickness classes shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise specified, size four inch (4") through six inch (6") DIP shall be thickness Class 52, while size eight inch (8") and larger shall be thickness Class 50. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 155 of 414 Unless otherwise specified, Pressure class pipe may be substituted for thickness class pipe in accordance with the pressure class shown on the plans. 207-9.2.4 Lining and Coating. Add the following: Unless otherwise specified, all iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with double thickness, cement mortar lining with cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type Ill AWWA C104/A21.4.90 and outside coating of bituminous coating a minimum of 2 mils. thick in accordance with AWWA C151 or C100. Delete paragraph 207-9.3 and replace in its entirety with: 207-9.3 Fittings. All materials for installation of Carlsbad Municipal Water District recycled water mains for Bid Schedule D shall conform in all respects to these specifications and the Carlsbad Municipal Water District's Reclamation Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, latest edition. All materials for installation of Vallecitos Water District water mains for Bid Schedule C and D shall conform in all respects to these specifications and the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials List, latest edition. Add the following section: 207-9.4 Pipe Lengths. Pipe lengths shall be as specified in ANSI A21.51, AWWA C151, except where shorter lengths are required to fit horizontal and vertical alignment. Combined horizontal and vertical deflections at any rubber gasket or flexible coupling joints shall not exceed eighty percent (80%) of the maximum deflection recommended by the manufacturer. Add the following section: 207-9.5 Flanges. Flanges shall be ductile iron, Class 125, unless otherwise shown on the Plans, screwed-on type in accordance with ANSI A21.15, AWWA C115, for pipe, and integrally cast for fittings in accordance with ANSI A21.10, AWWA C110: Gaskets shall be 1/8-inch thick minimum in accordance with AWWA C115 and shall have a minimum rated working pressure equal to 350 psi at 18OoF. Drop-in face type with holes pre-punched shall be used where both flanges are flat face. Where adjoining flange is steel, the steel flange shall be flat face. 207-10 STEEL PIPE Add the following: 207-10.1 General. All materials for installation of Vallecitos Water District water mains shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials List, latest edition, and these special provisions, for Bid Schedule C and D. Fabricated Steel Pipe and Fittings shall conform in all respects to Carlsbad Municipal Water District Reclamation Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, latest edition, for Bid Schedule D, except as specified herein. Steel casing to be placed in utility openings in Rancho Santa Fe Road Bridge Left and Rancho Santa Fe Road Bridge Right shall be A 252 Grade 3. 207-10.1.1 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe 207-10.1 .1.1 mortar lined and coated steel pipe and specials. General. This section includes materials, design, fabrication, and installation of cement- 207-10.1.1.2 Reference Standards. The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otheNvise called for. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 156 of 414 AWWA C200 AWWA C205 AWWA C206 AWWA C207 AWWA C208 AWWA C209 AWWA C210 AWWA C213 AWS ASME AWWA C214 Steel Water Pipe 6-inches and larger Cement-mortar protective lining and coating Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe Steel Pipe Flanges Dimensions for Fabricated Fittings Cold Applied Tape Coating for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connection and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines Coal-tar epoxy coating system for interior and exterior of steel water pipelines Fusion-Bonded epoxy coating for the interior and exterior of steel water pipelines Standard Qualification Procedure for Manual Welding Operators Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Tape Coatings Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipeline 207-1 0.1.1.3 Coating for Steel Pipe' Related Work Specified Elsewhere. SSPWC Section 207-1 0.4, 'Protective Lining and 207-10.1.1.4 Service Application. Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe and specials shall be used only for specific purposes as shown on the Approved Plans. Generally, cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe shall be used for transmission mains of 16" or larger. 207-10.1.1.5 Specials. A special is defined as any piece of pipe other than a normal full length of straight pipe. This includes, but is not limited to, elbows, short pieces, reducers, tees, crosses, spools, sections with outlets, beveled sections and manholes. 207-10.1.1.6 Submittals Shop Drawing. Submittals are required for the following: Submittals. The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 2-5.3, A. Submit Shop Drawings, material lists, manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts of, but not limited to, the following: Shop Drawings Fabrication Details Layout Schedule Dimensional Checks Manufacturer's tests Protective Coatings Mill Reports or Plant Test Reports Welding Rods for Field Welding Shop Drawings shall be submitted and approved prior to manufacture of pipe. The layout schedule shall indicate the order of installation, the length and location of each pipe section and special, the station and elevation of the pipe invert at all changes in grade, and all data on curves and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment. B. Submit data used by the Contractor in manufacture and quality control. C. Test reports showing the physical properties of the rubber used in the gaskets shall be submitted. 207-10.1.1.7 Payment. A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto. 8. Payment by the linear foot shall be for each diameter and for each pipe strength designation measured horizontally over the pipe centerline. 207-10.1.1.8 Quality Assurance. A. Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe shall be inspected at the supplier's manufacturing plant by the District Engineer. Developer shall be responsible for District Engineer's expenses, including travel, time, meals and overnight accommodations. Overnight accommodations and air travel may be required, G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 157 of 414 at the discretion of the Engineer, if the manufacturing plant is more than 100 miles from the District Engineer's office. B. In addition to the shop hydrostatic testing performed on pipe cylinders required per AWWA C200, all welds of specials and attachments (Le., joint rings and nozzles) shall be tested by a dye-penetrant process. Certification of such testing shall be submitted to the District. C. Field welders shall be certified under Section IX, Part A of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or in accordance with AWWA C206, Section 3. Welders shall present a copy of their certification to the District prior to performing any field welding. Certifications shall be dated within three (3) years of the job to be performed. D. Plainly mark each length of straight pipe and each special at the bell end to identify the proper location of the pipe item by reference to the layout schedule. E. The top of all pipe and specials shall be clearly identified by marking the top with "T.O.P." for easy identification in the field. 207-10.1.1.9 Delivery, storage, and handling of the pipe and specials shall be as follows: A. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully handled and shall be protected against damage to linings and coatings due to impact shocks. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the site or elsewhere. Pipe shall be handled and stored per these requirements and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Delivery, Storage, And Handling. B. Temporary internal bracing shall be installed in all pipe 600mm (24") and larger prior to shipment to the job site. Temporary internal bracing shall be 1OOmm x 1OOmm (4" x 4") wooden struts installed in both the horizontal and vertical directions. Each set of struts shall be nailed together as a unit. Wooden wedges may be used to maintain the proper tight fit of the internal bracing. The bracing shall be located 300mm (12") in from each end of the pipe section for all pipe, and additionally at the mid-point for piping 800mm (30") and larger. Maintain internal bracing as specified under pipe installation. C. Transport pipe to the job site on padded bunks with nylon tie-down straps or padded bonding to protect the pipe. 0. Pipes and specials shall only be handled with appropriate spreader bars and wide nylon slings. Chains or wire rope slings shall not be used. Under no circumstances shall pipe or specials be pushed or dragged along the ground. All pipe sections over 6m (20') in length shall be lifted at the quarter points from each end. E. Store pipe on earth berms or timber cradles adjacent to the trench in the numerical order of installation. Place the supports at about one-quarter point from the pipe ends. F. Maintain plastic end caps on all pipe and specials in good condition until the pipe is ready to be installed in the trench. Periodically open the plastic end caps and spray potable water inside the pipe for moisture control. 207-10.1.2 Materials for Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe 207-10.1.2.1 Pipe lining and coating shall be the product of one company in the business of designing and manufacturing cement-mortar lined, tape wrapped and mortar Pipe Design Requirements. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 158 of 414 coated steel pipe. Use of subcontractors or subcontracts to apply the lining and coating of the steel pipe is not allowed. The pipe shall consist of the following components: A welded steel cylinder with joints formed integrally with the steel cylinder or with steel joint rings welded to the ends; A centrifugally-cast cement-mortar lining; A self-centering bell and spigot joint with a circular preformed elastomeric gasket, so designed that the joint will be watertight under all conditions of service; Tape wrapping of the cylinder over a dielectric coating; A dense, concentric, steel reinforced exterior cement-mortar coating. The Plans indicate the elevations and alignment of the pipeline, the nominal inside diameter of the lined pipe, and the minimum steel cylinder thickness or design pressure (adjusted to satisfy transient conditions). Design soil cover shall be as stated on the Plans or Specifications or, if none is stated, the amount of cover shall be scaled from the Plans. Minimum thickness of the steel cylinder shall be as shown on the Plans or, if not shown on the Plans, as determined by the following formula, except that steel thickness shall not be less than 10 gauge (0.1 345-inch). t = Pd Where P = Design pressure, in psi plus 50 psi minimum 2s S = Steel stress at design pressure, i.e., 16,500 psi t = Steel cylinder thickness, in inches d = OD of steel cylinder, in inches 207-10.1.2.2 Steel Cylinders. Materials used in fabricating steel cylinders shall be hot rolled carbon steel sheets conforming to the requirements of ASTM A53, Grade B, ASTM A570 Grade 36 or Grade 33, or steel plates conforming to the requirements of ASTM A36. The method of testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A570. Full penetration welds will be required. Welds may be straight or spiral seam. The circumferential stress in the steel shall not exceed 16,500 psi at the design pressure. 207-10.1.2.3 conform to ASTM C150, unless otherwise specified. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used. Cement. Cement for mortar lining and coating shall be Portland Cement Type II and 207-10.1.2.4 Steel Bar Or Wire Reinforcement. Circumferential steel bar or wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A61 5, Grade 40, "Specifications for Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". Wire fabric reinforcing for cement-mortar coatings and linings of fittings shall conform to ASTM A185, "Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric," or ASTM A497, "Specifications for Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric." Spiral-wire reinforcement for cement-mortar coatings shall conform to ASTM A82. 207-10.1.2.5 Steel For Joint Rings. Steel for bell rings shall conform to ASTM A575 "Specification for Merchant Quality Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Bars." Steel for spigot rings shall conform to ASTM A576, "Specification for Special Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars." 207-10.1.2.6 Dimensions. The steel pipe sizes shown on the Plans or otherwise referred to shall be the nominal inside diameter. Unless otherwise specified, the nominal diameter shown on the Plans-shall be considered to be the inside diameter after lining. 207-10.1.2.7 Manufacturer's Tests. Each steel cylinder with joint rings attached and cylinders for specials shall be hydrostatically tested to a circumferential stress of at least 22,000 psi, but not more than 25,000 psi. If leaks develop during testing, the cylinder shall be repaired by welding and retested until all leaks are eliminated. . 'Rti b 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 159 of 414 The seams in short radius bends and special fittings shall be tested by the air-soap method using air at a pressure of 5 psi or by the dyecheck method. However, if the fitting is fabricated from cylinders which have been previously hydrostatically tested, no further test will be required on seams so tested. Hydrostatic testing of fittings to 150% of the design pressure may replace the tests described above. Any defects revealed by any of the alternate test methods shall be repaired by welding and the fitting retested until all defects have been eliminated. 207-10.1.2.8 Fabrication Details. Each special and each length of straight pipe shall be plainly . marked at the bell end to identify the design pressure and the proper location of the pipe or special by reference to layout schedule. Exposed portion of joint rings shall be protected from corrosion by the manufacturer's standard coating. The pipe shall be fitted with devices shown on the Plans to permit continuous electrical bonding of the various joints following field installation. 207-10.1.2.9 coated , Painting and Coating, except where other coatings are specified elsewhere and in this section. Protective Coatings And Linings. All exposed metal surfaces shall be painted or All steel pipe and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C205 and C602. Linings shall be in accordance with table below. All steel pipe and fittings for underground service shall be cement-mortar lined, taped wrapped and cement-mortar coated in accordance with AWWA C205, C214 and C602 unless otherwise specified on the Plans. For the following nominal inside diameters, the lining thickness and minimum cement-mortar coating thickness shall be as follows: LINING COATING Nominal Pipe Size Thickness Tolerance Thickness Tolerance (inches) finches) (inches) finches) (inches) 4- 10 1 14 -1/32+1/32 1 12 +118 12-18 318 -1/16+1/8 518 +1/8 20-44 1 12 -111 6+1/8 314 +1/8 45 - 58 3/4 -111 6+1/8 1 +118 60 and over 314 -1 I1 6+1/8 1 114 +118 207-10.1.2.10 Steel Pipe And Specials. Steel pipe and specials shall conform to the requirements of the AWA C200 and C205, and AWWA M1 1 , except as modified herein. A. Steel for fabricated cylinders shall conform to ASTM A 36lA 36M, ASTM A 2831 A 283M, Grade D, or ASTM A 5701A 570M, Grade 36. Other steel grades may be used only upon approval of the District Engineer. B. Cement-mortar coating shall be reinforced in accordance with AWA C205. C. Cement mortar grout for field joints shall consist of a mixture of 1-112 to 2 parts sand to 1 part Type II or Type V Portland Cement with enough clean, potable water to permit packing and troweling without 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 160 of 414 crumbling. The sand shall be washed, wellgraded sand such that all will pass a No. 8 sieve. The quantity of water to be used in the preparation of grout shall be the minimum required to produce a mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended. Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 12.4 MPa (1,800 psi) in 28 days. D. In certain circumstances, rapid-setting mortar may be required. Acceleration admixtures may be used in the mix as permitted by the District Engineer. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the mix. 207-10.1.2.11 Painting And Coating. A. Paint and coating products for exterior surfaces of all pipe and appurtenances not otherwise mortar- coated shall be in accordance with CMWD Approved Materials List. B. Paint and coating products for areas in contact with potable and recycled water such plain ends of pipe, grooved and shouldered ends of pipe and exposed inside surfaces or threaded outlets and blind flanges shall be in accordance with and selected from the CMWD Approved Materials List. 207-10.1.2.12 Bolts And Nuts For Flanges. ,Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with the CMWD Approved Materials List. 207-1 0.1.2.13 Gaskets. A. Rubber-ring gaskets shall comply with AWWA C200 according to the applicable joint type and pressure rating of the piping system. B. Flange gaskets shall comply with AWA C207. Flange gaskets shall be 3.18mm (1/8") thick acrylic or aramid fibers bound with nitrile for all sizes of pipe. Gaskets shall be full-face type with pre-punched holes or ring-type extending to the inner edge of the bolt circumference of the flange. C. In the event of encountering organic solvents or petroleum products during the course of the work, alternate gasket materials or joint treatment will be required as directed by the District Engineer. 207-10.1.2.14 Cement-Mortar Curing. The pipe shall be cured by water curing, steam curing or a combination of both. Water curing and steam curing may be used interchangeably on a time ratio basis of four hours water curing to one hour of steam curing. Where steam curing is used, the pipe shall be kept in steam maintained at a temperature of 100 F to 150 F for the specified period and, where water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continually moist by spraying or other means for the specified periods. The pipe shall not be allowed to dry either on the inside or outside surfaces during the curing period. Where water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continuously moist for seven days at a temperature of not less than 40 F before being moved to the trench site. Cement-mortar lining and coating of special pipe and fittings may be cured in accordance with the above provisions or by prompt application of a white-pigmented sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309. Sealing compound shall not be applied at joint ends where compound will interfere with the bond of joint mortar. 207-10.1.2.15 Special Pipe And Fittings. The manufacturer shall furnish all fittings and special pieces required for closures, curves, bends, branches, manholes, outlets, connections for mainline valves, and other appurtenances required by the Plans. 3 %* 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 161 of 414 Special fittings shall be fabricated of welded steel sheet or plate, lined and coated with cement-mortar of the same type as the adjoining pipe and applied as specified for lining and coating of specials in AWA C205 and as modified herein. Butt welding shall be used, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. Minimum centerline radius of an elbow or bend shall be as follows. The maximum deflection at a mitered girth seam shall be 22-112 degrees. PiDe Size (Inches) Minimum Centerline Radius 30 - 48 51 -60 1 O-feet Over 60 2 times ID 2-112 times ID The circumferential stress in the sheet or plate shall not exceed 13,500 psi at the design pressure. The minimum thickness of sheet or plate shall be as follows: Fittina Diameter Ranae (Inches) 18 and under 20 - 24 26 - 36 38 - 45 48 - 54 57 - 60 63 - 72 75 - 84 Minimum Thickness of Sheet or Plate 10 gauge 3/16" or 7 gauge 1 14" 511 6" 318" 711 6" 112" 518" Outlets at special fittings shall be reinforced with collars or crotch plates. If collar reinforcement is used, the outlet diameter shall not exceed 69% of the ID of the fitting. The diameter of outlets reinforced with crotch plates may equal the fitting diameter. The effective shoulder width "W" of collars from the inside surface of the steel outlet to the outside edge of the collar measured on the surface of the cylinder shall be not less than one-third or more than one- half the ID of steel outlet. The thickness of the collar shall be not less than "T" as determined by: Pw x ID cvl. x ID outlet T= 36,000 x W where Pw is the design pressure in pounds per square inch, and all other dimensions are in inches. Collars may be oval in shape or rectangular with well-rounded comers. Outlets 3-inches in diameter and smaller may be installed without collars. The design of crotch plates shall be based upon the paper by Swanson, Chapton, Wilkinson, King, and Nelson, originally published in June 1955 issue of the Joumal of the American Water Works Association and in conformance with AWWA M-I 1. 207-10.1.2.16 Tape Wrap And Mortar Shield. Tape wrap and mortar shield for concrete mortar lined steel pipe shall be in accordance with Section 207-10.1.2.18 'Cement Mortar Lining and Plastic Tape Coating with Mortar, Related to Recycled Water Improvements,' of these Special Provisions. ' 207-10.1.2.17 Handling And Shipment. Pipe and special fittings shall be handled carefully, and blocking and holddowns used during shipment shall prevent movement or shifting. Both ends of pipe and fittings on trucks or rail cars shall be bulkheaded or covered in order to prevent excessive drying of the interior lining. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 162 of 414 207-10.1.2.18 Cement Mortar Lining and Plastic Tape Coating with Mortar, Related to Recycled Water Improvements. 207-10.1.2.18.1 General. The steel water pipe shall be cement mortar lined and coated with a cold- applied plastic tape and have a protective mortar overcoat. Cement mortar lining shall comply with the requirements of 207-1 0.4.2. Cold-applied plastic tape coating shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C 209 and C 214, as modified herein, and with a protective mortar overcoat. The plant and field applied primer and plastic tape, and plant and field applied repair tape shall be by a single manufacturer. The exterior tape coating system shall consist of a primer on the blast cleaned bare metal surface of steel pipe, a three-layer coldapplied plastic tape system and a protective cement-mortar coating applied over the tape system. This system shall be applicable to: 1) Plant applications on straight run of pipe. 2) Plant applications on special sections, connections and fittings, and plant repairs of cold-applied tape. 3) Field applications to pipe joints, field coated fittings and repair of field cold-applied tape. 207-1 0.1.2.18.2 Qualifications of Manufacturers. Manufacturer to demonstrate a minimum of five years successful application of tape coating system on similar diameter steel water pipelines as specified herein. 207-1 0.1.2.1 8.3 Submittals. List of tape coating materials indicating manufacturer, product numbers, and thickness of materials related to tape system for joints and repairs. Certification of test results for each batch of liquid adhesive and each tape material specified shall be in accordance with AWWA C 214. Tape application procedure approved by tape manufacturer. 207-10.1.2.18.4 Primer. Primer shall be comprised of 100 percent butyl rubber with resins for adhesion, cathodic disbonding, and stress corrosion cracking inhibitors. The primer shall be Polyken No. 1039 or approved equal. 207-10.1.2.18.5 Storage Primer. Storage primer on the exposed steel at the tape cutbacks shall be Polyken No. 924 or approved equal. Color is black. 207-10.1.2.18.6 Plant Cold-Applied Plastic Tape System for Straight Run Pipe. 1) Anticorrosion inner layer tape shall be Polyken No. 989 or approved equal with the following properties. Tape Color: Black. Backing: remaining portion of blend of colorants and stabilizers. Consist of a minimum of 98% blend of high and low density polyethylene with the Adhesive: Consist of a 100% butyl based elastomers with resins for adhesion, cathodic disbonding, and long-term inground performance. Thickness: Total thickness 20 mil: Backing, 9 mil; Adhesive, 11 Mil. Tolerance: -5%, + 10%. . 2) First mechanical outer layer shall be Polyken No. 955 or approved equal, with the following properties: Color: Black. Thickness: Total thickness 30 mil: Backing, 25 mil; Adhesive, 5 Mil. Tolerance: -5%, + 10%. 3) Second mechanical outer layer shall be Polyken No. 956 UV1 or approved equal, having ultraviolet radiation protection properties as follows: e 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 163 of 414 Color: White. Thickness: Total thickness 30 mil: Backing, 25 mil; Adhesive, 5 Mil. Tolerance: -5%, + 10%. Total system shall be Polyken YGlll or approved equal. 207-1 0.1.2.1 8.7 Plant Cold-Applied Plastic Tape Coatings for Specials and Fittings, and Plant Repair of Cold-Applied Tape. 1) Anti-corrosion inner layer shall be Polyken No. 932-50 or approved equal. Total thickness 50 mil. 2) Mechanical layer outer tape shall be Polyken No. 955 or approved equal. Total thickness 30 mil. 207-10.1.2.18.8 Field Joint, Field Coated Fittings, and Field Repair of Cold-applied Material. 1) Joint filler tape to be Polyken No. 939 or approved equal. Color: black. Thickness 125 mil. 2) Field joint, field fitting and field repair outer layer shall be Polyken No. 932-50 or approved equal. 3) Heat Shrink sleeves will be allowed with the approval of the Engineer 207-10.1.2.18.9 Mortar Overcoat. 1) Cement shall be Type II, low alkali conforming to ASTM C 150. Mortar overcoat thickness shall be 3/4 inch. 2) Sand shall conform to ASTM C 33 with 100 percent of the sand passing through a No. 4 sieve. 3) Water shall be free of organic materials and shall have a pH of 7.0 to 9.0, a maximum chloride concentration of 500 mg/l (Caltrans 422) and a maximum sulfate concentration of 500 mg/l (Caltrans 41 7). 4) Reinforcement shall be welded wire fabric 2- by 4-inch mesh, ungalvanized conforming to ASTM A 185. Wire with excessive rusting shall not be used. 207-1 1 CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE AND PIPE ARCHES 207-1 1.2 Materials. 207-11.2.1 General. Add the following: Pipe designated in the plans as “pressure pipe” or with a 100- year hydraulic grade line at or above the soffit shall be watertight attained by the use of approved durable, high quality, resilient joint material designed to perform the intended function. 207-1 1.2.2 General. Add the following: Hot-applied bituminous coating shall be applied to all corrugated steel pipe, perforated corrugated steel pipe, coupling bands, and fittings in accordance with Section 207- 11.5 of the SSPWC, Coatings, Linings and Pavings. 207-15 ABS SOLID WALL PIPE 207-15.1 General. Perforated pipe shall conform to SSPWC Section 207-1.7 Perforated pipe. 207-17 PVC PLASTIC PIPE 207-17.1 General. Add the following: All materials for installation of Vallecitos Water District gravity sewer mains shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Material List, latest edition, for Bid Schedule E. Add the following section: @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 164 of 414 207-25 UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE Color Red Yellow Orange Blue Green Brown Purple Add the following section: 207-25.1 Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape: Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall have a minimum 0.13 mm (0.005’) overall thickness, with no less than a 35 gauge (AWG), 0.14 mm aluminum foil core. The foil must be visible from both sides. The layers shall be laminated together with the extrusion lamination process, not adhesives. No inks or printing shall extend to the edges of the tape. All printing shall be encased to avoid ink ruboff. Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall conform to the properties listed in Tables 207-25(A) and 207-25(B). Utility Marked Electric power, distribution, transmission, and municipal electric systems. Gas and oil distribution and transmission, dangerous materials, product and steam. Telephone and telegraph systems, police and fire communications, and cable television., Water systems. Sanitary and storm sewer systems, non-potable. Force mains. Reclaimed water lines. TABLE 207-25.1 (A) DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE PROPERTIES TABLE 207-25.1(8) DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE COLORS Add the following section: 207-25.2 requirements of each of the following agency/association publications. Materials Approvals. Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall meet the A. B. C. D. Department of Transportation, Materials Transportation Bureau, Office of Pipeline Safety. USAS code for pressure piping B31.8, paragraph 192.321(e). National Transportation Safety Board, Washington, DC, Special Study Prevention of Damage to Pipelines. Adopted June 7, 1974. Report NTSB-PSS-73-1. American Petroleum Institute (API). Recommended practice for marking buried liquid petroleum pipelines - APR RP 1109. General Services Administration, Washington, DC, Public Buildings Service Guide Specification for Mechanical and Electrical Equipment - PBS 4-1501, Amendment 2, Page 501-14, Paragraph 18, Subparagraph 18.1, Clause 18.1.1. - 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 165 of 414 E. Rural Electrification Authority (REA), U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC, National Electrical Safety Code for Underground Construction for remote and immediate hazards. Add the following section: 207-26 PVC PRESSURE PIPE 207-26.1 General. All PVC potable water piping for Vallecitos Water District potable water and gravity sewer mains shall be in accordance with AWWA C900, AWWA C905, and these specifications and shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water. and Sewer Facilities. latest edition. 207-26.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Water Pipe. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Potable Water Pipe (less than 12-inch in diameter) for Bid Schedule C shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Material List, latest edition, and to AWWA C900 and C905. 207-26.3 Joints. PVC pressure pipe shall be integral bell and spigot joints with elastomeric gaskets in accordance with AWWA C900 Section 4.3 (Pipe Requirements). The pipe shall conform to the outside diameter of cast-iron pipe unless otherwise specified and shall conform to the wall thickness of DR series 14, 18, or 25. 207-26.4 Testing of PVC Pressure Pipe. All testing of PVC pipe and its material shall be in accordance with District Standards and AWA C900. Add the following section: 207-27 AWA C905 PVC PRESSURE PIPE 207-27.1 General. Material used to produce the pipe shall be made from Class 12454-A or B rigid polyvinyl chloride compounds in accordance with AWWA C905 Section 2.1 (Basic Materials), with an established hydrostatic design basis (HDB) equal to or greater than 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F (23°C). Elastomeric gaskets shall comply with the requirements of AWWA C905 Sections 2.1.3 (Elastomeric Gaskets) and 2.1.4 (Gaskets and Lubricants). 207-27.2 Pipe. PVC water transmission pipe, 14-inch through 48-inch, shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C905, and shall be of the sizes and dimension ratios (DR) shown on the Plans. If a pressure class is called for on the Plans, it shall mean the pressure rating (PR) as defined in AWWA C905. The pipe shall have integral bell and spigot joints with elastomeric gaskets in accordance with AWWA C905 Section 3 (Pipe Requirements). The pipe shall conform to the outside diameter of cast-iron pipe unless othewise specified and shall conform to the wall thickness of DR series 18 or 25. The pipe shall be manufactured by J.M. Manufacturing Company, Certainteed Corporation, Pacific Western Extruded Plastics Company, IPEX or approved equal. 207-27.3 Fittings. All fittings for PVC water transmission pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI A21.10, AWWA CllO or C153. All fittings shall be made of ductile iron and the letters "DI" or "DUCTILE" shall be cast on them, unless othewise specified. Bell size shall be for Class 165 and Class 235 cast-iron equivalent PVC water transmission pipe, including the rubber-ring retaining groove. 207-27.4 Service Saddles Service saddles for AWWA C905 PVC water transmission pipe shall not be allowed. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 166 of 414 Add the following section: 207-28 APPURTENANCES FOR PRESSURE PIPE 207-28.1 General. This section pertains to all appurtenances required for the installation, operation and maintenance of buried pressure pipe systems. 207-28.2 Valves for Recycled Water and Potable Water Mains. All valves for Carlsbad Municipal Water District recycled water mains in Bid Schedule D shall conform in all respects to Part It, Public Water System Supplemental Standard Specifications, Materials, Section C of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District Reclamation Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, latest edition. All valves for Vallecitos Water District recycled water mains and potable water mains in Bid Schedules C and D shall conform in all respects to Vallecitos Water District Standard Specifications for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials List, latest edition. Resilient seated gate valves, 4 inches through 18 inches, shall be resilient seated, non-rising stem and conform to AWWA (2509, except as modified herein. Provide valves with resilient wedge disc, unobstructed waterway, counter-clockwise opening and designed for a working pressure of 250 psi. Butterfly valves shall have worm gear operators. Construct valves of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 395 or A 536. Bronze for internal working parts, including stems, shall not contain more than 2% aluminum nor more than 7% zinc, bronze shall be ASTM B 62 (85-5-5-5) bronze, except that stem bronze shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi, and a minimum of 10% elongation in %inches. Provide O-ring seals. Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless steel body bolts conforming to ASTM F 593. Provide 2-inch AWWA operating nut for buried installations. Provide handwheel for aboveground or in vault installations. Gate valves shall be American Flow Control Series 2500, U.S. Pipe Metroseal 250, or approved equal. 207-28.3 Combination Air Valves. Air release and vacuum relief valves shall be of the combination type. The combination unit shall serve the function of allowing air to enter or exit the pipe to alleviate excess air or vacuum conditions in the pipe. The tap for the valve shall be made in a level section of pipe no closer the ?&inches to a bell, coupling, joint, or fitting. No tap shall be permitted in any machined section of A.C.P. The Buna-N seat must be fastened to the valve cover, without distortion, for drip-tight shutoff. The floats shall be heavy stainless steel, hermetically sealed; designed to withstand 1,000 psi. The top plug or float shall be center guided through hex bushings for positive shutoff. All materials of construction shall be in writing to conform to ASTM Specifications as follows: Bodv & Cover Cast Iron Float Stainless Steel ASTM A240 Needle & Seat Buna-N Plug Bronze ASTM 8124 Leverage Frame Delrin/Cast Iron ASTM D2133/ASTM AI 26 GR.B ASTM A126 GR.B Combination air valves shall be APCO Models 143C, 145C, 147C, 149C, 150C, 151C, or approved equal. 207-28.4 Cathodic Protection and Joint Bonding for Recycled and Potable Water Mains. All cathodic protection and joint bonding for Vallecitos Water District and CMWD recycled and potable water mains in Schedule C and D shall conform in all respects to the cathodic protection notes and details referenced on the Plans, the Standard Specifications for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities, latest edition, and these special provisions. . 207-28.5 Gaskets, Nuts, and Bolts. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full-face, cut from 1/16-inch-thick rubber with cloth insert, bolt holes pre-punched, conforming to the requirements of ANSI 616.21 and shall be as manufactured by Crane Co. or approved equal. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 167 of 414 Bolts and studs for above ground installations shall be cadmium plated and shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade B, "Steel Machine Bolts and Nuts and Tap Holes," when a ring gasket is used and shall conform to either ASTM A261, "Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Bolting Material" or ASTM A1 93, "Alloy-Steel Bolting Material for High Temperature Service," when a full-face gasket is used. Bolts and nuts shall be heavy hexagon series. Nuts shall conform to ASTM Al94, "Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service" either in Grade 1,2 or 2H. The fit shall be ANSI B1.l, "Unified Screw Threads," Class 2, except that Class 3 fit shall be used in holes tapped for studs. Threads may be made by either cutting or cold forming. Between 1/4-inch and 3/8-inch shall project through the nut when drawn tight. Washers shall be provided for each nut and shall be the same material as each nut. Bolts, nuts and washers for underground installations shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All buried bolts shall be completely coated with KOP-COAT Bitumastic No. 50, or appropriate equal, which must be applied in two coats to a minimum thickness of 15-mils per coat. All bolt threads shall be lubricated with graphite and oil. Flanged faces shall be wire brushed and cleaned prior to joining each flange. 207-28.6 Blow-Off Assemblies for Water Mains. All blow-off assemblies shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District's Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials List, latest edition. 207-28.7 Combination Air Valve Assemblies for Water Mains. All combination air valve assemblies shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District's Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials List, latest edition. 207-28.8 Water Sample Point Assemblies for Water Mains. All water sample point assemblies shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District's Standard Specification for Construction of Water and Sewer Facilities and Approved Materials List, latest edition. 207-28.9 Metering Facility. The materials for the recycled water metering facility shall be as indicated on the plans and shall conform in all respects to Carisbad Municipal Water District Reclamation Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, latest edition. 207-28.9.1 Magnetic Flow Meter. The flanged magnetic flow meter for the metering facility shall be microprocessor-based and shall indicate the totalized flow and instantaneous flow through the piping. The meter shall have a turndown ratio of not less than 30:l. A certified calibration from a flow laboratory should be performed. The electronics shall be remotely mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure box with 318" characters, 2-line 16-digit backlit display and 50 feet of cable. The flow meter shall incorporate programmable features allowing menu selection and changes to be made from outside the housing via wall-effect sensors. The meter and related equipment shall also have the following features: Electrodes - Stainless Steel Liner - Tefzel Available Outputs - 4-2OmA into 800 ohms Under Outputs Still 0-1 000 HZ frequency for 0-1 00% flow rate two flow alarms fault with open collector RS232 communication flow direction with open collector Power Consumption - Less than 20 watts Sensor Tube - Stainless Steel Flange Rating - 150 Ib. Power Supply - 77-265 VAC Power . The magnetic flow meter shall be as indicated on the plans for the metering facility. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 168 of 414 207-28.9.2 Vault Access Hatch. The double leaf access hatch for the metering facility shall be furnished in accordance with the dimensions shown on the plans, unless modified by the shop drawings for the pre-cast concrete vault. The hatch shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. The cover shall be reinforced to provide an H- 20 wheel load with a maximum deflection of Moth of the span and shall be made of aluminum. The channel frame shall be 1/4" extruded aluminum with bend down anchor tabs around the perimeter. A continuous EPDM gasket shall be mechanically attached to the aluminum frame to create a barrier around the entire perimeter of the cover. A drain coupling shall be provided in the channel frame. The hinges shall be specifically designed for horizontal installation and shall be through bolted to the cover with temper proof Type 316 stainless steel bolts and locknuts. The required number and size of compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide easy and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and to act as a check in retarding downward motion of the cover when closing shall be provided by the manufacturer. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube will interlock with a flanged support shoe fastened to a formed 114" gusset support plate. A removable exterior turnnift handle with a spring loaded ball detent shall be provided to open cover and the latch release shall be protected by a flush, gasketed, removable screw plug. The cover shall be equipped with a hold open arm, which automatically locks the cover in the open position. A Type 316 stainless steel snap lock with a fixed handle shall be mounted on the underside of the cover. Hardware shall be anti-corrosion throughout. Factory finish shall be mill finish aluminum. Access hatch shall be supplied with a minimum 10-year warranty. The access hatch shall be type H-20 Bib Type JD or equal. 208-28.10 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Casing. 208-28.10.1 Casing End Seals. Casing end seals shall conform to Advance Products & Systems (APS) Inc. Model AM Pull-On casing or approved equal consisting of 1/8" thick neoprene rubber and W" wide T304 stainless steel bandings with 100% nonmagnetic worm gear mechanism. The APS Model AM casing end seal or approved equal shall have vulcanized edges and be able to be pulled on at the time of construction. All casing end seals shall be made of 60 durometer synthetic rubber and have the following properties: Phvsical ProDerties Temperature Limits Color Finish Durometer Average Tensile Average Elongation Specific Gravity Polymer Content -2OF to +212F Black Smooth 60 +/- 5 100 PSI 350% 1.5 20% 208-28.10.2 Insulators. Casing Insulators shall conform to the Advance Products & Systems (APS) Inc. Model PE Polyethylene Casing, or approved equal, and shall be manufactured from injection molded polyethylene. Spacing for polyethylene insulators shall be four feet from center to center. %" through 12" Polyethylene Insulators shall be constructed in two halves while 14" and above shall be constructed in multi-segmented units. Riser extensions shall be formed through a fusion process and HDPE material shall be added to each runner. All Polyethylene Casing Insulators shall have the following physical properties: Phvsical ProDerties 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 169 of 414 Dielectric Strength (ASTM D-149) Flexural Strength (ASTM D-790) Compressive Strength (ASTM D-693) Tensile Strength (ASTM D-638, D-651) Impact Strength (ASTM D-256) Maximum Operating Temperature 400-500 Volts/mil 1000 psi 3200 psi 3100-35- psi 2.0 ft. Iblin. of notch 225F, (1 07C) Water Absorption (ASTM 0-570) <0.01% Add the following section: 207-29 CORROSION PROTECTION OF BURRIED METALLIC PIPELINES 207-29 GENERAL. 207-29.1 Scope Of Work. Furnish all labor, materials, tools equipment, and incidentals to install sacrificial anode cathodic protection and corrosion monitoring facilities on the Vallecitos Water District (WVD) domestic water and reclaimed water lines and CMWD recycled water lines. Steel pipelines are tape wrapped and mortar overcoated and cathodically protected with sacrificial anodes. Ductile iron pipes are bonded, polyethylene encased and provided with test stations but are not cathodically protected. Facilities shall include: insulating flange kits, sacrificial anodes, corrosion monitoring test stations, continuity bonding and attendant wiring. The work also includes the inspection and testing of all corrosion control facilities as well as insulator and continuity testing. 207-29.2 Reference Standards. - A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designations only. ANSI 816.21-92 ASTM C94-81 ASTM D1248-89 ASTM 02220-80 AWWA C217-90 NACE RPOI 69-96 NACE RP0286-97 NEMA LI-1-1983 CCB (MIL-C-18480B) UL 83-80 UL 486-76 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges Ready-Mix Concrete Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials Polyvinylchloride Insulation for Wire and Cable, 750 Operation Cold-Applied Petrolatum Tape and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Buried Steel Water Pipelines Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines Industrial Laminate Thermosetting Products Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent, Coal Tar Base Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors 207-29.3 Definitions. A. Contractor: The fully licensed pipeline installation contractor selected to do the Work. B. PIPELINE OWNER or DISTRICT: The Vallecitos Water District (WVD), or the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, (CMWD). C. Inspector: The WVD inspector assigned to inspect and approve the Work. D. Engineer: The construction manager assigned to the project. E. Corrosion Engineer: DeC Consultants, Inc., 16466 Bemardo Center Drive, Suite B-275, San Diego, CA 92127, (858) 592-0226. The contact person is Mr. Robert Perks. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 170 of 414 207-29.4 Submittals: The following information shall be submitted for approval of the Engineer in accordance with the General Requirements of these specifications. A. A statement by the Contractor that all materials submitted for installation on this project are in compliance with the contract documents. B. Catalog Cuts (5 copies): 1) Polyethylene film, sheet and tube form 2) Pre-packaged high potential magnesium anodes 3) Atgrade test boxes 4) Shunts 5) Brass split-bolts 6) Brass wire tags 7) Wire and cable 8) Insulating flange kits 9) Wax tape wrap 10) Weld caps 11) Weld coating 12) Warning tape C. As-built Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain as-built drawings showing the exact locations of all anodes, insulators, corrosion monitoring test stations, and wire trenching runs. Location changes from the design shall be legibly indicated in red on a blue line copy of the design drawings. These drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer before the work is considered complete. D. Qualifications: All work shall be performed by qualified, experienced personnel working under continuous, competent supervision. The selected Contractor or designated cathodic protection subcontractor must provide documentation to verify at least five years of experience with pipeline cathodic protection installations. E. Test Results: The Contractor is not responsible for submitting test results but must work in conjunction with the Inspector and\or Corrosion Engineer to correct any deficient workmanship or missing or damaged installations. The Contractor is not responsible for cathodic protection system performance beyond proper materials and installation, but is responsible for an installation that meets the criteria described in this specification. 207-29.5 Polyethylene Encasement. A. All ductile iron pipe shall be fully encased in &mil (0.008 inches) polyethylene sheet material in accordance with AWWA C105 method B and as shown in the drawings. The polyethylene encasement shall be installed in a near perfect condition without pinholes or tears and shall be fully protected from damage during backfilling. B. All pipe sections shall be fully inspected by the Vallecitos Water District's Inspector after installation of the polyethylene sheet and just before the pipe is backfilled. Additionally, the pipe backfill operation for all DIP sections shall be observed by the WVD Inspector. C. All damage to the polyethylene sheet material, as identified by the WVD Inspector or otherwise, shall be fully repaired in a manner agreeable to the Inspector. If necessary, the pipe lay operation shall be stopped and the backfill re-excavated at the discretion of the WVD Inspector in order to repair polyethylene damage. 207-29.6 Pipeline Continuity. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 171 of 414 A. All steel pipe has welded joint. All DIP joints and all in-line mechanical joints (DIP and steel pipe) i.e., flanges, valves, couplings and adaptors, with the exception of insulating joints, shall be bonded for full metallic continuity. See Paragraph 306-1 8.3 of this specification section for continuity criteria. 207-29.7 Carrier-Pipe Zone Backfill. A. Pipe zone backfill (padding and shading) shall have the following particle size distribution: Particle Size 1 /4-inch No. 4 No. 30 No. 100 No. 200 Percent Passing by Weight 100 75 - 100 12- 50 5- 20 0- 15 B. Samples of imported carrier-pipe subgrade backfill materials shall be submitted to the district for testing before placement. These samples will be tested for soil resistivity. Saturated soil resistivities of 3,000 ohm-cm or less will be cause for rejection. See WD Standard Drawing W-17. 207-29.8 Testing and Inspection Notification A. Polyethylene Encasement: Continuous inspection of the polyethylene encasement and DIP pipeline bacMilling operations for all DIP by a WD Inspector is required. It is the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Inspector of work progress and to coordinate the work with the Inspector's availability. B. Insulators: The Contractor shall notify the Inspector at least 3 days in advance of the installation of insulating flange kits. Insulating flange kits 16-inches or greater shall be installed in a pipe spool above grade and inspected before the spool is installed in the ditch. All insulators must be reinspected and approved after assembly in the ditch and before backfilling. C. Anodes: The Contractor shall make arrangements for the Inspector and the Corrosion Engineer to witness and inspect the first anode bed installation. D. Pipeline Continuity: The Contractor shall notify the Corrosion Engineer when the pipelines are fully installed and all of the test leads are installed and accessible for continuity testing. The test stations do not have to be fully installed for continuity testing. It is desirable to test pipeline continuity well before road paving operations are scheduled. E. Cathodic Protection System: The Contractor shall notify the Corrosion Engineer when all insulators, anodes and test stations are fully installed for cathodic protection system activation and testing. Add the following section: PIPELINES 207-30 MATERIALS FOR CORROSION PROTECTION OF BURRIED METALLIC 207-30.1 Materials. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 172 of 414 Materials and equipment furnished under this section of the specifications shall be new and of the highest quality, the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products, and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with specification requirements. All materials and equipment shall bear evidence of U.L. approval when U.L. standards exist. 207-30.2 Polyethylene Film. A. Material: Polyethylene film shall be in tubular form, 8 mils (0.008 inch) thick and conform to ASTM D1248. 207-30.3 Pre-Packaged Magnesium Anodes. A. 8. C. D. E. F. Capacity: High potential magnesium anodes shall have a theoretical energy content of 1000 ampere-hours per pound and have a minimum useful output of 500 ampere-hours per pound. Chemical Composition (High Potential Magnesium): Aluminum Manganese Zinc Copper Nickel Iron Silicon Other Magnesium 0.01 percent (max) 0.5 to 1.3 percent 0.002 percent (max) 0.02 percent (max) 0.001 percent (max) 0.03 percent (max) 0.05 percent (max) 0.05 percent each (max) and 0.3 percent total (max) Balance Open Circuit Potential: The open circuit potential of all anodes, buried in the soil, shall be between 1.55 and 1.65 volts DC versus a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. Ingot Size and Weight: Anodes shall be 48-pound bare magnesium ingots with a trapezoidal cross section. Ingot size shall be approximately 32 inches long. Anode Construction: Anodes shall be cast magnesium with a galvanized steel core rod. Recess one end of the anode to provide access to the rod for connection of the lead wire. Silver braze the lead wire to the rod and make the connection mechanically secure before brazing. Insulate the connection to a 600-volt rating by filling the recess with epoxy and covering any exposed bare steel core or wire with heat shrinkable tubing. The insulating tubing shall extend over the lead wire insulation by not less than one-half inch. Anode Pre-Packaged Backfill Material: The anodes shall be completely encased and centered within a permeable cloth bag in a special low resistivity backfill mix with' the following composition: Gypsum 75% Powdered Bentonite 20% Anhydrous Sodium Sulfate 5% Backfill grains shall be such that 100 percent is capable of passing through a screen of No. 100 mesh. Backfill shall be firmly packed around the anode such that the ingot is approximately in the center of the backfill and surrounded by at least two inches of backfill material. The resistivity of the backfill shall be no greater than 50 ohm-cm when tested wet in a soil box with no extraordinary means of compaction. The total prepackaged weight shall be approximately 105 pounds. Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 173 of 414 207-30.4 At-Grade Test Stations. A. Test Box: At-grade test boxes shall be round, precast concrete with dimensions of 14-1/4 inches O.D. by 9 inches I.D. by 12 inches high, similar to Christy G5 Utility Box with a cast iron supporting ring and lid, and shall have sufficient strength to support occasional vehicular traffic. The lid shall be cast with the legend "CP Test" using letters not less than 1-1/2 inches high. B. Shunts: Anode test boxes shall have 0.01 ohm shunts rated at 6 amperes, Holloway Type RS or equal, and accurate to plus or minus one percent. C. Terminal Lugs: All copper or brass per UL 486. D. Brass Identification Tags: All test leads shall be identified in each test box with an 18 ga., 1- 1/2-inch diameter brass tags with a 3/16-inch diameter offset hole. All tags shall be die- stamped with the pipe size, material and service in %-inch high characters as indicated in the drawings. The tags shall be securely attached to the test leads with un-insulated No. 14 copper wire. E. Concrete Pad: Test boxes mounted in un-paved areas shall be mounted in a 26-inches square by 4-inches thick, reinforced concrete pad constructed of ASTM C94 Ready-Mix concrete. 207-30.5 Wire and Cable. A. Wire and Cable: All wire shall be single conductor, stranded copper of the gauge indicated. Wire sizes shall be based on American Wire Gauge (AWG). Copper wire shall be in conformance with U.L. Standard 83 and shall be suitable for direct burial in corrosive soil and water. Wire with high molecular weight polyethylene (HMWPE) insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1248 Type 1, Class C, Grade 5. Wire with THWN insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2220. 1) lest Wires. Wire sizes shall be as shown in the Drawings. All pipe test leads shall have 2) Anode Lead Wires. All anodes shall have No. 12 AWG wire with white THWN insulation. 3) Bond Wires. Bond wires at mechanical joints, i.e., valves, flanges and couplings and at ductile iron pipe joints shall be No. 4 or 6 AWG as shown in the drawings with black HMWPE insulation. black HMWPE insulation. 207-30.6 Insulating Flange Kit. A. Standard: NACE RP0286 "Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines". B. Gasket. ANSI B-16.21, Type "E" full-faced, laminated glass NEMA LI-1 G-10 material with rectangular nitrile or Viton O-ring seal. Gaskets shall be suitable for the temperature and pressure rating of the piping system in which they are installed. C. Insulating Sleeves. 1/32-inch thick tube, full length, laminated glass material as per NEMA LI-1 GI 0. For installation at threaded valve flanges, the sleeves shall be half-length. D. Insulating Washers. 1/8-inch thick laminated glass material as per NEMA LI-I G10. E. Steel Washers. 1/8-inch thick cadmium plated steel to be placed between the nut and the insulating washer. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 174 of 414 207-30.7 Wax Tape Wrap. Anode test boxes shall have 0.01 ohm shunts rated at 6 amperes, Holloway Type RS or equal, and accurate to plus or minus one percent. A. Primer: Prime coat with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, inert fillers, and corrosion inhibitor having a paste-like consistency. B. Tape Wrap: Wrap primed surfaces with a synthetic felt tape saturated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is easily formable over irregular surfaces. A compatible petrolatum filler should be used to smooth over irregular surfaces. C. Outer Covering: The primed and wax-tape wrapped fitting shall be wrapped with a plastic tape covering consisting of 1.5 mil layers of polyvinylidene chloride or metallocene resin material. The tape shall have high dielectric strength, be stretchable and be able to conform well to irregular shapes. The outer covering shall be Trenton Poly-Ply, Denso Poly-wrap or equivalent. 207-30.8 Alumino-Thermic Weld Kits. A. Weld Kits: Cable-to-metal connections shall be made by the alumino-thermic welding process. Weld kits shall include graphite mold, weld charges and accessories. The charge size and alloy and the mold size shall be as specified by the manufacturer of the weld kit based on the type of pipe material (steel or ductile iron) and the size to be attached. 6. Weld Caps: Alumino-thermic welds shall be sealed with a pre-fabricated plastic cap filled with formable mastic compound on a base of elastomeric tape. Weld caps shall be Royston Handy Cap 2 or equivalent. Prime coat the surface before application of the weld cap with a material specially designed for this purpose such as Royston Roybond Primer. 207-30.9 Warning Tape. A. Description: Plastic warning tape for buried test or anode leads in cable trenches shall be a minimum of four (4) mils thick and six-inches (6") wide, inert plastic film designed for prolonged use underground. The tape shall have the words, "CAUTION: Cathodic Protection Cable Below" or similar, clearly visible in repeating patterns along its entire length. SECTION 208 - PIPE JOINT TYPES AND MATERIALS Add the following section: GASKETS FOR PRESSURE PIPE 208-7 BENDS, TEES, ADAPTERS, SADDLES, RESTRAINED JOINTS, AND FLANGE 208.7.1 General. All bends, tees, adapters, saddles, and flange gaskets for Carlsbad Municipal Water District recycled water mains in Bid Schedule D shall conform in all respects to Part II of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District Reclamation Rules and Regulations for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains, latest edition. Adapters for transitioning pipe materials shall conform to Section 207-30 Materials for Corrosion Protection of Buried Metallic Pipelines. - All bends, tees, adapters and flange gaskets for Vallecitos Water District recycled and potable water mains in Bid Schedule C and D shall conform in all respects to the Vallecitos Water District Standard Specification for Construction of Reclaimed Water Mains and Approved Materials List, latest edition. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 175 of 414 Adapters for transitioning pipe materials shall conform to Section 207-30 Materials for Corrosion Protection of Buried Metallic Pipelines. 208-7.2 Flexible Couplings. Joints for which flexible couplings are required, shall be made with Baker, Smith-Blair, or approved equal recycled water pipe, flexible couplings. Gaskets shall be plain rubber gaskets. Threads on bolts or compression collars shall be stainless steel, Type 316 and shall be lubricated with suitable thread lubricant before assembling the coupling. For cast-iron, ductile-iron or asbestos cement pipe sizes 2-inches through 16-inchesI use Baker Series 228, Smith-Blair Series 413, or approved equal. Transition couplings shall be Baker Series 212, Smith-Blair Series 41 3, or approved equal. Flanged coupling adapters for cast iron or ductile iron pipe sizes 3-inches through 12-inches shall be Baker Series 601, Smith-Blair Series 91 2, or approved equal. 208-7.3 Restrained Joints. When joint restraint for a 4-inch through 64-inch push-on joint pipe installation is required and indicated in the project plans or specifications, restrained push-on joint pipe and fittings utilizing Ductile Iron components shall be provided. Restrained joint pipe shall be Ductile Iron manufactured in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWA C151/A21.51. Push-on joints for such pipe shall be in accordance with ANSIIAWWA C111/A21.11 "Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-lron Pressure Pipe." Pipe thickness shall be as stated in the project plans and specifications. Restrained joint fittings and the restraining components shall be Ductile Iron in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSVAWA C11O/A21 .IO and/or C153/A21.53 with the exception of the manufacturer's proprietary design dimensions. Push-on joints for such fittings shall be in accordance with ANSVAWWA C111/A21.11. Restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be U.S. Pipe's TR FLEX Pipe and Fittings or approved equal. Restraint of field cut pipe shall be provided with U.S. Pipe's TR FLEX GRIPPER Ring, TR FLEX Pipe field weldments or approved equal. Fittings with fusion bonded coatings shall be supplied in accordance with ANSVAWA C116/A21.16, Protective Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile-Iron and Gray- Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service. Cement mortar lining and seal coating for pipe and fittings, where applicable, shall be in accordance with ANSVAWWA C104/A21.4. Asphaltic outside coating shall be in accordance with ANSVAWWA C151/A21.51 for pipe and ANSVAWWA C110/A21.10 or ANSVAWA C153/A21.53 for fittings. SECTION 209 - ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 209 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. Modify as follows: Section 209, "Signals, Lighting and Traffic Electrical Systems", herein, shall replace Section 209, "Electrical Components", of the SSPWC in all matters pertaining to the specifications for measurement, payment, warranty, and materials and methods of construction for all elements of street lighting and traffic signals. For electrical components provided and installed in systems not including street lighting and traffic signals section 209 SSPWC is unmodified except as specified in sections other than section 209, "Signals, Lighting and Electrical Systems", herein. For section 209, "Signals, Lighting and Electrical Systems", for all elements of street lighting and 'traffic signals both construction materials and construction methods have been combined into a single section. . e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 176 of 414 SECTION 209 - SIGNALS, LIGHTING AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 209-1 GENERAL 209-1.01 Description. Signals, lighting and electrical systems work shall consist of furnishing and installing, modifying or removing one or more traffic signals, traffic signal master controller assemblies and interconnection facilities, ramp metering systems, flashing beacon systems, lighting systems, sign illumination systems, traffic monitoring stations, communication systems, electrical equipment in structures, falsework lighting, provisions for future systems, or combinations thereof, all as shown on the plans, and as specified in these specifications and the special provisions. The locations of signals, beacons, standards, lighting fixtures, signs, controls, services and appurtenances shown on the plans are approximate and the exact locations will be established by the Engineer in the field. All systems shall be complete and in operating condition at the time of acceptance of the contract. 209-1.015 Definitions. Electrical Systems.” Actuation.- The operation of any type of detector. Burn-In Procedure. - The procedure by which each LED signal module is energized for a minimum of 24 hours at operating voltage at a 100% duty cycle, and in an ambient temperature of 6OoC (14OOF). Candlepower Values. - Luminous intensity expressed in candelas (cd). Channel.- A discrete information path. Chromaticity (Color). - The color of the light emitted by a signal module, specified as x-y chromaticity coordinates on the chromaticity diagram according to the 1931 Commission lnternationale d’Eclairage standard observer and coordinate system. The measured chromaticity coordinates shall fall within the limits specified in VTCSH Section 8.04 “Limits of Chromaticity Coordinates.” Controller Assembly.- The complete assembly for controlling the operation of a traffic signal or other system, consisting of a controller unit, and all auxiliary equipment housed in a rainproof cabinet. Controller Unit.-That part of the controller assembly which performs the basic timing and logic functions. Detector.- A device for indicating the passage or presence of vehicles or pedestrians. Duty Cycle. - The amount of illuminated on-time a signal module is energized, expressed as a percent of signal cycle time period. Electro1ier.- The complete assembly of lighting standard, luminaire, ballast and lamp. Flasher.- A device used to open and close signal circuits at a repetitive rate. Flashing Beacon Control Assembly.- A complete electrical mechanism for operating a warning beacon or intersection control beacon. Inductive Loop Vehicle Detector.- A detector capable of being actuated by the change of inductance caused by a vehicle passing over or standing over the loop. Integrating Photometer. - An instrument used in measuring the intensity of light that enables total luminous flux to be determined by a single measurement. LED Light Source. - An individual light emitting diode. LED Signal Module. - A sealed circular ball or arrow that includes the lens and utilizes LED devices as the light source. An LED signal module may directly replace an existing traffic signal lamp and lens combination. Lighting Standard.- The pole and mast ann which support the luminaire. Luminaire.- The assembly which houses the light source and controls the light emitted from the light Magnetic Vehicle Detector.- A detector capable of being actuated by the induced voltage caused by the passage of a vehicle through the earth’s magnetic field. Magnetometer Vehicle Detector.- A detector capable of being actuated by the magnetic disturbance caused by the passage or presence of a vehicle. The following definitions pertain only to Section 209, “Signals, Lighting and source. Contract No. 3907 Page 177 of 414 Major Street.-The roadway approach or approaches at an intersection normally carrying the major volume of vehicular traffic. Minimum Intensity. - In accordance with the values in Table 1 of the existing "Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads", hereinafter VTCSH standard, the minimum intensity values below which no LED signal modules will be released from the supplier. Minor Street.-The roadway approach or approaches at an intersection normally carrying the minor volume of vehicular traffic. Pedestrian Detector.- A detector, usually of the push button type, capable of being operated by hand. Plans. - For this Section (Section 209) plans shall include all documents listed in Section 2.5, "Plans and Specifications", et seq. as well as the "STANDARD PLANS", 2002 edition as promulgated by the State of California, Department of Transportation. Power Consumption. - The rms electrical power (watts) consumed by an LED signal module when operated at rated voltage. Pre-timed Controller Assembly.- A controller assembly for operating traffic signals in accordance with a pre-determined cycle length. Rated Initial Intensity. - The light intensity of a new LED signal module, operated at rated voltage, measured after the bum-in procedure with an integrating photometer. Rated Voltage. - The ac rms voltage at which light output performance and power consumption are specified (1 17 VAC at 60 Hz). Signal Face.-That part of a signal head provided for controlling traffic in a single direction and consisting of one or more signal sections. Signal Head.- An assembly containing one or more signal faces. Signal Indication.- The illumination of a signal section or other device, or of a combination of sections or other devices at the same time. Signal Section.- A complete unit for providing a signal indication consisting of a housing, lens, reflector, lamp receptacle and lamp. Sun Phantom. - The effect of an outside light source entering the signal assembly and being returned in such a manner as to present the appearance of the signal assembly being illuminated. Traffic-Actuated Controller Assembly.- A controller assembly for operating traffic signals in accordance with the varying demands of traffic as registered with the controller unit by detectors. Traffic Phase.-The right of way, change and clearance intervals assigned to a traffic movement or combination of movements. Vehicle.- Any motor vehicle normally licensed for highway use. VTCSH Standard. - The definitions and practices described in "Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads" published in the "Equipment and Materials Standards" of the Institute of Transportation Engineers. 209-1.02 Regulations and Code. All electrical equipment shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL), the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL), the National Electrical Testing Association, Inc. (NETA), or the Electronic Industries Association (EIA), wherever applicable. In addition to the requirements of the plans, these specifications, and the special provisions, all materials and workmanship shall conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code 1996 edition, hereinafter referred to as the Code; California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 5, Electrical Safety Orders; Rules for Overhead Electrical Line Construction, General Order No. 95 of the Public Utilities Commission; Standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); American National Standards Institute (ANSI); and any local ordinances which may apply. Wherever reference is made to any of the standards mentioned above, the reference shall be construed to mean the code, order, or standard that is in effect on the day the Notice to Contractors for the work is dated. 209-1.03 Equipment List and Drawings. Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, within 15 days following award approval of the contract, submit to the Engineer for review a list of equipment and materials which the Contractor proposes to install as specified in Section 2-5.3, "Shop Drawings and Submittals." The list shall be complete as to name of manufacturer, size and identifying number of each item. The list shall be supplemented by such other data as may be required, including schematic wiring diagrams and scale drawings of cabinets showing location and spacing of 7/31 102 Contract No. 3907 Page 178 of 414 shelves, terminal blocks and equipment, including dimensioning. All of the above data shall be submitted, install as specified in Section 2-5.3, "Shop Drawings and Submittals", for review. Where electrical equipment is constructed as detailed on the plans, the submission of detailed drawings and diagrams will not be required. The Contractor shall furnish 5 sets of controller cabinet schematic wiring diagrams made by (1) wet blueprint, white background process using iron-sensitized paper, (2) the offset lithograph process, or (3) the electrostatic process. The diagrams shall show the location of the installation and shall list all equipment installed in each controller cabinet. In addition, for each signal installation, the Contractor shall furnish an intersection sketch showing poles, detectors, field wire connection terminals and phasing as shown on the plans. All schematic wiring diagrams of the controller units and auxiliary equipment, all cabinet diagrams, and all operation manuals shall be submitted at the time the controller assemblies are delivered for testing. The schematic wiring diagram shall show in detail all circuits and parts. All parts shown thereon shall be identified by name or number and in such manner as to be readily interpreted. All diagrams, plans and drawings shall be prepared using graphic symbols shown in ANSI publication Y32.2, entitled "IEEE Standard and American National Standard Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Elec- tronic Diagrams." 209-1.04 Warranties, Guaranties and Instruction Sheets. Manufacturers' warranties and guaranties furnished for materials used in the work and instruction sheets and parts lists supplied with materials shall be delivered to the Engineer prior to acceptance of the project. 209-1.05 Maintaining Existing and Temporary Electrical Systems. Existing electrical systems (traffic signal, street lighting, flashing beacon, traffic monitoring, sign illumination and other facilities), or approved temporary replacements thereof, shall be kept in effective operation for the benefit of the traveling public during the progress of the work, except when shutdown is permitted, to allow for alterations or final removal of the systems. The traffic signal shutdowns shall be limited to normal working hours. Lighting system shutdowns shall not interfere with the regular lighting schedule, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to performing any work on existing systems. The Contractor shall notify the local traffic enforcement agency prior to any operational shutdown of a traffic signal. Where an existing system or temporary system is being modified, work not shown on the plans or specified in these special provisions and which is considered by the Engineer as necessary to keep all or any part of the system in effective operation will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-3 "Extra Work.". The Agency will: 1 ) Continue the operation and maintenance of existing electrical facilities. 2) Continue to provide for electrical energy for the operation of existing electrical facilities. 3) Repair or replace existing facilities damaged by public traffic. 4) Pay the cost of electrical energy for the operation of existing or new facilities that are undergoing the functional tests described in Section 209-2.14C, "Functional Testing." The Contractor shall ascertain the exact location and depth of existing detectors, conduits, pull boxes and other electrical facilities before using any tools or equipment that may damage those facilities or interfere with any electrical system. Where damage is caused by the Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, repair or replace damaged facilities promptly in accordance with these specifications. If any existing loop conductor, including the portion leading to the detector hand hole or termination pull box, is damaged by the Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer. The affected detectors shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense and as directed by the Engineer within 24 hours. If the Contractor fails to complete the repairs within this period, the repairs will be made by Agency forces at the Contractor's expense. Should the Contractor fail to perform the required repairs or replacements, the cost of performing the repairs or replacements will be deducted from any moneys due or to become due the Contractor. - Where roadways are to remain open to traffic and existing lighting systems are to be modified, the lighting systems shall remain in operation and the final connection to the modified circuit shall be made G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 179 of 414 so that the modified circuit will be in operation by nighffill of the same day. Temporary electrical installations shall be kept in effective operation until the temporary installations are no longer required for the traveling public. Removal of temporary installations shall conform to the provisions in Section 209-7, "Removing, Reinstalling or Salvaging Electrical Equipment." These provisions will not relieve the Contractor in any manner of the Contractor's responsibilities as provided in Sections 4-1 .l , "General" and 4-1.2, "Protection of Work and Materials." During traffic signal system shutdown the Contractor shall place "STOP AHEAD" and "STOP" signs to direct vehicle and pedestrian traffic through the intersection. All signal faces shall be covered when the . system is shut down overnight. Temporary "STOP AHEAD" and "STOP" signs shall be either covered or removed when the system is tumed on. "STOP AHEAD" and "STOP" signs shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall conform to the provisions in Section 7-1 0.3, 'Street Closures, Detours, Barricades." Minimum size of "STOP signs shall be 750 mm (30"). One "STOP AHEAD" sign and one "STOP" sign shall be placed for each direction of traffic. For two, or more, lane approaches, two "STOP" signs shall be placed for each direction of traffic. Location of the signs shall be as directed by the Engineer. 209-1.06 Scheduling of Work. No above ground work, except service equipment, shall be performed until the Contractor has all materials on hand to complete that particular signal location or lighting circuit. Work shall be so scheduled that each traffic signal, lighting and sign illumination system shall be completed and ready for operation prior to opening the corresponding section of the roadway to traffic. Traffic signals shall not be placed in operation for use by public traffic without the written approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer no less than three days prior to placing any traffic signal in operation. Traffic signals shall not be placed in operation for use by public traffic without the energizing of street lighting at the intersection to be controlled if street lighting exists or is being installed in conjunction with the traffic signals. Traffic signals shall not be placed in operation until the roadways to be controlled are open to public traffic, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Lighting and traffic signals shall not be placed in operation, including flashing operation, prior to commencement of the functional test period specified in Section 209-2.14, "Testing," unless ordered othetwise by the Engineer. Conductors shall not be pulled into conduit until pull boxes are set to grade, crushed rock sumps installed, and metallic conduit bonded. In vehicular undercrossings, soffit lights shall be placed in operation as soon as practicable after falsework has been removed from the structure. Lighting for pedestrian structures shall be placed in operation prior to opening the structure to pedestrian traffic. If the Engineer orders soffit lights or lighting for pedestrian structures placed in operation before permanent power service is available, the cost of installing and removing temporary power service will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-3, "Extra Work." The initial tum-on shall be made only between the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 2:OO p.m. and Tuesday through Thursday unless specified otherwise approved, in writing, by the Engineering the special provisions. Prior to turn-on, all equipment as shown on the plans shall be installed and operable including pedestrian signals, pedestrian push buttons, vehicle detectors, lighting, signs and pavement delineation. All louvers, visors, and signal faces shall be directed to provide maximum visibility. Functional tests shall start on any working day except Friday, or the day preceding a legal holiday. 209-1.07 Safety Precautions. Attention is directed to Section 7-1 0.4.1, "Safety Orders." Before starting work on existing series street lighting circuits, the Contractor shall obtain daily a safety circuit clearance from the serving utility. By-pass switch plugs shall be pulled and "Men at Work" signs posted at switch boxes before any work is done. - 209-2 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION 209-2.01 Excavating and Backfilling. The excavations required for the installation of conduit, foundations, and other appurtenances shall be performed in such a manner as to avoid any unnecessary 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 180 of 414 damage to streets, sidewalks, landscaping, and other improvements. The trenches shall not be excavated wider than necessary for the proper installation of the electrical appurtenances and foundations. Excavation shall not be performed until immediately before installation of conduit and other appurtenances. The material from the excavation shall be placed in a position that will not cause damage or obstruction to vehicular and pedestrian traffic nor interfere with surface drainage. Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the Engineer, all surplus excavated material shall be removed and disposed of, within 48 hours, outside the public right, of way in accordance with the provisions in Sections 7-8.1, "Cleanup and Dust Control", 300-1.3, "Removal and Disposal of Materials" and 302-6, . "Surplus Material", depending on the origin and nature of the materials to be removed and disposed. The excavations shall be backfilled in conformance with the provisions in Sections 300-3.5, "Structure Backfill" or 306-1.3, "Backfill and Densification," depending on the nature of the structure or conduit that the excavation being backfilled accommodates. Excavations after backfilling shall be kept well filled and maintained in a smooth and welldrained condition until permanent repairs are made. All excavations shall be filled, and sidewalks, pavement, and landscaping restored at each intersection prior to excavating at any other intersection, unless othennrise permitted by the Engineer. Excavations in the street or highway shall be performed in such a manner that not more than one traffic lane is restricted at any time, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 209-2.02 Removing and Replacing Improvements. In addition to the requirements of sections 7-9, "Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements" and 306-1 5, "Trench Resurfacing'' Improvements such as sidewalks, curbs, gutters, portland cement concrete and asphalt concrete pavement, underlying material, lawns and plants, and any other improvements removed, broken or damaged by the Contractor's operations, shall be replaced or reconstructed with the same kind of material as found on the work or with materials of equal quality. The new work shall be left in a serviceable condition. Whenever a part of a square or slab of existing concrete sidewalk, curb, gutter, or driveway is broken or damaged, the entire square, section or slab shall be removed and the concrete reconstructed as above specified. The outline of all areas to be removed in portland cement concrete sidewalks and driveways and 'in pavements shall be cut to a minimum depth of 50 mm (2") with an abrasive type saw prior to removing the sidewalk, driveways and pavement material. Cuts shall be neat and true along score lines, with no shatter outside the removal area. 209-2.03 Foundations. Portland cement materials and construction methods shall conform to Section 201, "Concrete, Mortar and Related concrete Materials," for Materials and Section 303, "Concrete and Masonry Construction," for construction methods. Concrete foundations shall rest on firm ground. Except when located on structures, foundations for posts, standards, and pedestals, not shown on the plans to have mortar pads, shall be placed "in the solid" and monolithic except for the top 50 mm (2") which shall be placed after the post, standard or pedestal is in proper position. After each post, standard, or pedestal on structures, and each standard shown on the plans to have mortar pads, is in proper position, mortar shall be placed under the base plate as shown on the plans. The exposed portions shall be formed to present a neat appearance. Mortar shall consist of one part by volume of portland cement and 3 parts of clean sand, shall contain only sufficient moisture to permit packing and shall be cured by keeping it damp for 3 days. Reinforced cast-indrilled-hole concrete pile foundations for traffic signal and lighting standards shall conform to the provisions in Section 205-3.3, "Cast-in-Place Concrete Piles," except that material resulting from drilling holes shall be disposed of as provided in Section 209-2.01, "Excavating and Backfilling." The exposed portions of the foundation shall be formed to present a neat appearance. Forms shall be true to line and grade. Tops of foundations for posts and standards, except special foundations, shall be finished to curb or sidewalk grade or as directed by the Engineer. Forms shall be Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 181 of 414 rigid and securely braced in place. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed in proper position and to proper height, and shall be held in place by means of a template until the concrete sets. Anchor bars or studs and nuts, except for Type 30 and Type 31 lighting standards, shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 307. Headed anchor bolts for foundations shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 307, Grade B with S1 supplementary requirements. At the option of the Contractor, nonheaded anchor bolts for foundations shall conform either to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 307, Grade C or to the provisions in AASHTO Designation: M 314, Grade 36 or 55 with S1 supplementary requirements. When nonheaded anchor bolts conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 307, Grade C are furnished, the end of each fabricated anchor bolt shall be either coded by end stamping as required in ASTM Designation: A 307 or the end that projects from the concrete shall be permanently coded with a green color by the manufacturer. High strength anchor bolts, bars, or studs for Type 30 and Type 31 lighting standards shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 325, A 325M or A 449 and shall comply with the mechanical requirements of ASTM Designation: A 325 or A 325M after galvanizing. Nuts and washers for high strength anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM Designations: A 563 or A 563M, and F 476 or F 476M, respectively. In addition to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 449, studs shall be marked on either end as required for bolt heads. All steel parts shall be galvanized in accordance with the provisions in Section 210-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." The upper threaded portion of all anchor bolts shall be provided with 2 nuts and 2 washers each. Anchor bars or studs shall be provided with 3 nuts and washers each. Welding shall not be performed on any portion of the body of high-strength anchor bolts, anchor bars, or studs. Plumbing of the standards shall be accomplished by adjusting the leveling nuts before placing mortar or before the foundation is finished to final grade. Shims, or other similar devices shall not be used for plumbing or raking of posts, standards or pedestals. Both forms and ground which will be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened before placing concrete. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has thoroughly set. Ordinary surface finish, as specified in Section 303-1.9.2, "Ordinary SurFace Finish," shall be applied to exposed surfaces of concrete. Where obstructions prevent the construction of a planned foundation, the Contractor shall construct an effective foundation as directed by the Engineer. The foundations shown on the plans shall be extended if conditions require additional depth, and the additional work, if ordered by the Engineer, will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-2, "Changes Initiated By The Agency." Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, foundations not to be reused shall be removed. When a foundation is shown on the plans to be abandoned, the top of foundation, anchor bolts, and conduits shall be removed to a depth of not less than 1.0 m (3') below surface of sidewalk or unimproved ground. The resulting hole shall be backfilled with material equivalent to the surrounding material. Unless othewise shown on the plans, all standards to be relocated shall be provided with new foundations and anchor bolts of the proper type and size. Posts, poles, standards, pedestals, and cabinets shall not be erected until the foundation has set at least 7 days, and shall be plumbed or raked, as directed by the Engineer. In unpaved areas, a 1.0 m (3) square, 100 mm (4") thick or of the size shown on the plans, whichever is the larger, raised pad of portland cement concrete shall be placed in front of each controller cabinet. 209-2.04 Standards, Steel Pedestals and Posts. Standards for traffic signals and lighting, and- steel pedestals for cabinets and other similar equipment shall be located as shown on the plans. Workmanship and finish shall be equal to the best general practice of metal fabrication shops. All welding shall conform to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code," and to the requirements in this Section 209-2.04. All welds joining the shafts of the standards and mast arms to their base plates shall be as shown on the plans, however, alternative weld joint details may be approved by the Engineer. Approval of alternative weld joint details will be contingent upon the proposed weld joint passing both weld procedure and nondestructive testing as deemed necessary by the Engineer. All costs of the supplemental testing shall be borne by the Contractor. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 182 of 414 All standards except Type 1, and all signal mast arms, shall have an aluminum identification plate, as noted on the plans, attached with stainless steel rivets or screws. Type 1 standards and steel pedestals for controller cabinets shall be constructed of 3 mm (.I257 or thicker galvanized steel; or 100 mm (4") standard weight galvanized, steel pipe or Size 103, Type 1 conduit, with the top designed for post-top slipfitter. Standard weight galvanized, steel pipe shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 53. Materials and construction methods for all ferrous metal parts of standards, with shaft length of 4.6 m (1 5') and longer, shall conform to the details shown on the plans, the requirements of Sections 206, 'Miscellaneous Metal Items," for Materials and Section 304, "Metals Fabrication and Construction," for construction methods except as otherwise noted, and the following requirements: Except as otherwise specified, standards shall be fabricated from sheet steel of weldable grade having a minimum yield strength, after fabrication, of 276 Mpa (40,000 psi). Certified test reports which verify conformance to the minimum yield strength requirements shall be submitted to the Engineer. The test reports may be the mill test reports for the as-received steel or, when the as- received steel has a lower yield strength than required, the Contractor shall provide supportive test data which provides assurance that the Contractor's method of cold forming will consistently increase the tensile properties of the steel to meet the specified minimum yield strength. The supportive test data shall include tensile properties of the steel both before and after cold forming for specific heats and thicknesses. When a single-ply 8 mm (0.3125") thick pole is specified, a 2-ply pole with equivalent section modulus may be substituted. Standards may be fabricated of full-length sheets or shorter sections. Each section shall be fabricated from not more than 2 pieces of sheet steel. Where 2 pieces are used, the longitudinal welded seams shall be directly opposite one another. When the sections are butt-welded together, the longitudinal welded seams on adjacent sections shall be placed to form continuous straight seams from base to top of standard. Butt-welded transverse joints shall be strengthened by inserting a metal sleeve at each joint. The sleeve shall be 3 mm (0.120') nominal thickness, or thicker, steel having the same chemical composition as the steel in the standard. When the sections to be joined have different specified minimum yield strengths, the steel in the sleeve shall have the same chemical composition as the higher minimum yield strength steel to be joined. The metal sleeve shall have a minimum length of 25 mm. The sleeve shall be centered at the joint and have the same taper as the standard with the outside of the sleeve in full contact with the inside of the standard throughout the sleeve length and circumference. All welds shall be continuous. The weld metal at the transverse joint shall extend to the sleeve, making the sleeve an integral part of the joint. Longitudinal welds in steel tubular sections will be tested in accordance with California Test 664. The sampling frequency shall be as determined by the Engineer. The welds may be made by the electric resistance welding process. All exposed welds, except fillet and fatigue resistant welds and welds on top of mast arms, shall be ground flush with the base metal. All exposed edges of the plates which make up the base assembly shall be finished smooth and all exposed comers of the plates shall be neatly rounded unless otherwise shown on the plans. Shafts shall be provided with slipfitter shaft caps. Standards shall be straight, with a permissive variation not to exceed 25 mm (1") measured at the midpoint of a 9 m (30') or 11 m (36') standard and not to exceed 20 mm (3/4") measured at the midpoint of a 5 m (17') through 6 m (20') standard. Variation shall not exceed 25 mm (1') at a point 4.5 m (15') above the base plate for Type 35 and Type 36 standards. All galvanized nuts, used on assemblies with a specified preload or toque, shall be lubricated in accordance with the requirements specified for galvanized Grade DH nuts in ASTM Designation: A 563 or A 563M. Standards with an outside diameter of 300 mm (12") or less shall be round. Standards with an outside diameter greater than 300 mm (12") shall be round or multisided. Multisided standards shall have a minimum of 10 sides which shall be convex and shall have a minimum bend radius of 100 mm (4"). Mast arms for standards, shall be fabricated from material as specified for standards and shall conform to the dimensions shown on the plans. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 183 of 414 ' The cast steel option for slip bases shall be fabricated from material conforming to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 27/A 27M, Grade 70-40. Other comparable material may be used if written permission is given by the Engineer. The casting tolerances shall be in accordance with the Steel Founder's Society of America recommendations (green sand molding). One casting from each lot of 50 castings or less shall be subject to radiographic inspection, in accordance with the provisions in ASTM Designation: E 94. The castings shall comply with the acceptance criteria severity level 3 or better for all types and categories of discontinuities as specified in ASTM Designations: E 186 and E 446. If the one casting fails to pass the inspection, 2 additional castings shall be radiographed. Both of these castings shall pass the inspection or the entire lot of 50 will be rejected. Material certifications consisting of physical and chemical properties, and radiographic films of the castings shall be filed at the manufacturer's office. These certifications and films shall be available for inspection upon request. High-strength bolts, nuts and flat washers used to connect slip base plates shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 325 or A 325M and shall be galvanized as specified in Section 210-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." Plate washers shall be fabricated by saw cutting and drilling steel plate conforming to AIS1 Designation: 1018, and be galvanized as specified in Section 210-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." Prior to galvanizing, all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed and holes shall be chamfered sufficiently on each side to allow the bolt head to make full contact with the washer without tension on the bolt. High-strength cap screws shown on the plans for attaching mast arms to standards shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 325, A 325M or ASTM Designation: A 449 and shall comply with the me- chanical requirements of ASTM Designation: A 325 or A 325M after galvanizing. The cap screws shall be galvanized as specified in Section 210-3.6, 'Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." The threads of the cap screws shall be coated with a lubricant which is clean and dry to the touch. The galvanized faying surfaces of the connections between signal or lighting mast arms and poles shall be free of surface imperfections, such as lumps, runs, and scum, which would prevent intimate, uniform contact between the faying surfaces. Handholes in the base of standards shall conform to the details shown on the plans. All handholes shall be provided with covers. Changes in configuration of mast arms will be permitted, provided the mounting height and stability are maintained. Fabricators electing to use larger than minimum arm diameters shall adjust the details as required to permit solid seating of the cap screws. All arms shall be bent to the approximate configuration shown on the plans. A smooth curvin arm is required. Pedestrian push button posts shall be constructed of 65 mm (2 /2") standard pipe conforming to the dimensions shown on the plans. Guard posts shall be constructed of 100 mm (4") nominal dimension galvanized standard pipe 1.7 m (66") long. Posts shall be set 900 mm (3') in a block of portland cement concrete, as shown on the plans, and the pipe shall be filled with portland cement concrete. Push button posts and guard posts shall be pipe conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 53. Slip bases shall be assembled and tightened when the pole is on the ground prior to erection. The threads of the heavy hex nuts for the slip base bolts shall be coated with an additional lubricant which is clean and dry to the touch. Each high strength slip base bolt shall be tightened to within 10 N m (1 0 foot-pounds), plus or minus, of values in Table 209-2.04(A): P Standard Type 15-88 30 31 36-20A TABLE 209-2.04 (A) Torque (Newton-meters) Torque Foot- Pounds 200 150 200 150 275 200 225 165 @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 184 of 414 Holes left in the shafts of existing standards, due to removal of equipment or mast arms, shall be repaired by welding in a suitable disk, grinding smooth, and painting as provided for repairing damaged galva- nized surfaces in Section 210-3.6, 'Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." When directed by the Engineer, existing standards to be relocated or reused in place shall be repaired. Large dents shall be removed, shafts shall be straightened, and portions which are in poor condition due to corrosion or damage, shall be replaced. Extent of repairs or replacements will be determined by the Engineer and the repairs or replacements ordered by the Engineer will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-2, "Changes Initiated By The Agency." Anchor bolts or bars and nuts required for relocating existing standards shall be krmished by the Contractor. When a standard or mast arm is relocated, or when a used standard or mast arm is Agency- furnished, new nuts, bolts, cap screws and washers shall be provided and, if the standard has a slip base, a new keeper plate shall be provided. New hardware shall conform to the requirements for hardware used with new standards. New standards, mast arms, posts and other ferrous materials shall be galvanized as provided in Section 21 0-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." 209-2.05 Conduit. All conductors shall be run in conduit, except overhead and temporary installations, and where conductors are run inside poles. Conduit shall be of the sizes shown on the plans and as specified in this Section 209-2.05. In addition, the Contractor may, as an option at the Contractor's expense, use conduit of a larger size than that shown or specified, provided the larger size is used for the entire length of the run from outlet to outlet. Reducing couplings will not be permitted. New conduit shall not pass through foundations for standards. 209-2.05A Material. Conduit and conduit fittings shall be UL or ETL listed and shall conform to the following be Hotdip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to the requirements in UL Publication UL 6 for Rigid Metallic Conduit. The zinc coating will be tested in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 239:. Type 1. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to the requirements in UL Publication UL 6 for Rigid Metallic Conduit. The zinc coating will be tested in accordance with ASTM Designation: A 239. 2) Type 2. Hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to Type 1 above and coated with polyvinyl chloride or polyethylene. The exterior thermoplastic coating shall have a minimum thickness of 0.9 mm (35 mils). 3) Type 3. Rigid non-metallic conduit conforming to the requirements in the UL Standard for Rigid Non- Metallic Conduit (Publication UL 651). Type 3 conduit shall be installed at all underground loca- tions. 4) Type 4. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit shall consist of conduit with a liquid tight, non-metallic, sunlight-resistant jacket over an inner flexible metal core. Type 4 conduit shall be UL listed for use as the grounding conductor. 5) Type 5. Intermediate steel conduit (IMC) conforming to the requirements in UL Publication 1242 for Intermediate Metallic Conduit. Type 5 conduit shall only be used when specified. Bonding bushings to be installed on metal conduit shall be insulated and shall be the galvanized or zinc alloy type. All conduit installed underground shall be Type 3, rigid non-metallic conduit. Type 3 conduit shall be installed at underground locations only. 209-2.05B Use. Exposed conduit installed on a painted structure shall be painted the same color as the structure. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum metric trade size of conduit shall be: 1) From an electrolier to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 41 (I1/$ dia). 2) From a pedestrian push button post to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 27 (1" dia). 3) From a signal standard to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 53 (2" dia). 4) From a controller cabinet to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 78 (3" dia). 5) For detector runs shall be Size 41 (l'/2n dia). 6) Not othewise specified shall be Size 41 (1 '/2" dia). 209-2.05C Installation. Conduit shall be installed in conformance with the codes and regulations listed in Section 209-1.02, "Regulations and Code." -0 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 185 of 414 Conduit runs shown on the plans may be changed to avoid underground obstructions with written approval by the Engineer. The ends of all conduits, whether shop or field cut, shall be reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Cuts shall be made square and true. Slip joints or running threads will not be permitted for coupling conduit. When a standard coupling cannot be used for coupling metal type conduit, a UL or ETL listed threaded union coupling shall be used. All couplings for metal type conduit shall be tightened to provide a good electrical connection throughout the entire length of the conduit run. Conduit shall be tightened into couplings or fittings using strap wrenches or approved groove joint pliers. Conduit threads and damaged surfaces on metal conduit shall be painted with 2 applications of approved unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to the requirements in Section 21 0-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." Aerosol cans shall not be used. The ends of conduit shall be threaded and shall be capped with standard pipe caps or "pennies" to protect the raceway against dirt and concrete until wiring is started. When caps or 'pennies" are removed, the ends of conduit and conduit fittings shall be provided with conduit bushings. Conduit terminating in pull boxes or foundations shall be provided with insulated bonding bushings Conduit bends, except factory bends, shall have a radius of not less than 6 times the inside diameter of the conduit. Where factory bends are not used, conduit shall be bent, without crimping or flattening, us- ing the longest radius practicable. A No. 12 copper pull wire or a pull rope shall be installed in all conduits which are to receive future conductors. The pull rope shall be nylon or polypropylene with a minimum tensile strength of 2225 N (500 pounds). At least 0.6 m (2') of pull wire or rope shall be doubled back into the conduit at each termination. Existing underground conduit to be incorporated into a new system shall be cleaned with a mandrel or cylindrical wire brush and blown out with compressed air. Conduit shall be laid to a depth of not less than 460 mm (18') below grade in portland cement concrete sidewalk areas and curbed paved median areas, and not less than 750 mm (30") below finished grade in all other areas. Conduit may be laid on top of the existing pavement within new curbed medians being constructed on top of the existing pavement. Conduit couplings shall be located at least 150 mm (6") from face of foundation. Unless "Trenching In Pavement Method" is specifically allowed or required on the plans or in these special provisions, conduit shall be placed under existing pavement by jacking or drilling methods. Pavement shall not be disturbed without permission from the Engineer. In the event obstructions are encountered, upon approval of the Engineer, small holes may be cut in the pavement to locate or remove obstructions. Jacking or drilling pits shall be kept 0.6 m (2') clear of the edge of any type of pavement wherever possible. Excessive use of water, such that pavement might be undermined or subgrade softened, will not be permitted. Conduit to be placed as part of the completed work shall not be used for drilling or jacking. When "Trenching in Pavement Method" is specifically allowed or required on the plans or in these special provisions, installation of conduit under pavement shall conform to the following: 1) Conduit shall be placed under existing pavement in a trench approximately 50 mm (2") wider than the outside diameter of the conduit to be installed. 2) Trench shall not exceed 150 mm (6") in width. 3) Trench depth shall not exceed 300 mm (12") or conduit metric trade size plus 250 mm (IO"), whichever is greater, except that at pull boxes the trench may be hand dug to required depth. . 4) The top of the installed conduit shall be a minimum of 230 mm (9") below finished grade. In areas where additional pavement is to be placed, trenching installation shall be completed prior to placing the final pavement layer. 5) The outline of all areas of pavement to be' removed shall be cut to a minimum depth of 75 mm (3') with a rock cutting excavator specifically designed for this purpose. 6) Cuts shall be neat and true with no shatter outside the removal area. 7) The conduit shall be placed in the bottom of the trench and the trench shall be backfilled with trench backfill sluny concrete. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 186 of 414 8) Concrete backfill shall be placed to the pavement surface except, when the trench is in asphalt concrete pavement and additional pavement is not being placed, the top 30 mm (0.1 0) of the trench shall be backfilled with asphalt concrete produced from commercial quality paving asphalt and aggregates. Prior to spreading asphalt concrete, paint binder (tack coat) shall be applied as specified in Section 302- 5.4, "Tack Coat." Spreading and compacting of asphalt concrete shall be performed by any method which will produce an asphalt concrete surfacing of uniform smoothness, texture, and density. All excavated areas in the pavement shall be backfilled, except for the top 30 mm (O.lO'), by the end of each work period. The top 30 mm (0.10') shall be placed within 3 calendar days after trenching. Conduit to be placed beneath railroad tracks shall comply with the following: The conduit shall be Size 41 (11/2" dia.) minimum, and shall be placed to a minimum depth of 900 mm (3) below bottom of tie. The near side of each conduit jacking pit shall be constructed not less than 4 m (12') from the centerline of track. When the jacking pit is to be left overnight, it shall be covered with substantial planking. Conduit terminating in standards or pedestals shall extend not more than 50 mm (2") vertically above the foundation and shall be sloped towards the handhole opening. Conduit entering through the side of non-metallic pull boxes shall terminate not more than 50 mm (2") inside the box wall and not less than 50 mm (2") above the bottom, and shall be sloped toward top of box to facilitate pulling of conductors. Conduit entering through the bottom of a pull box shall terminate 50 mm (2") above the bottom and shall be located near the end walls to leave the major portion of the box clear. At all outlets, conduits shall enter from the direction of the run. Conduit runs from underground, including under sidewalks, which are adjacent to gasoline service stations or other installations of underground gasoline or diesel storage, piping, or pumps, and which lead to a controller cabinet, circuit breaker panel, service, or any enclosure where an arc may occur during normal operations, shall be sealed if the conduit is within the limits specified in the National Electrical Code for Class 1, Division 1, Hazardous Locations. Type 1 or Type 2 conduit shall be used for these runs. Conduit for future use in structures shall be threaded and capped. Conduit leading to soffit, wall or other lights or fixtures below the grade of the pull box shall be sealed by means of a sealing fitting and sealing compound, except that sealing fitting and sealing compound will not be required where conduit terminates in a No. 9 or No. 9A pull box. Conduits in or on walls or bridge superstructures shall be supported as shown on the plans, in conformance with the followina: Steel hangers, steel bratkets, and other fittings shall conform to the materials and construction methods provisions in Sections 206-1, "Structural Steel, Rivets, Bolts, pins and Anchor Bolts", for materials and 304-1, "Structural Steel" for construction methods. Cast-in-place metal inserts for hangers or brackets shall be capable of developing 135 Mpa (20,000 pounds per square inch) in tension on the net section of the bolt or threaded rod. Precast concrete conduit cradles shall conform to the dimensions shown on the plans and shall be constructed of commercial quality concrete containing not less than 350 kg of portland cement per cubic meter (564 Ibs. per cubic yard) and commercial quality welded wire fabric. The cradles shall be moist cured for not less than 3 days. Precast concrete cradles shall be bonded to the structure with epoxy adhesive conforming to the provisions in Section 214-6.2.2, "Standard Set Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers," or Section 214-6.2.1, "Rapid Set Epoxy Adhesive for Pavement Markers" or conforming to State of California specification 8040-21 M-08, Type I when cure temperatures are above 15-C (59°F) or to State of California specification 8040-21 M-08, Type I when cure temperatures are below 15°C (59-F). Openings for conduits through bridge superstructure concrete shall be formed or may consist of pipe sleeves. Where conduits pass through the abutment concrete, the conduits shall be wrapped with 2 layers of asphalt-felt building paper, securely taped or wired in place. The space around conduits through bridge abutment walls shall be filled with portland cement mortar 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 187 of 414 conforming to the provisions in Section 201-5, 'Cement Mortar," except that the proportion of cement to sand shall be one to 3. When the bridge superstructure is to be prestressed, the space around conduits through abutments shall not be filled until the prestressing has been completed. Conduit which is surface mounted shall be run straight and true, horizontal or vertical on the walls and parallel to walls on ceilings or other similar surfaces. Conduit shall be supported at intervals of not more than 1.5 m (5), and closer where necessary to prevent vibration or unsightly deflection. The supports shall consist of galvanized malleable iron conduit clamps and clamp backs secured with expansion anchorage devices conforming to the requirements for concrete anchorage devices in Sections 206-1 , "Structural Steel, Rivets, Bolts, pins and Anchor Bolts", for materials and 304-1, "Structural Steel" for construction methods. Threaded studs shall be galvanized and shall be of the largest diameter that will pass through the mounting hole in conduit clamp. Attention is directed to Section 209-2.10, "Bonding and Grounding." Where pull boxes are placed in conduit runs, the conduit shall be fitted with threaded bushings and bonded. The location of ends of all conduits in structures, or terminating at curbs, shall be marked by a "Y at least 75 mm (3") high cut into the face of curb, gutter, or wall, directly above the conduit and above grade line. 209-2.05D Expansion Fittings. Expansion fittings shall be installed where the conduit crosses any expansion joint in the structure. Each expansion fitting for metal conduit shall be provided with a copper bonding jumper having the ampacity required by the Code. Each expansiondeflection fitting for expansion joints of 38 mm (1'12") movement rating shall be watertight and shall consist of a molded neoprene sleeve, a bondin jumper and 2 silicon bronze or zinc- plated iron hubs. Each Wing shall permit a minimum of 19 mm ( /4") expansion and contraction and a minimum of 19 mm (3/4u) lateral deflection. Details of expansion-deflection fittings for joints of movement rating of more than 38 mm (1 '/2") shall be as shown on the plans and specified in these special provisions. B 209-2.06 Pull Boxes. Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans or as specified. The Contractor may, as an option, at the Contractor's expense, use pull boxes of a larger standard size than that shown or specified. 209-2.06A Materials. Pull boxes, covers and extensions for installation in the ground or in sidewalk areas shall be of the sizes and details shown on the plans and shall be precast of reinforced portland cement concrete (PCC) or of non-PCC material. Non-PCC material shall be fire resistant and shall not bum at a rate greater than 8 mm (0.3") per minute per 2.5 mm (0.1") of thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM Designation: D 635. The non-PCC material shall show no appreciable change in physical properties with exposure to the weather. Non-PCC material shall be dense and free of voids or porosity, and shall be a gray or brown color. Top dimensions of non-PCC pull boxes shall not exceed the bottom dimensions by more than 25 mm (I"). Extensions for non-PCC pull boxes shall be of the same material as the pull boxes, and shall be attached to the pull boxes in a manner that will maintain the minimum combined depths shown on the plans. Non-PCC pull boxes shall be of sufficient rigidity that when a designated concentrated force is applied perpendicularly to the midpoint of one of the long sides at the top while the opposite long side is sup- ported by a rigid surface, it shall be possible to remove the cover without the use of tools. . The designated concentrated force shall be 650 N (150 Ibs.) for a No. 3112 pull box and shall be 450 N (100 Ibs.) for a No. 5 or No. 6 pull box. When a vertical force of 6500 N (1,500 Ibs.) is applied, through a 13 mm ('11~") x 75 mm (3") x 150 mm (6") steel plate, to a non-PCC cover in place on a pull box, the cover shall not fail and shall not deflect more than 6 mm ('14"). The steel plate shall be centered on the cover with its longitudinal axis coinciding with the longitudinal axis of the cover. Where a ballast or transformer or other device is to be placed in a non-metallic pull box, the box shall be provided with recesses for a hanger. Pull boxes and covers for installation in structures shall be of the sizes and details shown on the 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 188 of 414 plans. Each No. 7 ceiling pull box located near a flush soffit fixture and to be used to house the ballast for the fixture shall be provided with mounting brackets for the ballast and any required capacitors. Covers, except covers for ceiling pull boxes, shall be secured with 9 mm (3/~') bolts, cap screws, or studs, and nuts which shall be of brass, stainless steel or other noncorroding metal material. Stainless steel holddown bolts, cap screws or studs, and nuts and washers shall have a chromium content of not less than 18 percent and a nickel content of not less than 8 percent. All ferrous metal parts shall be galvanized in accordance with the provisions in Section 210-3.6, 'Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities." 209-2.068 Cover Marking. Covers for pull boxes, except covers for ceiling pull boxes, shall be marked as shown on the plans. Marking shall be clearly defined and uniform in depth and may be placed parallel to either the long or short sides of the cover. Marking letters shall be between 25 mm (1') and 75 mm (3") high. Marking shall be applied to each steel or cast iron cover prior to galvanizing by one of the following methods: (a) Cast iron strips, at least 6 mm ('/qU) thick, with the letters raised a minimum of 1.5 mrn (l/16"). Strips shall be fastened to covers with 6 mm (1/4u) flathead stainless steel machine bolts and nuts. Bolts shall be peened after tightening. (b) Sheet steel strips at least 0.7 mm (22 sa.) with the letters raised a minimum of 1.5 mm (l/16') above the surrounding surface of the strips. Strips shall be fastened to covers by spot welding, tack welding or brazing, with 6 mm (1/4') stainless steel rivets, or with 6 mm roundhead stainless steel machine bolts and nuts. Bolts shall be peened after tightening. (c) Bead welding the letters on the covers. The letters shall be raised at least 2 mm (3/32"). 209-2.06C Installation and Use. Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans and, in conduit runs exceeding 60 m(200'), shall be spaced at not over 60 m (200) intervals. The Contractor may, at the Contractor's expense, install additional pull boxes to facilitate the work. The bottoms of pull boxes installed in the ground or in sidewalk areas, shall be bedded in crushed rock as shown on the plans. 209-2.08 Conductors. Conductors shall be copper of the gage shown on the plans, unless specified otherwise. Copper wire shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designations: B 3 and B 8. Wire sizes, other than conductors used in loop detector lead-in cable, shall be based on American Wire Gage (AWG), except that conductor diameter shall be not less than 98 percent of the specified AWG diameter. Conductors for branch circuits shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the furthest connected load, while drawing the combination of all connected loads capable of simultaneous operation. The maximum voltage drop for both feeders and branch circuits shall not exceed 5 percent at the furthest connected load, while drawing the combination of all connected loads capable of simultaneous operation. Conductors used in loop detector lead-in cable shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: B 286. A Certificate of Compliance conforming to the provisions in Section 4-1.5, "Certification," shall be submitted by the manufacturer with each type of cable to be used on a project. 209-2.08A Conductor Identification. All single conductors in cables, except detector lead-in cables, shall have clear, distinctive and permanent markings on the outer surface throughout the entire length showing the manufacturer's name or trademark, insulation type letter designation, conductor size, voltage rating and the number of conductors if a cable. Conductor insulation shall be of a solid color or of basic colors with a permanent colored stripe as detailed in the following table unless otherwise specified. Solid e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 189 of 414 or basic colors shall be homogeneous through the full depth of insulation. Identification stripes shall be continuous over the entire length of the conductor. For conductor sizes No. 2 and larger, the insulation may be black and the ends of the conductors shall be taped with electrical insulating tape of the required color for a minimum of 500 mm (20"). All single conductors in cables shall be marked as shown in Table 209-2.08D (A): . red yellow brown red/black stripe yellow/black stripe brown/black stripe black whitelblack stripe Twelve-Conductor Cable (12CSC). The 12-conductor signal cable shall consist of eleven No. 14 conductors and one No. 12 conductor. The cable jacket shall have a minimum average thickness of 1.5 mm (60 mils) and shall have a minimum thickness at any point of 1.2 mm (48 mils). The nominal outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 17 mm (0.70"). The color code for the No. 12 conductor shall be white. The color code and functional connections for the No. 14 conductors shall be as Table 209- 2.08D(B), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer: Color Code red/black stripe TABLE 209-2.08D(B) TWELVE -CONDUCTOR CABLE SIGNAL CABLE The 12conductor cable shall be used for vehicle signals, pedestrian signals, spares and the signal Termination Phase 2 or 6 vehicle signal red common. Twenty Eight-Conductor Cable (28CSC). The 28-conductor signal cable shall consist of 27 No. 14 conductors and one No. 10 conductor. The cable jacket shall have a minimum average thickness of 2 mm (80 mils) and shall have a minimum thickness at any point of 1.6 mm (64 mils). The nominal outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 23 mm (0.90"). The color code for the No. 10 conductor shall be white. The color code and functional connections for the No. 14 conductors shall be as Table 204 2.08D(C) 1) The signal commons in each 28-condudor cable shall be kept separate except at the signal controller. 2) Each 28conductor cable shall be labeled in each pull box 'CI" or 'CY,. The cable identified 'CY shall be ukd for signal Phases 1,2,3 and 4. The cable identified 'C2" shall be used for signal Phases 5,6,7 and 8. - Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 190 of 414 Color Code Termination vehicle signal yellow vehicle signal green vehicle signal red vehicle signal yellow vehicle signal green vehicle signal red vehicle signal yellow , vehicle signal green vehicle signal red vehicle signal yellow yellow/black stripe browrdblack stripe red/orange stripe yellow/orange stripe brown/ora nge stripe red/silver stripe yellow/silver stripe brown/silver stripe yellowlpurple stripe ' red/purple stripe ~ Phase 2or6 2or6 4or8 4 or 8 4or8 1 or5 1 or5 1 or5 3 or 7 3 or 7 brown/purple stripe red/2 black stripes vehicle signal green ped signal Don't Walk ped signal Walk ped signal Don't Walk brown/2 black stripes red/2 orange stripes brown/;! orange stripes red/2 silver stripes brown12 silver stripes redl2 purple stripes browrd2 purple stripes bludblack stripe bluelorange stripe bluelsilver stripe blue/purple stripe whitelblack stripe blacklred stripe 3077 ~ 2or6 2 or6 4 or 8 black overlap A, C red overlap A, C green overlap B, D red overlap B, D green OLA, OLC OLA, OLC OLB, OLD OLB, OLD ped push button ped push button overlap A, C yellow overlap B, D yellow ped push button common railroad pre-emption snare ped signal Walk I 4 or 8 2 or 6 4or8 OLA(y), OLC(y) OLB(y), OLD(y) 3) The signal commons in each 28-conductor cable shall be kept separate except at the signal controller. 4) Each Zhnductor cable shall be labeled in each pull box 'CI" or 'C2",. 5) The cable identified 'Cl" shall be used for signal Phases 1,2,3 and 4. The cable identified 'C2" shall be used for signal Phases 5,6,7 and 8. 6) Each signal cable, except 28-conductor, shall be marked, in each pull box, showing the signal standard to which it is connected. 209-2.08E Signal Interconnect Cable (SIC). Signal Interconnect Cable shall consist of six or twelve No. 20, minimum, stranded tinned copper conductors as shown on the plans or required herein. Each conductor shall be insulated with 0.33 mm (0.013"), minimum nominal thickness, color coded, polypropylene material. Conductors shall be in twisted pairs. Color coding shall distinguish each pair. Each pair shall be wrapped with an aluminum polyester shield and shall have a No. 22 or larger, stranded, tinned copper drain wire inside the shielded pair. The cable jacket shall be black, high density polyethylene, rated for a minimum of 300- volts and 60"C, and shall have a nominal wall thickness of 1 .O mm (40 mils), minimum. The cable jacket or the moisture-resistant tape directly under the outer jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, insulation type designation, number of conductors and conductor size, and voltage and temperature ratings. Splices shall be made only where shown on. the plans or in controller cabinets. A minimum of one meter (3') of slack shall be provided at each splice and 2 m (6') at each controller cabinet. Splices of conductors shall be insulated with heat-shrink tubing of the appropriate size and shall overlap the conductor insulation at lept 15 mm (0.5"). The overall cable splice shall be covered with heat-shrink tubing, with at least 40 mm (1 /2") of overlap of the cable jacket. 209-2.09 Wiring. All conductors shall be run in conduit, except overhead and temporary installations and where conductors are tun inside poles. Wiring shall be done in conformance with the regulations and code listed in Section 209-1.02, "Regulations and Code," and the following additional requirements: 209-2.09A Circuitry. Sufficient traffic signal light conductors shall be provided to perform the functional operation of the signal and, in addition thereto, 3 spare conductors shall be provided in all conduits containing traffic signal light conductors, unless shown otherwise on the plans. Traffic signal light conductors shall not tun to a terminal block on a standard unless they are to be connected to a e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 191 of 414 signal head that is mounted thereon. Connection to each terminal of a pedestrian push button shall be by a single conductor. The common for pedestrian push button circuits shall be separate from the traffic signal light circuit grounded conductors. Where ballasts or transformers are used, series conductors shall be run from ballast to ballast, transformer to transformer, and from ballast or transformer to service. 209-2.098 Installation. A UL or ETL listed inert lubricant shall be used in placing conductors in conduit. Conductors shall be pulled into conduit by hand and the use of winches or other power actuated pulling equipment will not be permitted. All conductors shall be pulled directly from the spool into the conduit and shall not be dragged on the ground as to cause damage to the conductors. When new conductors are to be added to existing conductors in a conduit, all conductors shall be removed; the conduit shall be cleaned as provided in Section 209-2.05C, "Installation"; and both old and new conductors shall be pulled into the conduit as a unit. Where traffic signal light conductors are run in lighting standards containing street lighting conductors from a different service point, either the traffic signal light conductors or the lighting conductors shall be encased in flexible or rigid metal conduit, to a point where the 2 types of conductors are no longer in the same raceway. Temporary conductors less than 3 m (1 0') above grade shall be enclosed in flexible or rigid metal conduit. At least 0.3 m (1 ') of slack shall be left for each conductor at each signal or lighting standard, or combined standard, and at least one meter (3') of slack at each pull box. At least one meter (3') of slack shall be left for each conductor at each splice. Ends of spare conductors or conductors terminated in pull boxes shall be taped to provide a watertight seal. Conductors within fixtures or service cabinets shall be neatly arranged and shall be cabled together with self-clinching nylon cable ties, or other method approved by the Engineer. Traffic signal light conductors, interconnect conductors, service conductors, detector conductors and cables in controller cabinets and flashing beacon cabinets shall be neatly arranged, and shall be cabled together with self-clinching nylon cable ties, or enclosed in plastic tubing or raceway. Conductor identification shall be provided under the following conditions: 1) Where signal phase or circuit are not clearly indicated by conductor insulation color and stripe as detailed in the conductor table in Section 209-2.08, "Conductors," or when identification stripes are not available, marking shall be as detailed in the conductor table for special and overlap phases. 2) Where metered and unmetered conductors occupy the same pull box, the unmetered circuit conductors shall be identified, "UNMETERED-STREET LTG," "UNMETERED-COUNT STATION," or as appropriate to describe the unmetered circuit. Conductors shall be permanently identified as to function. Identification shall be placed on each conductor, or each group of conductors comprising a signal phase, in each pull box and near the end of terminated conductors. Identification shall be by direct labeling, tags or bands fastened to the conductors in such a manner that they will not move along the conductors. Labeling shall be by mechanical methods. 209-2.09C Connectors and Terminals. Conductors shall be joined by the use of UL or ETL listed crimp type connectors as shown on the plans. Connectors and terminals shall be applied with the proper type tool as recommended by the manufacturer of the connector or terminal being used. Finished connections and terminals shall comply with the requirements of Military Specification MIL-T-7928. All stranded conductors smaller than No. 14 shall be terminated in crimp style terminal lugs. All connectors and terminal lugs for conductor sizes No. 8 and smaller shall be soldered by the hot iron, pouring or dipping method. Open flame soldering will not be permitted. 209-2.09D Splicing and Terminations. Unless specified otherwise or permitted by the Engineer, splices shall conform to the details shown on the plans and will be permitted only in the following types of circuits at the following locations: 1) Grounded conductors in pull boxes. 2) Pedestrian push button conductors in pull boxes. 3) Multiple or series lighting conductors in the pull box adjacent to each electrolier or luminaire '3 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 192 of 414 location or in the bases of Type 21 standards. Where electroliers are more than 120 m (400') apart, splices will be permitted in pull boxes at 120 m (400'), or greater, intervals. When traffic signal locations shown on the plans. Ungrounded traffic signal light cs are being modified, ungrounded traffic signal light conductors may be spliced in pull boxes at onductors to a terminal compartment or signal head on a standard may be spliced to through conductors of the same Phase 2n the pull box adjacent to the standard. All splices and terminal lugs for conductor sizes No. 8 and smaller shall be soldered by the hot iron, pouring or dipping method. Open flame soldering will not be permitted. Property Shrinkage Ratio Dielectric Strength Resistivity Tensile Strength Operating Temperature Water Absorption 209-2.09E Splice insulation. All splices shall be capable of satisfactory operation under continuous submersion in water. Multi-conductor cables shall be spliced and insulated to provide a watertight joint and to prevent absorption of moisture by the cable. Where more than one conductor enters the sleeve of a ballast installed in a pull box, the insulation and taping shall be applied between the conductors in such a manner as to provide a watertight joint. Splice insulation shall conform to the details shown on the plans. Low-voltage tape shall be UL or ETL listed and shall be the following types: 1 ) Self-fusing, oil and flame-resistant, synthetic rubber. 2) Pressure-sensitive, adhesive, polyvinyl chloride, 0.1 5 mm (0.007") minimum thickness. Tape for insulating splices in high-voltage (over 600 V) circuits shall be designed for use on 5-kvolt circuits and shall be resistant to ozone, corona and water. Insulating pad shall be composed of a laminate of 2 mm (0.085") thickness of electrical grade polyvinyl chloride and a 3 mm (0.125") thickness of butyl splicing compound with removable liner. . Heat-shrink tubing shall be medium or heavy wall thickness, irradiated polyolefin tubing containing an adhesive mastic inner wall. Minimum wall thickness prior to contraction shall be one millimeter (39 mils). When heated, the inner wall shall melt and fill all crevices and interstices of the object being covered while the outer wall shrinks to form a waterproof insulation. Each end of the heat shrink tube or the open end of the end cap of heat-shrink tubing shall, after contraction, overlap the conductor insulation at least 38 mm (1%"). Heat-shrink tubing shall conform to the requirements of UL Standard 468D and ANSI Requirement 33 percent, maximum, of supplied diameter when heated to 125°C and allowed to cool to 25°C. 140 kV per 10 mm, minimum. 1013 4 mm, minimum. 14 MPa, minimum. -40°C to 90°C (1 35°C Emergency). 0.5 percent, maximum. Cll9.1, for extruded insulated tuthg at 600-V. All heat-shrink tubing shall also meet the requirements of Table 209-2.09E(A): When three or more conductors are to be enclosed within a single splice using heat-shrink tubing, mastic shall be placed around each conductor, prior to being placed inside the heat-shrink tubing. The mastic shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer of the heat-shrink tubing. After contraction, the ends and seams of heat-shrink tubing shall be painted with electrical insulating coating. Heat-shrink tubing shall not be heated with an open flame. A heating device designed for the purpose is required. The Contractor may, at the Contractor's option, use either of the following splice insulation methods: 1) "Method B" as shown on the plans. A minimum of 2 thicknesses of electrical insulating pad shall be used. Pads shall be applied to the splice in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Heat-shrink tubing as provided above. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 193 of 414 209-2.095 Fused Splice Connectors. In the pull box adjacent to each luminaire a fused disconnect splice connector shall be installed in each ungrounded conductor between the line and the ballast. The connector shall be readily accessible in the pull box regardless of whether the ballast is remote or is integral with the luminaire. For 240-volt and 480-volt circuits, each connector shall be designed so that both ungrounded conductors are disconnected simultaneously. The connector shall have no exposed metal parts, except the head of a stainless steel assembly screw may be exposed. The head of the metal assembly screw shall be recessed a minimum of 0.8 mm ('/32") below the top of a plastic boss which surrounds the head. The splice connector shall completely enclose the fuse and shall protect the fuse against damage from water and weather. The contact between the fuse and fuse holder shall be by spring pressure. The terminals of the splice connector shall be rigidly crimped, using a tool of the type recommended by the manufacturer of the fused splice connector, onto the line conductors and the conductors to the ballasts and shall be insulated and made waterproof in accordance with the splice connector manufacturer's recommendations. Fused splice connectors shall not be used in series circuits. Fuses shall be standard midget, ferrule type, with "Non-Time-Delay" feature, and shall be 10 mm (13/32") x 38 mm (1 '12.). 209-2.10 Bonding and Grounding. Metallic cable sheaths, metal pull box covers, metal conduit, equipment grounding conductors, ballast and transformer cases, service equipment, sign switches, and metal poles and pedestals shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to form a continuous system, and shall be effectively grounded. Bonding jumpers shall be copper wire or copper braid of the same cross sectional area as No. 6 for series lighting systems and No. 8 or larger for all other systems. The jumper size shall be increased to match the load or the circuit breaker size, or shall be as shown on the plans. Equipment grounding conductors shall be color coded to Code requirements or shall be bare. The bonding jumper in standards with handholes shall be attached by a 4.5 mm (3/ls") or larger brass bolt and shall be run to the conduit or bonding wire in the adjacent pull box. Standards without handholes shall be bonded by a jumper attached to all anchor bolts, and shall be run to the conduit or bonding wire in the adjacent pull box. Grounding jumper shall be visible after cap has been placed on foundation. Where slip base standards or slip base inserts are installed, the bonding jumper shall not intrude into the slip plane. Bonding shall be accomplished by a bonding strap to all anchor bolts or a 4.5 mm (3/4{) or larger brass bolt installed in the bottom slip base plate. One side of the secondary circuit of series-multiple and stepdown transformers shall be grounded. Grounding of metal conduit, service equipment and the grounded conductor at service point shall be accomplished as required by the Code and the serving utility, except that grounding electrode conductor shall be No. 6, or larger. For equipment grounding purposes in Type 3 conduit, a No. 6 copper wire shall be run continuously in circuits used for series lighting, and a No. 8, minimum, copper wire shall be run continuously in all other circuits. The bonding wire size shall be increased to match the circuit breaker size, or shall be as shown on the plans. Where Type 3 conduit is to be installed for future conductors, the copper wire may be omitted. Equipment bonding and grounding conductors are not required in conduits which contain only loop lead-in cable or signal interconnect cable or both. At each multiple service disconnect location, a ground electrode shall be furnished and installed. Ground electrodes shall be one-piece lengths of galvanized steeg rod or pipe not less than 19 mm (3/4y) in diameter, or of copper clad steel rod not less than 15 mm ( 18") in diameter. Ground electrodes shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of the Code. The service equipment shall be bonded €0 the ground electrode by use of a ground clamp or exothermic weld and No. 6 or larger copper wire, enclosed in a size 16 or larger diameter conduit. Ground clamp for service grounding and for grounding of equipment on wood poles shall be Size 16 galvanized, malleable iron conduit hub with swivel feature. On wood poles, all metallic equipment mounted less than 2.4 m (8') above ground surface shall be grounded. Bonding of metallic conduit in non-metallic pull boxes shall be by means of bonding bushings and bonding jumpers. Bonding of metallic conduit in metal pull boxes shall be by means of locknuts, one inside and one outside of the box. - e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 194 of 414 209-2.11 Service. Electrical service installation and materials shall conform to the requirements of the serving utility. When the service equipment is to be installed on a utility-owned pole, the Contractor shall furnish and install conduit, conductors and all other necessary material to complete the installation of the service. The position of the riser and equipment will be determined by the utility. qervice conduit shall conform to the requirements of the serving utility and shall be not less than Size 41 (1 12" dia.). Where a kilowatt-hour meter is required, a meter socket with sealing ring; as approved by the serving utility, shall be furnished and installed. Where a meter socket is installed, the meter enclosure shall be provided with factory installed test bypass facilities as required by the serving utility. Service equipment . shall be installed as soon as possible to enable the utility to schedule its work well in advance of the completion of the project. Each service shall be provided with a circuit breaker which shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded service entrance conductors. All circuit breakers shall be quick-break on either automatic or manual operation. The operating mechanism shall be enclosed and shall be trip-free from the operating handle on overload. Circuit breakers shall be trip-indicating, shall have frame size plainly marked and shall have trip rating clearly indicated on the operating handle. Overload tripping of breakers shall not be influenced by an ambient temperature range of from -18°C to 50°C. Multiple-pole breakers shall be the internal trip type. All circuit breakers shall be listed by UL or ETL. Current rating of breakers shall be as shown on the plans. Circuit breakers used as service disconnect equipment shall have a minimum interrupting capacity of 10 000 A, rms. Circuit Preakers shall be enclosed in a NEMA raintight enclosure with dead-front panel and hasp with a 11 mm ( /I<) hole for a padlock. The padlock will be furnished by others. Service equipment enclosures, except Types II and Ill, shall be galvanized. Types II and Ill service equipment enclosures shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel or fabricated from sheet steel and zinc or cadmium plated after fabrication, or shall be fabricated from aluminum. Fabrication of service equipment enclosures shall conform to the requirements of Section 209-3.O4Al 'Cabinet Construction." Steel enclosures shall be painted in accordance with the provisions in Section 209-2.16, "Painting." All overlapping exterior seams and doors shall meet the requirements for Type 3R enclosures specified in the NEMA Enclosure Standards. Except for falsework lighting and power for the Contractor's operations, upon written request by the Contractor, the Engineer will arrange with the serving utility to complete service connections for both temporary and permanent installations and the Agency will pay all costs and fees required by the utility. The request shall be submitted not less than 15 days before service connections are required. Except for falsework lighting and power for the Contractor's operations, upon written request by the Contractor, the Engineer will arrange for furnishing electrical energy. Energy used prior to completion of the contract will be charged to the Contractor, except that the cost of energy used for public benefit, when an operation is ordered by the Engineer, will be at the expense of the Agency. Full compensation for furnishing and installing Agency-owned or permanent service poles, service equipment, conduit, conductors and pull boxes (including equipment, conduit, and conductors placed on utility-owned poles) shall be considered as included in the contract item of electrical work involved and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. Where the service point is indeterminate and is shown on the plans as an "approximate location" or "service point not yet established", the labor and materials required for making the connection between the service point, when established, and the nearest pull box shown on the plans will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-3, "Extra Work." 209-2.12 Wood Poles. Wood poles for service or temporary installations shall be ANSI Class 5, or larger. Poles shall not have more than 180 degrees twist in grain over the full length. Sweep shall be no more than 100 mm (4"). Tops of poles shall be beveled. Poles shall be placed in the ground to a depth of at least 1.8 m (6'). The lengths of poles shall be 7.6 m (25') for service poles and 10.7 m (35') for other poles, unless otherwise specified. After each wood pole is set in the ground, the space around the pole shall be backfilled with selected earth or sand, free of rocks and other deleterious material, placed in layers approximately 100 mm (4") thick. Each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly compacted. - e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 195 of 414 Mast arms for wood pole installations shall be fabricated from standard pipe, free from burrs. Each mast arm shall be provided with an insulated wire inlet and wood pole mounting brackets for mast arm and tie- rod cross arm. Tie rods shall be of structural steel and pipe. Mast arms for luminaires shall be mounted to provide a mounting height of 9.1 m (30’). Mast arms for traffic signals and flashing beacons shall provide a minimum vertical clearance of 5.2 m (1 7’) from bottom of equipment to the pavement. Wood poles, not to be painted, shall be pressure treated after fabrication with creosote, pentachlorophenol (oil borne) or copper naphthenate as provided in Section 204-2, “Treatment With Preservatives.” All wood poles, when specified in the special provisions to be painted, shall be pressure treated after fabrication with ammoniacal copper arsenate, chromated copper arsenate or ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate as provided in Section 204-2, ‘Treatment With Preservatives.” The minimum retention for water borne preservatives shall be that specified for posts. 209-2.13 Sign Control. Each sign illumination installation shall be provided with a disconnect circuit breaker mounted on the sign standard or structure, as shown on the plans. Where the sign lighting is served from a series lighting circuit through a series-multiple transformer, the circuit breaker shall be installed in the secondary circuit. Where the sign lighting is served through a multiple-multiple transformer, the circuit breaker shall be installed in the primary circuit. Circuit breakers shall meet the requirements for circuit breakers in Section 209-2.1 1, “Service.” Enclosure for the circuit breaker shall be NEMA Type 3R, shall be galvanized or shall be cadmium plated, and shall be provided with dead front panel and a hasp with a 11 mm diameter hole for a padlock. Padlocks will be furnished by others. When the sign structure is to be painted, the circuit breaker or sign switch enclosure shall be painted the same color as the sign structure on which it is mounted. 209-2.14 Testing. Attention is directed to Section 4-1.4, Test of Materials.” Testing shall conform to the following: 209-2.14A Materials Testing. Material and equipment to be tested shall be delivered to a testing location designated by the Engineer. Testing will be performed by the Agency. Testing and quality control procedures for Model 170 and Model 2070 controller assemblies shall conform to the requirements in “Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications,” and “Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications,” issued by the State of California, Department of Transportation, and to all addendum thereto current at the time of project advertising. Testing and quality control procedures for all other traffic signal controller assemblies shall conform to the requirements in the NEMA TS Standards for Traffic Control Systems. In the event equipment submitted for testing does not comply with specifications, the Contractor shall remove the equipment for repair within 5 working days after notification that the equipment is rejected. In the event the equipment is not removed within that period, it may be shipped to the Contractor at the Contractor‘s expense. The Contractor shall allow 30 days for Agency testing from the time the material or equipment is delivered to the Agency test site. When equipment being tested has been rejected for failure to comply with the specifications, the Contractor shall allow 30 days for Agency retesting. The retesting period shall begin when the corrected equipment is made available at the test site. All testing subsequent to rejection of the equipment for failure to comply with specification requirements will be at the expense of the Contractor. Deductions to cover the cost of that testing will be made from any moneys due or which may become due the Contractor under the contract. The Contractor will be notified when testing of the equipment has been completed and it shall be the Contractor‘s responsibility to deliver the equipment to the site of the work or, at the Contractor‘s request and the Agency’s convenience, the Agency will pack and ship the equipment to the Contractor or to the site of work. The sum of $100 or the actual cost of packing and shipping, whichever amount is greater, will be deducted, for each unit of equipment shipped by the Agency, from any moneys due to the Contractor under the contract. 209-2.148 Field Testing. Prior to start of functional testing, the Contractor shall petform the following 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 196 of 414 tests on all circuits, in the presence of the Engineer. 209-2.148(1) Continuity. Each circuit shall be tested for continuity. 209-2.148(2) Ground. Each circuit shall be tested for grounds. 209-2.148(3) Insulation Resistance. An insulation resistance test at 500 volts DC shall be made on each circuit between the circuit and a ground. The insulation resistance shall not be less than 10 Mi2 on all circuits, except for inductive loop detector circuits which shall have an insulation resistance value of not less than 100 MR. The insulation resistance test shall not be performed on magnetometer sensing elements. Splices in the pull box adjacent to the magnetometer sensing elements shall not be made prior to performing the test on the lead-in conductors between the pull box and the controller cabinet field terminals. 209-2.14C Functional Testing. Attention is directed to Section 209-1.06, "Scheduling of Work," regarding requirements for test periods. A functional test shall be made in which it is demonstrated that each and every part of the system functions as specified. The functional test for each new or modified system shall consist of not less than 5 days of continuous, satisfactory operation. If unsatisfactory performance of the system develops, the condition shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated until the 5 days of continuous, satisfactory operation is obtained. Turn-on of new or modified traffic signals shall be made only after all traffic signal circuits have been thoroughly tested as specified above. Except for new or modified portions of existing lighting circuits and sign illumination systems, the Agency will maintain the system or systems during the test period and will pay the cost of electrical energy for the operation of all of the facilities that are undergoing testing. The cost of any necessary maintenance performed by the Agency on new circuits or on the portions of existing circuits modified under the contract, except electrical energy, shall be at the Contractor's expense and wlll be deducted from any moneys due, or to become due, the Contractor. A shutdown of the electrical system resulting from damage caused by public traffic, from a power interruption or from unsatisfactory performance of Agency-furnished materials shall not constitute discon- tinuity of the functional test. 209-2.1 5 Galvanizing. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with the provisions in Section 21 0-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Control Facilities," except that cabinets may be constructed of material galvanized prior to fabrication in conformance with the specifications of ASTM Designation: A525 or A525M, Coating Designation G 90, in which case all cut or damaged edges shall be painted with at least 2 applications of approved unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to the requirements in Section 210-3.5, "Repair of Damaged Zinc Coating." Aerosol cans shall not be used. Other types of protective coating shall be approved by the Engineer prior to installation. Iron or steel pipe standards and pipe mast arms shall be hotdip galvanized after fabrication in conformance with the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 53. Galvanized surfaces shall have spurs removed. Tie-rods, bolts, nuts, washers, clamps and other miscellaneous ferrous parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the provisions in Section 210-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Control Facilities." Not less than 250 mm (lo') of the upper end of the anchor bolts, anchor bars, or studs, and all nuts and washers shall be galvanized in accordance with the provisions in Section 210-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Control Facilities." After galvanizing, the bolt threads shall accept galvanized standard nuts without requiring tools or causing removal of protective coatings. Galvanizing of existing materials in an electrical installation will not be required. . 209-2.16 Painting. Painting of electrical equipment and materials shall conform to the provisions in Section 31 0, "Painting," with the following additions and modifications. Paint materials for electrical installations, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to the provisions in Section 210, "Paint and @% 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 197 of 414 Protective Coatings." Factory or shop cleaning methods for metals will be acceptable if equal to the methods specified herein. In lieu of the temperature and seasonal restrictions for painting as provided in Section 310, 'Painting," paint may be applied to equipment and materials for electrical installations at any time permitted by the Engineer. All ungalvanized ferrous surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned prior to applying the prime coat. Blast cleaning will not be required. If an approved prime coat has been applied by the manufacturer, and it is in good condition, the first primer application by the Contractor will not be required. Existing equipment to be painted in the field, including Agency-furnished equipment, shall be washed with a stiff bristle brush using a solution of water containing 7.5 ml. of heavy duty detergent powder per liter (2 tablespoons per gallon). After rinsing, all surfaces shall be wire brushed with a coarse, cup shaped, powerdriven brush to remove all poorly bonded paint, rust, scale, corrosion, grease or dirt. Any dust or residue remaining after wire brushing shall also be removed prior to priming. Immediately after cleaning, all galvanized surfaces and all non-ferrous metal surfaces shall be coated with one application of Primer (Wash) Pre-Treatment, Section 21 0-1.5 or wash primer conforming to the requirements of Military Specification MIL-P-15328D. The wash primer shall be applied by spraying or brushing to produce a uniform wet film on the surface. Galvanized equipment and wood poles for traftic signal or flashing beacon installations shall not be painted unless specified in the special provisions or shown on the plans painted. New galvanized metal surfaces to be painted in the field shall be cleaned as specified for existing equipment before applying the prime coats specified. Wire brushing of new galvanized surfaces will not be required. After erection, all exterior surfaces shall be examined for damaged primer and the damaged surfaces shall be cleaned and spot coated with primer. Galvanized metal guard posts shall not be painted. Painting of Agency-furnished controller cabinets will not be required. Types II and Ill steel service equipment enclosures shall be painted with a polymeric or an enamel coating system conforming to Color No. 14672 (light green) of Federal Standard 5958. All coatings shall be commercially smooth, substantially free of flow lines, paint washout, streaks, blisters, and other defects that would impair serviceability or detract from general appearance. The coatings shall comply with the following requirements: 1) Coating Hardness - The finish shall have a pencil lead hardness of HB minimum using an Eagle Turquoise pencil. 2) Salt Spray Resistance - The undercutting of the film of the coating system shall not exceed 3 mm ('/a'') average, from lines scored diagonally and deep enough to expose the base metal, after 250 hours exposure in a salt spray cabinet in accordance with ASTM Designation: B I1 7. 3) Adherence - There shall be no coating loss when tested by California Test 645. Compliance of the coating system to the above requirements may be determined by the application of the coating, to 100 mm (4) x 200 mm (8") x 0.6 mm (0.0236") test specimens of the same material as the cabinets, in the same manner as applied to the cabinets. A Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished in accordance with the provisions of Section 4-1.5, "Certification," certifying that the coating system furnished complies in all respects with these re- quirements. Interior of metal signal visors, louvers and front faces of back plates shall be finished with 2 applications of lusterless black exterior grade latex paint formulated for application to properly prepared metal surfaces, except that factory finish in good condition will be acceptable. Metal signal sections, signal head mountings, brackets and fittings, outside of visors, pedestrian push button housings, pedestrian signal sections and visors, and back faces of back plates, shall be finished with 2 applications of lusterless black or dark olive green exterior grade latex paint formulated for application to properly prepared metal surfaces. Dark olive green color shall match Color Chip No. 68 on file at the CALTRANS Transportation Laboratory. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 198 of 414 Conduit and conduit fittings above ground shall be prepared and finished in the same manner as the adjacent standard or post. Relocated, reset or modified equipment previously finished as specified in this Section 209-2.1 6, except for galvanized standards previously finished with traffic signal yellow enamel, shall be given a spot finishing application on newly primed areas, followed by one finishing application over the entire surface. If any signal faces or mounting brackets are required to be painted under this Section, all signal faces and mounting brackets on the same mounting shall be repainted. Small rusted or repaired areas of relocated or reset galvanized equipment shall be cleaned and painted as provided in Section 21 0-3.6, "Galvanizing for Traffic Control Facilities, "for repairing damaged galvanized surfaces. Equipment number shall be neatly stenciled on the standard or adjacent structure. The number designation will be determined by the Engineer. All paint shall be applied either by hand brushing or by spraying machines in the hands of skilled operators. The work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Engineer resewes the right to require the use of brushes for the application of paint, should the work done by the paint spraying machine prove unsatisfactory or objectionable, as determined by the Engineer. 209-3 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLIES 209-3.01 Controller Assembly. A controller assembly shall consist of a complete mechanism for controlling the operation of traffic signals or other systems, including the controller unit and all necessary auxiliary equipment, mounted in a cabinet. All equipment required to provide the operation shown on the plans and as specified shall be provided. All field conductors No. 12 and smaller shall terminate with spade type terminals. All field conductors No. 10 and larger shall terminate in spade type or ring type terminals. 209-3.02 Type 90 Controller Assembly. Deleted 209-3.03 Model 170 and Model 2070 Controller Assemblies. Model 170 and Model 2070 (Model 170/2070) controller assemblies shall consist of a Model 170, 170E or 2070 controller unit, a wired cabinet and all auxiliary equipment required to control the system as shown on the plans, and as specified in these special provisions. Model 170/2070 controller assemblies shall conform to the require- ments in "Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications," (TEES) and "Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications" (TSCES), issued by the State of California, Department of Transportation, and to all addendums thereto current at the time of project advertising. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the plans, controller assembly cabinets (housing) shall be Type 1 as shown in the TSCES. In addition to the requirements found in TEES and TSCES, Model 170/2070 controller assemblies shall conform to the following: 209-3.04 Controller Cabinets. Unless otherwise specified, controller cabinets for Model 170/2070 controllers shall conform to the following: 1) Controller cabinets shall be fabricated from aluminum sheet per the TSCES. 2) Controller cabinets shall have a single front door equipped with a Best Company lock core and lock. No other manufacturers shall be accepted. 209-3.05 assembly for Model 170/2070 controllers: Cabinet Accessories. The following accessories shall be furnish with each cabinet 1) Controller cabinets shall have a pull-out type document tray. 2) Each cabinet shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture mounted on the inside top of the cabinet near the front edge. Fixture shall be provided with an F15T8, cool white lamp operated from a normal power factor UL or ETL listed ballast. The "on-off switch for the lighting fixture e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 199 of 414 shall be a door-actuated switch that turns the light on when either door is open and off when the doors are closed. 3) An uninterruptible power system (UPS) shall be installed in each cabinet using a swing-away type mounting. The UPS shall be Clary SP 1000 series or approved equal and shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of continuous red flash operation at intersections using red LED signal indications and provide power conditioning to the controller. 209-4 TRAFFIC SIGNAL FACES AND FllTINGS 209-4.01 Vehicle Signal Faces. Each vehicle signal face shall be of the adjustable type conforming to the provisions in Institute of Traffic Engineers (ITE) Publication: ST-O08B, "Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads." Plastic signal sections shall meet the requirements of California Test 605. Any fracture within the housing assembly, or a deflection of more than 10 degrees in either the vertical or horizontal plane after the wind load has been removed from the front of the signal face, or a deflection of more than 6 degrees in either the vertical or horizontal plane after the wind load has been removed from the back of the signal face will be considered structural failure. Vehicle signal faces, except arrow and "X" faces, shall meet the requirements of California Test 604. Adjustment shall permit rotation of 360 degrees about a vertical axis. The number and type of sections shall be as specified herein or as shown on the plans. Each vehicle signal face shall be installed at the location and mounted in the manner shown on the plans. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, all vehicle signal faces shall contain 3 sections arranged vertically; red- top, yellow-center, green-bottom. All new vehicle signal faces, except programmed visibility type, installed at any one intersection shall be of the same manufacture and of the same material. 209-4.01A Optical Units. Each optical unit for green, yellow and red sections, circular ball or arrow, shall conform to the provisions in Section 209-4.02, 'Light Emitting Diode Signal Module". 209-4.01 B Signal Sections. Each signal section housing shall be structural plastic. Signal sections shall conform to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Maximum height of a signal section shall be 375 mm (143/4y) for each 300 mm (12") section. The housing of each signal section shall be provided with a one-piece, hinged, square-shaped door designed to permit access to the section for relamping without the use of tools. The door shall be secured by a method that will hold the door closed during the loading tests specified in this Section. The lens shall be mounted in the door in a watertight manner. All exposed hardware, such as hinge pins and door latching devices, shall be Type 304 or 305 stainless steel. All interior screws and fittings shall be stainless steel. An opening shall be provided in the top and bottom of each signal section to receive 40 mm (11/2") pipe. The 300 mm (12') signal sections of an individual manufacturer shall be capable of joining to form a signal face in any combination. This interchangeability is not required between metal and plastic signal sections. All gaskets, including those for the door, lens, reflector and lamp holder, shall be made of a material that is not affected when installed in a signal section with a metal or plastic housing that is operated continuously for 336 hours. 9. - 209-4.01B(P) Plastic Signal Sections. Housings shall be either molded in one piece or shall be fabricated from 2 or more pieces joined into a single piece. The plastic shall have ultraviolet stability, shall be unaffected by the heat of the lamp used and shall be self-extinguishing. Housings and doors shall be colored throughout and shall be black matching Color No. 17038, 27038 or 37038 of Federal Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 200 of 414 Standard 5958. Each section in a face shall be joined to the adjacent section by one of the following methods: 1. A minimum of 4 machine screws for 300 mm (12") sections, installed through holes near the front and rear of the housings. Machine screws shall be No. 10 and each shall be provided with a nut, flat washer and lock washer. Two machine screws (each with a nut, flat washer and lock washer) installed through holes near the front of the housings, plus a fastening through the 40 mm (Ii/;) pipe openings. The fastening shall consist of two large flat washers to distribute the load.around the pipe opening and three camage bolts, each with a nut and lock washer. Minimum size of machine screws shall be No. 10. Minimum size of caniage bolt shall be 6 mm ('/4"-20). The supporting section of each signal face supported solely at the top or bottom shall be provided with reinforcement. Reinforcement plates shall be either sheet aluminum, galvanized steel, or cast aluminum. Each plate shall be not less than 2.7 mm (0.110") thick and shall have a hole concentric with the 40 mm (11/2") pipe mounting hole in the housing. Sheet aluminum reinforcement plates shall be placed both inside and outside the housing; galvanized steel reinforcement plates shall be placed inside only; and cast aluminum reinforcement plates shall be placed outside only. Reinforcement plates placed outside of the housing shall be finished to match the color of the signal housing and shall be designed to permit the proper serrated coupling between signal face and mounting hardware. A minimum of three No. 10 machine screws shall be installed through holes in the plates and matching holes in the housing. Each screw shall have a round or binder head and shall be provided with a nut and lock washer. Where a signal face is to be supported by a Type MAS side attachment slip-fitter inserted between 2 sections, a spacer or spacers shall be placed between the 2 sections. The vertical dimension of spacers shall permit proper seating of the serrations between the slip-fitter and the 2 sections. Holes in spacers shall align with the front holes in the section housings. In addition to the fastening through the large openings in the housings, the 2 sections shall be joined with at least 2 machine screws through holes near the front of the housings and the spacers, and through matching holes in a reinforcing plate installed in each housing. Machine screws shall be No. 10 minimum size. Spacers shall be made of the same material as the signal housings. Reinforcing plates and machine screws shall be as specified above. Reinforcing plates will not be required where the housing is provided with reinforcing webs connecting the rear of the housing with the top, bottom and sides. Holes for machine screws shall be either cast or drilled during fabrication of the signal section. Each hole shall be surrounded by a 3 mm ('/e") minimum width boss to permit contact between signal sections about the axis of the hole. Each plastic signal face shall be provided with plastic or metal visors. Plastic signal faces which require backplates shall be provided with plastic backplates. A serrated nylon washer shall be inserted between each plastic signal section and a metal mounting assembly. Each washer shall be not less than 4 mm (3/16") nor more than 6 mm ('Idy) thick. Serrations shall match those on the signal section and the mounting assembly. 2. ' 2094.01C Electrical Components. Lamp receptacles and wiring shall conform to ITE Publications: ST- 0088. The metal portion of the medium base lamp socket shall be brass, copper or phosphor bronze. Each lamp receptacle shall be wired with a conductor, connected to the shell of the receptacle, with black insulation or with insulation color-coded. These conductors shall, in turn, be connected to a terminal block mounted inside at the back of the housing. The terminal block shall have sufficient screw type terminals or NEMA type tab connectors to terminate all field conductors and lamp conductors independently. The terminals to which field conductors are attached shall be permanently identified or conductors shall be color coded to facilitate field wiring. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 201 of 414 Lamp receptacle conductors shall be No. 18 or larger, 6004, appliance wiring material (AWM), with 0.75 mm (30 mil) thickness insulation rated 105OC or with insulation that conforms to the requirements in Military Specification MIL-W-l6878D, Type 6, with vinyl nylon jacket rated 115°C. The manufacturer's name or trademark, conductor size, insulation type letter designation and temperature rating shall be marked on the insulation or a Certificate of Compliance conforming to the provisions in Section 6-1.07, "Certification of Compliance", shall be submitted by the manufacturer with each shipment of traffic signal faces. 209-4.01D Visors. Each signal section shall be provided with a removable visor conforming to ITE Publication: ST-0086. Visors are classified, on the basis of lens enclosure, as full circle, tunnel (bottom open), or cap (bottom and lower sides open). Unless otherwise specified, visors shall be the full circle type. The visor shall be a minimum of 240 mm (91/2") in length for nominal 300 mm (12") round lenses, with a downward tilt between 3 degrees and 7 degrees. Plastic visors shall conform to the following: 1. Visors shall be either formed from sheet plastic or assembled from one or more injection, rotational or blow molded plastic sections. 2. Sections shall be joined using thermal, chemical or ultrasonic bonding or with aluminum rivets and washers permanently colored to match the visor. 3. Visors shall be of black homogeneous colored material with a lusterless finish. 4. Each visor shall be secured to its door in a manner that will prevent its removal or permanent deformation when the wind load specified in California Test 605 for plastic visors is applied to the side of the visor for 24 hours. 209-4.02 Light Emitting Diode Signal Modules. Each light emitting diode (LED) signal module shall be Type 2 and consist of an assembly that utilizes light emitting diodes as the light source in lieu of an incandescent lamp for use in traffic signal sections and conform to the following: 1. Each Type 2 LED signal module shall be designed to mount in the standard lamp socket normally used with an incandescent lamp. When a Type 2 LED signal module is used, a standard traffic signal lens in the doorframe shall be used or, at the option of the Contractor, the standard lens may be replaced with a translucent or clear lens to seal the signal section from weather. The installation of a Type 2 LED signal module shall not require any modification to the standard lamp socket or reflector. 2. LED signal modules shall be from the same manufacturer, and each size shall be the same model. 3. Type 2 LED signal modules shall be a sealed unit containing all components necessary for operation except, at the option of the Contractor, use of a corresponding lens mounted in the doorframe will be allowed. 4. Type 2 LED signal modules shall not require a specific mounting orientation or have a variance in light output, pattern or visibility for any mounting orientation. 5. The LEDs utilized in the modules shall be Aluminum Indium Gallium Phosphide (AllnGaP) technology for red indications and Gallium Nitride (GaN) technology for green indications, and shall be the ultra bright type rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation from -4OOC to +74OC. 6. The individual LEDs shall be wired such that a catastrophic failure of one LED will result in the loss of not more than 5 percent of the signal module light output. The failure of an individual LED in a string shall only result in the loss of that LED, not the entire string or indication. . . 209-4.02A Physical and Mechanical Requirements. LED traffic signal modules shall be designed as retrofit replacements for existing optical units of signal lamps and shall not require special tools for installation. LED signal modules shall fit into existing traffic signal section housings without any modification to the housing. Contract No. 3907 Page 202 of 414 Installation of a LED signal module shall only require the removal of the optical unit components, Le., lens, lamp module, gaskets, and reflector; shall be weather tight and fit securely in the housing; and shall connect directly to electrical wiring. The arrow modules shall meet or exceed specifications stated in Section 9.01 of the ITE Publication: Equipment and Materials Standards, Chapter 2 (Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads) for arrow indications. The LEDs shall be spread evenly across the illuminated portion of the arrow area. 2094.02A(I) LED Signal Module Lens. The LED signal module shall be capable of replacing the optical unit. The lens may be tinted or may use transparent film or materials with similar characteristics to enhance ON/OFF contrasts. The use of tinting or other materials to enhance ONlOFF contrasts shall not affect chromaticity and shall be uniform across the face of the lens. If a polymeric lens is used, a surface coating or chemical surface treatment shall be used to provide front surface abrasion resistance. 209-4.02A(2) Environmental Requirements. The LED signal module shall be rated for use in the operating temperature range of -4OOC (-4OOF) to +74OC (+165OF). The LED signal module shall be protected against dust and moisture intrusion per the requirements of NEMA Standard 250-1 991 for Type 4 enclosures to protect all internal components. The LED signal module lens shall be UV stabilized and shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet (direct sunlight) exposure for a minimum period of 60 months without exhibiting evidence of deterioration. 209-4.02A(3) Construction. The LED signal module shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly for installation into an existing traffic signal housing. The power supply for the LED signal module shall be integral to the unit. The assembly and manufacturing process for the LED signal assembly shall be designed to assure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from high winds and other sources. 2094.02A(4) Materials. Material used for the lens and signal module construction shall conform to ASTM specifications for the materials where applicable. Enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the signal module shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. The lens of the signal module is excluded from this requirement. 2094.02A(5) Module Identificafion. Each LED signal module shall have the manufacturer's name, trademark, and other necessary identification permanently marked on the back of the module. Each individual LED signal module shall be identified with serial number for warranty purposes. The following operating characteristics shall be identified: rated voltage, power consumption, and volt-ampere. 209-4.028 Photometric Requirements. The minimum initial luminous intensity values for the modules shall be as stated in Table 209-4.028(1) and Table 209-4.026(3) at 25OC. The modules shall meet or exceed the illumination values as shown in Table 209-4.028(2) and Table 209-4.028(4), throughout the useful life based on normal use in a traffic signal operation over the operating temperature range. The measured chromaticity coordinates of the modules shall conform to the chromaticity requirements of Table 209-4.026(5), throughout the useful life over the operating temperature range. The LED signal modules tested or submitted for testing shall be representative of typical average production units. Circular modules shall be tested according to California Test No. 604. All optical testing shall be performed with the module mounted in a standard traffic signal section but without a visor or hood attached to the signal section. The LEDs shall be spread evenly across the illuminated portion of the arrow area. Arrow modules shall be tested according to California Test No. 3001. All optical testing shall be performed with the module mounted in a standard traffic signal section but without a visor or hood attached to the signal section. Each LED arrow signal section indication shall provide a minimum average luminous intensity as listed in Table 209-4.028(3). All measurements shall be performed at rated operating voltage of 120 VAC. 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 203 of 414 Table 209-4.028(1) 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 204 of 414 Maintained Minimum Intensities for Circular Indications (in cd) I Red Minimum Initial Intensities for Arrow Indications (in cdlm2) I Red I Yellow & Green Arrow Indication 5,500 11,000 Yellow & Green Minimum Maintained Intensities for Arrow Indications (in cdlm2) Arrow Indication 5,500 1 1,000 Red Yellow Green 41r 7/31/02 Y: not greater than 0.308, or less than 0.998-x Y: not less than 0.41 1, nor less than 0.995-x, nor less than 0.452 Y: not less than 0.506-0.519x, nor less than 0.1 50+1.068x, nor more than 0.730-x Contract No. 3907 Page 205 of 414 209-4.02C Electrical. Maximum power consumption requirements for LED signal modules shall be as listed in Table 209-4.026. Table 2094.026 Maximum Power Consumption (in Watts) LED signal modules shall operate from a 60 Hz *3 Hz AC line over a voltage ranging from 80 volts to 135 volts. The LED circuitry shall prevent perceptible flicker over the voltage range specified above. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous intensity of the indications. Rated voltage for all measurements shall be 120 volts. The signal module on-board circuitry shall include voltage surge protection to withstand high-repetition noise transients as stated in Section 2.1.6 of NEMA Standard TS-2, 1992. LED signal modules shall be operationally compatible with currently used controller assemblies (solid state load switches, flashers, and conflict monitors). When a current of 20 ma AC (or less) is applied to the unit, the voltage read across the two leads shall be 15 VAC or less. LED signal modules and associated on-board circuitry must meet Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise. The LED signal module shall provide a power factor of 0.90 or greater. Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by an LED signal module shall not exceed 20 percent. 209-4.02D Quality Assurance. LED signal modules shall be manufactured in accordance with a vendor quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of LED signal modules built to meet this Specification. QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years. LED signal module designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification. 2094.02D(l) Manufacturer's Serial Numbers. Identification of the component and sub-assembly level may be required if the reliability and performance of the module must be traceable to the original item manufacturers of the module components and subassemblies. 209-4.0213(2) Production Quality Assurance Testing. The following Production Quality Assurance tests shall be performed on each new LED signal module prior to shipment. Failure to meet requirements of any of these tests shall be cause for rejection. The manufacturer for warranty purposes shall retain test results for seven years. Each LED signal module shall be tested for rated initial intensity after bum-in. Bum-in period shall consist of each signal module being energized at rated voltage for a 30 minutes stabilization period before the measurement is made. A single point measurement with a correlation to the intensity requirements of Table 209-4.028(1) for circular modules may be used. The ambient temperature for this measurement shall be +25OC (+77OF). Each LED signal module not meeting minimum luminous intensity requirements per Table 2094.028(1) or Table 209-4.026(3) shall be a cause for rejection. . Each LED signal module shall be tested for required power factor after bum-in. Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 206 of 414 Each LED signal module shall be measured for current flow in amperes after bum-in. The measured current values shall be compared against current values resulting from design qualification measurements under "Design Qualification Testing". The current flow shall not exceed the rated value. The measured ampere values with rated voltage shall be recorded as volt-ampere (VA) on the product labels. Each LED signal modules shall be visually inspected for any exterior physical damage or assembly anomalies. Careful attention shall be paid to the surface of the lens to ensure there are no scratches (abrasions), cracks, chips, discoloration, or other defects. Any such defects shall be cause for rejection. 209402D(3) Design Qualification Testing. Design Qualification testing shall be performed on new LED signal module designs, and when a major design change has been implemented on an existing design. The minimum sample quanti of LED signal modules shall be as stated for each test. Failure to meet requirements for any of these tests shall be cause for rejection. A random sample of six LED signal modules shall be energized for a minimum of 24 hours, at 100 percent on-time duty cycle, in a temperature of 74OC (+165OF) before performing any design qualification testing. Any failure within an LED signal module after bum-in shall be cause for rejection. 209402D(4) Rated Initial Luminous Intensity. After bum-in, a sample of six LED signal modules shall be tested for rate initial intensity per the requirements of "Photometric Requirements". Before measurement, each LED signal module shall be energized at rated voltage, with 100 percent on-time duty cycle, for a time period of 30 minutes. The ambient temperature for this measurement shall be 25OC (77OF). The test results for this test shall have recorded the current voltage, total harmonic distortion (THD), and power factor (PF) associated with each measurement. 209-4.02D(5) Chromaticity (Color). A sample of two LED signal modules shall be measured for chromaticity (color) per the requirements of "Chromaticity requirements under "Photometric Requirements." A spectra radiometer shall be used for this measurement. The ambient temperature for this measurement shall be 25OC (77OF). 2094.02D(6) Electrical. A sample of six LED signal modules shall be measured for current flow in amperes. The measured current values shall be used for quality comparison of Production Quality Assurance current measurement on production modules. A sample of six LED signal modules shall be measured for power factor. A commercially available power factor meter may be used to perform this measurement. A sample of six LED modules shall be measured for total harmonic distortion. A commercially available total harmonic distortion meter may be used to perform this measurement. A sample of six LED signal modules shall be tested per the requirements of "Electrical", with reference to Class A emission limits referenced in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15. A sample of six LED signal modules shall be tested for compatibility with the controller unit, conflict monitor, and load switch. Each signal module shall be connected to any AC voltage supply between the values of 80 and 135 VAC. The AC voltage developed across each LED signal module so connected shall not exceed 10 volts rms as the input AC voltage is vaned from 80 volts to 135 volts rms. -A sample of six LED modules shall be tested for transient immunity per "Electrical" using the procedure described in NEMA Standard TS-1992. ' Mechanical vibration testing shall be performed on a sample of three LED signal modules per MIL-STD- 883, Test Method 2007, using three 4 minute cycles along each x, y, and z axis, at a force of 2.5 Gs, with @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 207 of 414 a frequency sweep from 2 Hz to 120 Hz. The loosening of the lens, of any internal components, or other physical damage shall be cause for rejection. _- Temperature cycling shall be performed on a sample of three LED signal modules per MILSTD-883, Test method 1010. The temperature range shall be per "Environmental Requirements". A minimum of 20 cycles shall be performed with a 30 minute transfer time between temperature extremes and a 30 minute dwell time at each temperature. Signal under test shall be non-operating. Failure of a module to function properly or any evidence of cracking of the module lens or housing after temperature cycling shall be cause for rejection. Moisture resistance testing shall be performed on a sample of three LED signal modules per NEMA Standard 250-1991 for Type 4 enclosures. Any evidence of internal moisture after testing shall be cause for rejection. 209-4.02D(7) Certificate of Compliance. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance from the manufacturer in accordance with the provisions of Section 6-1.07, "Certificates of Compliance," of the Caltrans Standard Specifications. The certificate shall certify that the LED signal modules comply with the requirements of these specifications. The certificate shall also include a copy of all applicable test reports on the LED signal modules. 209-4.03 Directional Louvers. Where shown on the plans, directional louvers shall be furnished and installed in signal visors. Directional louvers shall be so constructed as to have a snug fit in the signal visors. The outside cylinder shall be constructed of 0.75 mm (0.030") nominal thickness, or thicker, sheet steel and the vanes shall be constructed of 0.4 mm (0.016") nominal thickness, or thicker, sheet steel or the cylinder and vanes shall be constructed of 5052-H32 aluminum alloy of equivalent thickness. Dimensions of louvers and arrangements of vanes shall be as shown on the plans. 209-4.04 Backplates. Where shown on the plans, backplates shall be furnished and installed on signal faces. Dimensions, materials and installation details shall be as shown on the plans. No background light shall show between the backplate and the signal face or between sections. Plastic backplates shall be supplied and either formed from sheet plastic or assembled from extruded, molded or cast sections. Sections shall be factory joined using (1) an appropriate solvent cement, (2) aluminum rivets and washers painted or permanently colored to match the backplate, or (3) No. 10 machine screws with washer, lock washer and nut, painted to match the backplate. Backplates shall be of black homogeneous colored material with a lusterless finish. Each plastic backplate shall be secured to the plastic signal face in a manner that will prevent its removal or permanent deformation when the wind-load test is applied to either the front or the rear of the signal face. The permanent deformation of any portion of the backplate shall not exceed 5 degrees forward or backward after the wind loading has been applied for 24 hours. When a plastic backplate requires field assembly, it shall be joined with at least four No. 10 machine screws at each field assembled joint. Each machine screw shall be provided with an integral or captive flat washer, a hexagonal head slotted for a standard screwdriver, and either (1) a locking nut with an integral or captive flat washer, or (2) a nut, flat washer and lockwasher. Machine screws, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel. Where a metal backplate consists of 2 or more sections, the sections shall be fastened with rivets or with aluminum bolts peened after assembly to prevent loosening. In lieu of the screws shown on the plans, plastic backplates may be fastened to the plastic signal face using self-threading No. 10 stainless steel screws. The screws shall have an integral or captive flat washer and a hexagon head slotted for a standard screwdriver, and shall be stainless steel. . 209-4.05 Programmed Visibility Vehicle Signal Faces. Each programmed visibility signal face and the installation thereof shall conform to the provisions in Sections 209-4.01, "Vehicle Signal Faces," 209- 4.03, 'Backplates," and 209-4.06, "Signal Mounting Assemblies," except that the provisions in Section 209-4.01A, "Optical Units," shall not apply. Each programmed visibility signal section shall provide a nominal 300 mm (12") diameter circular or arrow indication. Color and arrow configuration shall conform G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 208 of 414 to ITE Publication: ST-008B. Each section shall be provided with a cap visor. Each signal section shall be provided with an adjustable connection that permits incremental tilting from 0 to 10 degrees above or below the horizontal while maintaining a common vertical axis through couplers and mountings. Terminal connection shall permit external adjustment about the mounting axis in 5 degree increments. The signal shall be mountable with ordinary tools and capable of being serviced without tools. Adjustment shall be preset at 4 degrees below the horizontal, unless otherwise specified. The visibility of each programmed visibility signal face shall be capable of adjustment or programming within the face. When programmed, each signal face's indication shall be visible only in those areas or lanes to be controlled, except that during dusk and darkness a faint glow to each side will be permissible. Prior to programming, each signal section with a yellow indication shall provide a minimum luminous intensity of 2500 cd on the optical axis, and a maximum intenslty of 100 cd at 15 degrees horizontal from the axis. Each signal section with a yellow indication shall be capable of having its visibility programmed to achieve the following luminous intensities: a minimum of 2500 cd on the optical axis, a maximum of 100 cd at from 0.5 to 2 degrees horizontal from the axis and a maximum of 10 cd at from 2 to 15 degrees horizontal from the axis. Under the same conditions, the intensities of the red indication and the green indication shall be at least 19 and 38 percent, respectively, of the yellow indication. Each signal face or each signal section shall include integral means for regulating its luminous intensity between limits in proportion to the individual background luminance. Lamp intensity shall not be less than 97 percent of uncontrolled intensity at 10 000 Ix, and shall reduce to 15 k2 percent of maximum intensity at less than 10 Ix. The dimming device shall operate over an applied voltage range of 95 to 130 V, 60 Hz and a temperature range of -40°C to 74°C. The Contractor shall program the head as recommended by the manufacturer and as directed by the Engineer. 209-4.06 Pedestrian Signal Faces. Message symbols for pedestrian signal faces shall be white WALKING PERSON and Portland orange UPRAISED HAND conforming to the requirements of the Institute of Transportation Engineers Standards: "Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications" and the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." The height of each symbol shall be not less than 250 mm (10) and the width of each symbol shall be not less than 165 mm (6'/$). The luminance of the UPRAISED HAND symbol shall be 3750 cd/m2 (1,100 foot-lamberts), minimum, and the luminance of the WALKING PERSON symbol shall be 5300 cd/m2 (1,550 foot-lamberts), minimum, when tested in accordance with California Test 606. The uniformity ratio of an illuminated symbol shall not exceed 4 to 1 between the highest luminance area and the lowest luminance area. The luminance difference between a nonilluminated symbol and the background around the symbol shall be less than 30 percent when viewed with the front screen in place and at a low sun angle. Brightness measurements for signals designed for an incandescent lamp will be made when the signal is equipped with an A-21 traffic signal lamp operated at a voltage to produce 665 lumens. Each housing, including the front screen, shqll have maximum overall dimensions of 470 mm (181/2") width, 483 mm (19") height and 292 mm (11 /2") depth. All new pedestrian signal faces installed at any one intersection shall be the same make and type. Each pedestrian signal face shall be installed at the location and mounted in the manner shown on the plans. 209-4.06A Types. Pedestrian signal faces shall be Type A and shall conform to the following: Each Type A signal shall consist of a housing, twocolor message plate, a reflector assembly, two light emitting diode modules conforming to the provisions in Section 209-4.07, "Light Emitting Diode Pedestrian Signal Modules", with sockets and a front screen. Each message plate shall be one piece and shall be made 4.7 mm (3/16") tempered glass. The symbols shall be applied to the inside smooth surface of the message plate. Each reflector assembly shall consist of a double reflector or 2 single reflectors. Each reflector shall be made of either aluminum or plastic. All reflectors shall conform to the provisions in Institute of Traffic Engineers Publication: ST-008B, "Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads." Plastic reflectors shall consist of molded or vacuum-formed plastic with a vacuumdeposited aluminum reflecting surface. The plastic material shall not distort when the reflector is used with the lamp of the wattage normally furnished with the signal. In addition, the UL nonmechanical loading temperature of the material shall exceed, by at least 10°C, the maximum temperature in the signal section with the lamp "ON" and measured in an ambient air temperature of 25°C in accordance with UL Publication UL 746B. Each completed reflector shall, when operated with the appropriate lamp and lens, provide the message brightness specified. @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 209 of 414 . 209-4.068 Front Screen. The front screen provided on each Type A signal shall have a 38 mm (1'/2") deep eggcrate or Z-crate type screen of 0.8 mm (0.03') nominal thickness polycarbonate. The screening shall be mounted in a frame constructed of 1.0 mm (0.04") minimum thickness polycarbonate. The screen shall be installed parallel to the face of the message plate and shall be held in place by the use of stainless steel screws. , * The front screen shall not fracture, separate at the welds, or compress more than 3 mm ('/a") when a 75 mm (3") diameter, 1.8-kg (41b.) steel ball is dropped onto the screen from a height of 1.2 m (4') above the screen. The screen will be lying in a horizontal position and supported on its edges for this test. The . message plate will be removed from the pedestrian signal housing, when the pedestrian housing is used to support the front screen during the test, so there will be no back support for the screen. The screen and frame shall be fabricated from aluminum anodized flat black, or finished with lusterless black exterior grade latex paint formulated for application to properly prepared metal surfaces, or shall be fabricated from flat black plastic. Alternate methods of screening may be substituted for the above screens provided that the results are at least equal to those obtained with the above specified screens as determined by the Engineer. 209-4.06C Housing. Pedestrian signal housings shall conform to the provisions in Section 209-4.01 B, "Signal Sections." 209-4.06E Finish. The exterior of each housing and visor and the interior of visors shall be painted in accordance with the provisions in Section 209-2.16, "Painting." 209-4.06F Control. All pedestrian signals shall be capable of being controlled by the solid-state switching devices specified for traffic signal controller assemblies. 209-4.06G Terminal Blocks. Each pedestrian signal face shall be provided with a light duty terminal block conforming to the provisions in Section 209401 C, "Electrical Components." All field wiring shall connect to this terminal block. 209-4.07 Light Emitting Diode Pedestrian Signal Modules For Type A pedestrian signal faces, the pedestrian signal face "Upraised Hand" & "Walking Person" module shall utilize light emitting diode. Each light emitting diode (LED) pedestrian signal face "Upraised Hand" & "Walking Person" module shall consist of an assembly that utilizes light emitting diodes as the light source in lieu of an incandescent lamp for use in pedestrian signal faces and shall conform to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. LED Pedestrian signal face "Upraised Hand" & "Walking Person" module shall be designed to mount in the standard existing Type "A" Housing. Pedestrian signal face modules shall be designed to mount behind or replace the existing face plate of existing Type "A" housing as specified by the requirements of the ITE Standards: "Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications" and the MUTCD. The design of the modules shall require a specific mounting orientation. LED pedestrian signal module used on this project shall be from the same manufacturer. The circuit board and power supply shall be contained inside the module. Circuit boards shall conform to Chapter 1, Section 6 of the "Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications". LED pedestrian signal modules shall fit into the existing type "A" housing and shall not require a specific mounting orientation or have a variance in light output, pattern or visibility for any mounting orientation. The LEDs for "Upraised Hand" symbol shall utilize AllnGaP technology and shall be the ultra bright type rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation from 40°C to 74OC. The individual LEDs shall be wired such that a catastrophic failure of one LED will result in the loss of not more then 5 percent of the signal module light output. The failure of an individual LED in a string shall only result in the loss of that LED, not the entire string or indication. G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 210 of 414 7. The LED ped modules tested or submitted for testing shall be representative of typical average production units. LED ped modules shall be tested according to California Test No. 610 and as described herein. All optical testing shall be performed with the module mounted in a standard Type "A" Pedestrian Housing but without a visor or hood attached to the housing. 8. The luminance of the UPRAISED HAND symbol shall be 3750 cd/m2 minimum. The color of UPRAISED HAND should be Portland orange conforming to the requirements of the institute of Transportation Engineers Standards: "Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications" and the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." The height of each symbol shall be not less than 250 mm and the width of each symbol shall not be less than 165 mm. 9. The luminance of the WALKING PERSON symbol shall be 5300 cd/m2 minimum. Thecolor of WALKING PERSON should be White conforming to the requirements of the Institute of Transportation Engineers Standards: "Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications" and the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." The height of each symbol shall be not less than 250 mm and the width of each symbol shall not be less than 165 mm. 10. The uniformity ratio of an illuminated symbol shall not exceed 4 to 1 between the highest luminance area and the lowest luminance area. 11. LED ped module shall be rated for a minimum useful life of 48 months and shall maintain not less than 85 percent of 3750 cd/m2 for UPRAISED HAND & 5300 cd/m2 for WALKING PERSON after 48 months of continuous use in a traffic signal operation over the temperature range of -4OOC to +74OC. 209-4.07A Physical And Mechanical Requirements. LED ped module traffic signal modules shall be designed as retrofit replacements for existing optical units of signal lamps and shall not require special tools for installation. LED ped module shall fit into existing traffic signal section housings built to the VTCSH without modification to the housing. Installation of an LED ped module shall require the removal of the lens, reflector and lamps. 2094.07A(l) Environmental Requirements. LED ped modules shall be rated for use in the operating temperature range of 40°C (-4OOF) to +74OC (+165OF). 209-4.07A(2) Construction. LED ped modules shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on- site assembly for installation into an existing Type "A" housing. The power supply for the LED ped module shall be integral to the unit. The assembly and manufacturing process for the LED ped module assembly shall be designed to assure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from high winds and other sources. 209-4.07A(3) Materials. Material used for the LED ped module construction shall conform to ASTM specifications for the materials where applicable. Enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the LED ped module shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. 209-4.07A(4) Modute Identification. Each LED ped module shall have the manufacturer's name, trademark, and other necessary identification permanently marked on the back of the module. Each individual LED ped module shall be identified for warranty purposes. The following operating characteristics shall be identified: rated voltage, power consumption, and volt-ampere. If a specific mounting orientation is required, each module shall have prominent and permanent marking(s) for correct indexing and orientation within a signal housing. The marking shall consist of an up -arrow, or the word "UP" or "TOP". Type A Pedestrian Signal Face (Combination Raised Handwalking Person section) housing without the reflector shall be utilized for LED combo modules. 209-4.078 Photometric Requirements. An LED ped module shall meet at least 85 percent of the minimum 3750 cd/m2 for UPRAISED HAND & 5300 cd/m2 for WALKING PERSON while operating throughout the operating temperature range of 4O0C to 74OC. The minimum initial luminous intensity values for UPRAISED HAND LED ped modules shall be 3750 cd/m2 at 25OC. The minimum initial - @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 211 of 414 luminous intensity values for WALKING PERSON LED ped modules shall be 5300 cd/m2 at 25OC. The measured Chromaticity coordinates of LED ped modules shall conform to the chromaticity requirements of Section 5.3.2.1 and Figure C of the VTCSH standards. 209-4.07C Electrical. Maximum power consumption requirements for LED signal modules shall be as follows: UPRAISED HAND WALKING PERSON 1o.ow 12.0w 12.0w 15.ow * 209-4.070 Quality Assurance. LED ped modules shall be manufactured in accordance with a vendor quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of LED ped modules built to meet this specification. QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years. LED ped module designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification. 209-4.070(1 ) Manufacturer's Serial Numbers. Identification of the component and sub-assembly level may be required if the reliability and performance of the module must be traceable to the original item manufacturers of the module components and subassemblies. 209-4.07D(2) Production Quality Assurance Testing. The following Production Quality Assurance tests shall be performed on each new LED ped module prior to shipment. Failure to meet requirements of any of these tests shall be cause for rejection. The manufacturer for warranty purposes shall retain test results for seven years. Each LED ped module shall be tested for rated initial intensity after bum-in. Bum-in period shall consist of each signal module being energized at a rated voltage for a 30 minute stabilization period before the measurement is made. Each LED ped module not meeting 3750 cd/m2 for UPRAISED HAND & 5300 cd/m2 for WALKING PERSON luminous intensity requirements shall be cause for rejection. Each ped module shall be tested for required power factor after burn-in. Each LED ped module shall be measured for current flow in amperes after bum-in. The measured current values shall be compared against current values resulting from design qualification measurements under "Design Qualification Testing". The current flow shall not exceed the rated value. The measured ampere values with rated voltage shall be recorded as volt-ampere (VA) on the product labels. Each LED ped module shall be visually inspected for any exterior physical damage or assembly anomalies. Careful attention shall be paid to the surface of the lens to ensure there are no scratches (abrasions), cracks, chips, discoloration, or other defects. Any such defects shall be cause for rejection. 209-4.071)(3) Design Qualification Testing. Design qualification testing shall be performed on new LED ped module designs, and when a major design change has been implemented on an existing design. The minimum sample quantity of LED ped modules shall be as stated for each test. Failure to meet requirements for any of these tests shall be cause for rejection. A random sample of six LED ped modules shall be energized for a minimum of 24 hours, at 100 percent on-time duty cycle, in a temperature of 74OC (+165OF) before performing any design qualification testing. Any failure within an LED ped module after bum-in shall be cause for rejection. 209-4.070(4) Rated Initial Luminous Intensity. After bum-in, a sample of six LED ped modules ' shall be tested for rated initial intensity per the requirements of "Photometric Requirements". Before measurement, each LED ped module shall be energized at rated voltage, with 100 percent on-time duty cycle, for a time period of 30 minutes. The ambient temperature for this measurement shall be 25OC (77OF). The test results for this test shall have recorded the current voltage, total harmonic distortion (THD), and power factor (PF) associated with each measurement. @ 7/32/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 212 of 414 209-4.070(5) Chromaticity (Color). A sample of two LED ped modules shall be measured for chromaticity (color) per the requirements of "Chromaticity requirements under "Photometric Requirements." A spectraradiometer shall be used for this measurement. The ambient temperature for this measurement shall be 25OC (77OF). 209-4.07D(6) Electrical. A sample of six LED ped modules shall be measured for current flow in amperes. The measured current values shall be used for quality comparison of Production Quality Assurance current measurement on production modules. A sample of six LED ped modules shall be measured for power factor. A commercially available power factor meter may be used to perform this measurement. A sample of six LED ped modules be measured for total harmonic distortion. A commercially available total harmonic distortion meter may be used to perform this measurement. A sample of six LED ped modules shall be tested per the requirements of "Electrical", with reference to Class A emission limits referenced in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15. A sample of six LED ped modules shall be tested for compatibility with the controller unit, conflict monitor, and load switch. Each signal module shall be connected to any AC voltage supply between the values of 80 and 135 VAC. The AC voltage developed across each LED ped module so connected shall not exceed 10 volts rms as the input AC voltage is varied from 80 V rms to 135 V rms. A sample of six LED ped modules shall be tested for transient immunity per "Electrical" using the procedure described in NEMA Standard TS-1992. Mechanical vibration testing shall be performed on a sample of three LED ped modules per MIL-STD- 883, Test Method 2007, using three 4 minute cycles along each x, y, and z axis, at a force of 2.5 g, with a frequency sweep from 2 Hz to 120 Hz. The loosening of the lens, of any internal components, or other physical damage shall be cause for rejection. Temperature cycling shall be performed on a sample of three LED ped modules per MIL-STD-883, Test method 1010. The temperature range shall be per "Environmental Requirements". A minimum of 20 cycles shall be performed with a 30 minute transfer time between temperature extremes and a 30 minute dwell time at each temperature. Signal under test shall be non-operating. Failure of a module to function properly or any evidence of cracking of the module lens or housing after temperature cycling shall be cause for rejection. 209-4.07D(7) Certificate of Compliance. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance from the manufacturer in accordance with the provisions of Section 6-1.07, "Certificates of Compliance," of the Standard Specifications. The certificate shall certify that the LED ped modules comply with the requirements of these specifications. The certificate shall also include a copy of all applicable test reports on the LED ped modules. 209-4.07D(8) Guarantee. The Contractor shall guarantee LED ped modules for a period of one year starting on the day after the Engineer accepts the project. Modules that fail during this period shall be replaced at no cost to the State, except that State forces will change out the modules in the field. The replacement modules shall be delivered to the Engineer, or to the Public Works Department at 405 Oak Avenue, within five working days after notification. The failed modules will be made available to the Contractor at the above address at the same time as the replacement is delivered. 209-4.07D(9) Warranty. The manufacturer shall provide a written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for the LED ped modules for a period of 36 months after installation of the v3 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 213 of 414 modules. Replacement modules shall be provided promptly after receipt of modules that have failed at no cost to the State except cost of shipping of the failed modules. All warranty documentation shall be given to the Engineer prior to installation. 209-4.08 Signal Mounting Assemblies. Signal mounting assemblies shall consist of 40 mm (1 1/2") standard weight steel galvanized pipe conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 53, necessary fittings, slip-fitters and terminal compartments. Pipe fittings shall be ductile iron, galvanized steel, aluminum alloy Type AC-846 No. 380, or bronze. Mast arm slip-fitters shall be cast bronze or hot- dip galvanized ductile iron. Post top slip-fitters and terminal compartments shall be cast bronze, Type 356-T6 aluminum or hotdip galvanized ductile iron. After installation, any exposed threads of galvanized pipe brackets and all areas of the brackets damaged by wrench or vise jaws shall be cleaned with a wire brush and painted with 2 applications of approved unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to the requirements in Section 210, "Paint and Protective Coatings." Aerosol cans shall not be used. . Each terminal compartment shall be fitted with a terminal block containing a minimum of 12 poles, each with 2 screw type terminals. Each terminal shall be designed to accommodate at least 5 No. 14 conductors. A cover shall be provided on the compartment to give ready access to the terminal block. Where used to bracket mount signals, the terminal compartment shall be designed to bolt securely to a pole or standard. The horizontal dimension of mounting assembly members between the vertical centerline of the terminal Compartment or slip-fitter and the vertical centerline of each signal face, shall not exceed 280 mm (1 l"), except where required to provide proper signal face alignment or permit pro- gramming of programmed visibility signal faces or when otherwise directed by the Engineer. Each mounting assembly shall be oriented to provide maximum horizontal clearance to the adjacent roadway. All mounting assembly members shall be either plumb or level, symmetrically arranged and securely assembled. Mounting assemblies shall be watertight and free of sharp edges or protrusions which might damage conductor insulation. Construction shall be such as to permit all conductors to be concealed. For post-top mounting of signals, a siip-fitter shall be used. Slipfitter shall fit over a 115 mm (4'/2') outside diameter pipe or tapered standard end. Each slip-fitter shall be provided with cadmium-plated steel set screws, arranged as shown on the plans. Each slip-fitter used to post-top mount signals with brackets shall be provided with an integral terminal compartment. Each mounting assembly shall be provided with positive locking, serrated fittings, which when mated with similar fittings on the signal faces shall prevent faces from rotating. Fittings shall permit fastening at increments of not more than 7 degrees. Signal faces shall not be installed at any intersection until all other signal equipment, including the complete controller assembly, is in place and ready for operation at that intersection, except that the signal faces may be mounted if they are not directed toward traffic or if they are covered. 209-4.09 Flashing Beacons. Each beacon shall consist of a single section traffic signal face, conforming to the provisions in Section 209-4.01, "Vehicle Signal Faces," with yellow or red lens as shown on the plans. The beacon flasher unit shall be independent of the intersection flasher unit. Reflective sheeting for W41 "Signal Ahead" signs, mounted on flashing beacons, shall be prismatic lens reflective sheeting (Diamond Grade or equal). 209-4.09A Backplates. Each beacon shall be provided with a backplate conforming to the requirements in Section 2094.03, "Backplates." 209-4.09B Visors. Each beacon shall be provided with a full circle type visor conforming to the requirements in Section 209-4.01 D, "Visors." 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 214 of 414 209-4.09C Flashing Beacon Control Assembly. Each flashing beacon control assembly shall consist of switches, circuit breakers, terminal blocks, flasher, dimming relay, wiring and electrical components necessary to provide proper operation of the beacons, all housed in a single enclosure. 209-4.09C(l) Enclosure. The enclosure shall be NEMA Type 3R, and shall be provided with dead front panel and a hasp to permit padlocking of the cover. The padlock will be furnished by others. The enclosure shall be hot-dip galvanized or, at the option of the Contractor, shall be provided with a factory applied rust resistant prime coat and finish coat. .209-4.09C(2) Circuit Breakers and Switches. A 15-A circuit breaker shall be installed to control each ungrounded conductor entering the enclosure. A switch to permit manual operation of the sign lighting circuit shall be provided. Switches shall be of the single-hole-mounting toggle type, single-pole, single- throw, rated at 12 A, 120 V. Switches shall be furnished with an indicating nameplate reading "Auto - Test" and shall be connected in parallel with the load contacts of the photoelectric control circuit. A 15-A circuit breaker may be used in place of the toggle switch. 209-4.09C(3) Flasher. The flasher shall meet the requirements of Section 8, "Solid-State Flashers," of NEMA Standards Publication No. TS 1. The flasher shall be a solid-state device with no contact points or moving parts. The flasher shall provide 2 output circuits to permit alternate flashing of signal faces and shall be capable of carrying a minimum of 10 A per circuit at 120 V. 209-4.09C(4) Wiring. Conductors and wiring in the enclosure shall conform to the requirements in Section 209-3.O4Cl "Cabinet Wiring." 209-4.09C(5) Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall be rated at 25 A, 600 V, shall be molded from phenolic or nylon material and shall be the barrier type with plated brass screw terminals and integral type marking strips. 209-4.096(6) Dimming Relay. A heavy duty dimming relay shall be provided to reduce the voltage to the lamps at night. Heavy duty relays shall be designed for continuous duty. Relays shall operate during ambient temperatures from -18°C to 71°C (0" to 160°F). Each relay shall operate in the 8-pin Jones-type socket shown on the plans. Relays shall be provided with double-pole, double-throw contacts. Contact points shall be of fine silver, silver-alloy, or superior alternative material. Contact points and contact arms shall be capable of operation for 250,000 cycles with 20 A of tungsten load per contact at 120 V, 60 Hz AC. Coils shall have a power consumption of 10 V A or less and shall be designed for continuous duty on 120 volts AC. Heavy duty relays shall be enclosed with a removable, clear plastic cover. 209-5 DETECTORS 209-5.01 Vehicle Detectors. Vehicle detectors shall be the type or types shown on the plans. All sensor units, control units, and amplifiers shall meet the requirements of California Test 675. The units shall not be affected by transient voltages when tested in accordance with California Test 667. After a power interruption the units shall return to normal operation within one minute. Each unit shall be provided with a light or meter, for each output circuit, to indicate when the detector is detecting a vehicle. Each detector shall operate over the range of voltages from 100 volts to 135 volts at 60 Hz. Circuitry shall be solid-state except relays with normally closed contacts may be used for the output circuit. Units shall be designed to provide ease of maintenance with easily accessible electronic components. .Each detector shall provide vehicle detection without readjustment from -18°C to 71°C (0" to 160°F). Units shall use printed circuit boards designed to facilitate identification of components. This shall be done by either part identification markings or by providing a pictorial diagram showing physical location and identification of each component. Each printed circuit board shall have the following minimum quality requirements: NEMA FR-4 glass cloth base epoxy resin board, 1.5 mm ('/,$) minimum thickness, organic solder masking and gold plated contacts. lntercomponent wiring shall be copper track with a minimum mass of 600g/m2 (2 OM). Printed circuit design shall be such that components may be @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 215 of 414 removed and replaced without permanent damage to boards or tracks. Splices shall conform to the provisions in Section 209-2.09, 'Wiring." 209-5.01A Inductive Loop Detectors. Inductive loop detectors shall conform to the following: 209-5.01A(I) General. The term "inductive loop detector applies to a complete installation consisting of a loop or group of loops installed in the roadway, as shown on the plans, lead-in cable and a sensor unit with power supply installed in a controller cabinet. 209-5.01A(3) Sensor Unit Construction. "Card" type sensor units shall conform to the requirements in "Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications," issued by the State of California, Department of Transportation, and to all addendums thereto current at the time of project advertising. Shelf mounted sensor units shall conform to the requirements in Section 11 of the NEMA Standards Publication No. TS 1. Capacitors or inductors necessary for loop tuning shall not be mounted external to the sensor unit. 209-5.01A(4) Construction Materials. Conductor for each inductive loop detector shall be continuous and unspliced and shall conform to one of the following: 1. Type 1 loop wire shall be Type RHW-USE neoprene-jacketed or Type USE cross-linked polyethylene insulated, No. 12, stranded copper wire. The minimum insulation thickness at any point shall be 1 .O mm (40 mils). Type 2 loop wire shall consist of a conductor inside of plastic tubing. The conductor shall be Type THWN or Type XHHW, No. 14, stranded copper wire. The tubing shall be polyethylene or vinyl, rated for use at 105"C, and shall be resistant to oil and gasoline. The tubing shall have a maximum outside diameter of 7 mm (0.27') and a minimum wall thickness of 0.71 mm (0.028"). The conduc- tors shall not be spliced inside the tubing. 2. Conductors for loop detector lead-in cable shall be 2 No. 16 (19 x 29) stranded tinned copper. Loop detector lead-in cable shall conform to the calculated cross sectional area of ASTM Designation: B 286, Table 1. The lead-in cable shall conform to one of the following: 1. Type B lead-in cable shall be insulated with 0.5 mm (20 mils) of highdensity polyethylene. The conductors shall be twisted together with at least 6 turns per meter and the twisted pair shall be protected with a copper or aluminum polyester shield. A No. 20, minimum, copper drain wire shall be provided and connected to the equipment ground within the cabinet. The cable shall be provided with a highdensity polyethylene or highdensity polypropylene outer jacket with a nominal thickness of 0.8 mm (35 mils). An amorphous interior moisture penetration barrier of nonhydroscopic polyethylene or polypropylene fillers shall be provided. 2. Type C lead-in cable shall conform to International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA) Specification No. 50-2. A No. 20, minimum, copper drain wire shall be provided and connected to the equipment ground within the cabinet. 209-5.01A(5) Installation Details. Installation and tests shall conform to the details and notes shown on the plans. Unless shown otherwise each loop shall consist of 3 turns of conductor as specified in Section 209-5.01A(4), "Construction Materials." Slots cut in the pavement shall be washed clean, blown out and thoroughly dried before installing conductors. Residue resulting from slot cutting operations shall not be permitted to flow across shoulders or lanes occupied by public traffic and shall be removed from the pavement surface before any residue flows off of the pavement surface. Residue from slot cutting operations shall be disposed of outside the highway right of way in accordance with Section 7-8.1, "Cleanup and Dust Control." After conductors are installed in the slots cut in the pavement, the slots shall be filled with sealant to within 3 mm ('/8") of the pavement surface. The sealant shall be at least 25 mm (1") thick above the top conductor in the saw cut. Before setting, surplus sealant shall be removed from the adjacent road surfaces without the use of solvents. The sealant for filling slots shall conform to the following: Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant.- Hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be in solid form at room temperature and fluid at an application temperature of 190°C (375°F) to 205°C (400°F). Fumes from the Q 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 216 of 414 material shall be non-toxic. Sealant shall be suitable for use in both asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete. Performance characteristics of the cured hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be as per Table 209-5.01A( 5)( B). Cone TABLE 209-5.01 A( 5)( B) CURED HOT-MELT RUBBERIZED ASPHALT Property I Measuring Standard (ASTM I Results 1 Conditions Designation) 25"C, 150 g, 5 s ASTM D 3407, Sec. 5 3.5 mm, max. Flow, 60°C Resilience Penetration I I I ,TM D 3407. Sec. 6 I 5 mm. max. AS __ - - ~ ___ . ,ASTM D 3407, Sec. 8 I 25%, min. I 25°C 1 I Point, Ductility, Flash Point, I I I Softeninn I ASTM D 36 I 82 "C, min. ASTM D 113 300 mm, min. 25"C, 50 mm/min ASTM D 92 288 "C, min. COC, "C I I I Viscosity, I ASTM D 4402 I 2.5-3.5 Pa s I No. 27 Spindle, 20 rpm, Brookfield 1 90"C, I I Thermosel, The hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be melted in a jacketed, double boiler type melting unit. Temperature of the heat transfer medium shall not exceed 245°C (475°F). Application of the hot-melt sealant shall be made with a pressure feed applicator or pour pot. Sealant shall be applied when the pavement surface temperature is greater than 4°C (40°F). Hot-melt sealant shall be packaged in containers clearly marked "Detector Loop Sealant" and specifying the batch and lot number of the manufacturer. Loop conductors shall be installed without splices and shall terminate in the nearest pull box. The loops shall be joined in the pull box in combination of series and parallel so that optimum sensitivity is obtained at the sensor unit. Final splices between loops and lead-in cable shall not be made until the operation of the loops under actual traffic conditions is approved by the Engineer. All loop conductors for each direction of travel for the same phase of a traffic signal system, in the same pull box, shall be spliced to a detector lead-in cable which shall be run from the pull box adjacent to the loop detector to a sensor unit mounted in the controller cabinet. All loop conductors for traffic monitoring shall terminate in a pull box or terminal strip in the traffic monitor station cabinet when a cabinet of that type is installed. Conductors for inductive loop traffic signal and traffic monitoring installations shall be identified and banded, in pairs, by lane, in the pull box adjacent to the loops and near the termination of the conductors in the controller or traffic monitoring station cabinet. Bands shall conform to the provisions in Section 209-2.09, "Wiring." If asphalt concrete surfacing is to be placed, the loop conductors shall be installed prior to placing the uppermost layer of asphalt concrete. The conductors shall be installed, as shown on the plans, in the compacted layer of asphalt concrete immediately below the uppermost layer. Installation details shall be as shown on the plans, except the sealant shall fill the slot flush to the surface. 209-5.01 B Emergency Vehicle Pre-Emption Detector System. Each emergency vehicle . pre- emption detector system shall conform to the details shown on the plans and these special provisions and shall consist of an optical emitter assembly or assemblies located on the appropriate vehicle and an optical detector/discriminator assembly or assemblies located at the traffic signal. Each system shall " permit detection of Class II emergency vehicles. Class II emergency vehicles shall be capable of being detected at any range up to 2,500 feet from the optical detector. 209-5.016(1) Optical Emitter Assembly. unit, an emitter control unit and connecting cables and shall conform to the following: Each optical emitter assembly shall consist of an emitter @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 217 of 414 Each optical emitter assembly, including lamp, shall be designed to operate over an ambient temperature range of -34°C to 74°C at both modulation frequencies and to operate continuously at the higher frequency for a minimum of 3,000 hours at 25°C ambient before failure of lamp or any other component. Each emitter unit shall be controlled by a single, maintained-contact switch on the respective emitter control unit. The switch shall be capable of being positioned in a readily accessible location to the vehicle driver. The control unit shall contain a pilot light to indicate that the emitter power circuit is energized and shall be capable of generating only Class II modulating code. Functional Requirements. Each emitter unit shall transmit optical energy in one direction only. The signal from each emitter unit shall be capable of being detected at a distance of 2,500 feet when used with a standard optical detection/discriminator assembly. The modulation frequency for Class II signal emitters shall be 14.035 Hz It 0.003 Hz. The standard optical detection/discriminator assembly to be used in conducting the range tests shall be available from the manufacturer of the system. A certified performance report shall be furnished by the contractor with each assembly. The emitter unit shall be configured with a grating to provide precise directionality control. Electrical Requirements. Each optical emitter assembly shall be capable of providing full light output with input voltages between 10 and 16 volts DC. An optical emitter assembly shall not be damaged by input voltages up to 7.5 volts DC about the supply voltage. The optical emitter assembly shall not generate voltage transient, on the input supply, which exceeds the supply voltage by more than 4 volts. Each optical emitter assembly shall not consume more than 100 watts at 17.5 volts DC and shall have a power input circuit breaker rated at 10 to 12 amperes, 12 volts DC. The design and circuitry of each emitter unit shall permit its use on vehicles with either negative or positive ground without disassembly or rewiring of the unit. Mechanical Requirements. Each emitter unit shall be housed in a weatherproof, corrosion-resistant housing. The housing shall be provided with facilities to permit mounting on various types of vehicles and shall have provision for proper alignment of the emitter unit and for locking of the emitter unit into proper alignment. Each emitter control unit shall be provided with appurtenant hardware to permit its mounting in or on an emergency vehicle or mass transit vehicle. Where required for certain emergency vehicles, the emitter control unit and all exposed controls shall be weatherproof. Each emitter shall include a multi-purpose port compliant with the SAE J1708 communication standard to enable unit configuration to be set into the emitter and read from the emitter. 209-5.01 B(2) Optical DetectionlDiscriminator Assembly. Optical detection/discriminator assembly shall consist of one or more optical detectors, connecting cable and a discriminator module and conform to the following: Each such assembly, when used with standard emitters, shall have a range of up to 2,500 feet for Class I1 signals. Standard emitters for Class II signals shall be available from the manufacturer of the system. Range measurements shall be taken with all range adjustments on the discriminator module set to ‘!maximum”. 209-5.01B(3) Optical Detector. Each optical detector shall be a waterproof unit capable of receiving optical energy from one or two separately aimable directions. The horizontal angle between the two directions shall be variable from 5 degrees to 180 degrees. The reception angle for each photocell assembly shall be a maximum of 8 degrees in all directions about the aiming axis of the assembly. Measurements of reception angle will be taken at a range of 2,500 feet for a Class II emitter. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 218 of 414 All internal circuitry shall be solid state and electrical power shall be provided by the associated discriminator module. Each optical detector shall be contained in a housing, which shall include one or two rotatable photocell assemblies, an electronic assembly and a base. The base shall have an opening to permit its mounting on a mast arm. Each optical detector shall weigh no more than 2.5 pounds and shall present a maximum wind load area of 36 square inches. The housing shall be provided with weep holes to permit drainage of condensed moisture. Each optical detector shall be installed, wired and aimed as specified by the manufacturer. 209-5.01 B(4) Optical Detector Cable. IPCEA-S-61-402/NEMA WC 5, Section 7.4, 600 volt control cable, 75°C Type B and the following: Optical detector cable shall meet the requirements of The cable shall contain three conductors, each of which shall be AWG #20 (7x28) stranded, tinned copper with low-density polyethylene insulation. Minimum average insulation thickness shall be 25 mils. The insulation of individual conductors shall be color coded as follows: Yellow - Detector Signal #I Blue Detector Signal #2 Orange- Power (+) Bare (Drain) - Common or Ground The shield shall be either tinned copper braid or aluminized polyester film with a nominal 20 percent overlap. Where the film is used, a AWG #20 (7x28) standard, tinned, bare drain wire shall be place between the insulated conductors and the shield and in contact with the conductive surface of the shield The jacket shall be black polyvinyl chloride with a minimum rating of 600 volts and 80°C and a minimum average thickness of 45 mils. The jacket shall be marked as required by IPCENNEMA. The finished outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 0.3 inches. The capacitance of the optical detector cable, as measured between any conductor and the other conductors and the shield, shall not exceed 14.3 microfarads per 1000 feet. The characteristic impedance of the optical detector cable shall be 0.6 ohms per 1000 feet. 209-5.01 B(5) Discriminator Module. Each discriminator module shall be designed to be compatible and usable with Model 170 controller unit and to be mounted in the input file of a Model 332 controller cabinet, and shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 1 of the State of California, Department of Transportation, 'Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications", dated January 1989, and to all addenda thereto current at the time of project advertisement. Each discriminator module shall be capable of operating one or two channels and shall be capable of: 1. 2. 3. 4. Receiving Class II signals at a range of up to 2,500 feet. Decoding the signal on the basis of frequency at 14.035 Hz f 0.003 Hz for Class It signals. Establishing the validity of received signals on the basis of frequency and length of time received. A signal shall be considered valid only when received for more than 0.50 seconds. No combination of Class I signals shall be recognized as a Class II signal regardless of the number of signals being received, up to a maximum of ten signals. Once a valid signal has been recognized, its effect shall be held by the module in the event of temporary loss of the signal for a period adjustable from 4.5 seconds to 11 seconds in at least 2 steps at 5 f 0.5 seconds and 10 f 0.5 seconds. Providing an output for each channel that will result in 'low" or grounded condition of the appropriate input of a Model 170 controller unit. For Class II signals the output shall be steady. - 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 219 of 414 Each discriminator module shall be powered from 11 5 volt (95 volts AC to 135 volts AC), 60 Hz mains and will contain an internal, regulated power supply that supports up to twelve optical detectors. Electric power, one detector input for each channel and one output for each channel, shall terminate at the printed circuit board edge connector pins listed below. Board edge connector pin assignments shall be as follows: rn A D 'E F H J K L M N Function Ground Channel A primary detector input Detector 24 VDC power output Channel A output, collector (+) Channel A output, emitter (-) Channel B primary detector input Detector ground Earth ground AC - (in) AC + (in) Pins P R S T U v w X Y Z Function Not used Detector 24 VDC power output Not used Not used Not used Detector ground Channel B output collector (+) Channel B output emitter (-) Not used Not used Two auxiliary inputs for each channel shall enter each module through the front panel connector. Pin assignment for the connector shall be as follows: Function Auxiliary detector 2 input, Channel A Auxiliary detector 1 input, Channel B Auxiliary detector 2 input, Channel B Auxiliary detector 1 input, Channel A 13 14 15 28 Each channel output shall be an optically isolated NPN open collector transistor capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts and shall be compatible with Model 170 controller unit inputs. Each discriminator module shall be provided with means of preventing transients received by the detector from affecting the Model 170 controller assembly. Each discriminator module shall have a single connector board, shall be capable of being inserted into the input file of a Model 332 cabinet and shall occupy one slot width of the input file. The front panel of each module shall have a handle to facilitate withdrawal and the following controls and indicators for each channel: 1. A Command (High) and Advantage (Low) solid-state LED indicator for each channel to display active calls. 2. A test switch for each channel to test proper operation of Command or Advantage priority. 3. A single confirmation light control output for each channel. These outputs shall be user configurable through software for a variety of confirmation light sequences. The front panel shall be provided with a single circular, bayonet-captured, multi-pin connector for two auxiliary detector inputs for each channel. Connector shall be a mechanical configuration equivalent to a D-Shell44-Pin front panel. Wiring for a Model 332 cabinet shall conform to the following: Slots 12 and 13 of the input file "J" shall be wired to accept a two-channel module. Field wiring for the primary detectors, except 24-volt DC power, shall terminate on either terminal board TB-9 in the controller cabinet or on the rear of input file "J", depending on cabinet configuration. Where TB-9 is used, position assignments shall be as follows: @ 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 220 of 414 , -- Position Assianment 4 Channel A detector input, 1* module (Slot J-12) 5 Channel B detector input, la module (Slot J-12) 7 Channel A detector input, 2; module (Slot J-13) 0 Channel B detector input, 2 module (Slot J-13) The 24 volt cabinet DC power shall be available at Position 1 of terminal board TB-1 in the controller cabinet. All field wiring for the auxiliary detectors shall terminate on terminal board TB-0 in the controller cabinet. Position assignments are as follows: Position Assianment 7 +24VDC from (J-l3E) 0 Detector ground from (J-l3K) 9 10 11 12 Channel A auxiliary detector input 1 Channel A auxiliary detector input 2 Channel 8 auxiliary detector input 1 Channel B auxiliary detector input 2 The Contractor shall demonstrate that all of the components of the system will perform satisfactorily as a system. Satisfactory performance shall be determined using the following test procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Each system to be used for testing shall consist of an optical emitter assembly, an optical detector, at least 200 feet of optical detector cable and a discriminator module. The discriminator modules shall be installed in the proper input file slot of Model 332 controller cabinet. The controller cabinet, together with a Model 170 controller unit with the appropriate operating program, a Model 210 monitor unit and 120 volt AC power, will be available as shown on the plans and as indicated elsewhere in these special provisions. One test shall be conducted using a Class II signal emitter and a distance of 2,500 feet between the emitter and the detector. All range adjustments on the module shall be set to "Maximum" for each test. Each test shall be conducted for a period of one hour, during which the emitter shall be operated for 30 cycles, each consisting of a one minute "on" interval and a one minute "off interval. During the total test period: (A) the emitter signal shall cause the proper response from the Model 170 controller unit during each 'on" interval and (6) there shall be no improper operation of either the Model 170 controller unit or the monitor during each "off interval. 209-5016 Video Detection System. The video detection system shall consist of one (1) video camera and one (1 ) video detection processor (VDP) for each vehicle approach, and a pointing device. The system shall include software that detects vehicles in multiple lanes using only the video image. Detection zones shall be defined using only a video menu and a pointing device to place zones on a video image. A minimum of 24 detection zones per camera shall be available. 209-5.01C(I) Functional Requirements. The VDP shall process video from a single source. The source can be a video camera or a video tape player. The video shall be input to the VDP in RS170 format and shall be digitized and analyzed in real time. The VDP shall detect the presence of vehicles in up to 24 detection zones per camera. A detection zone shall be approximately the width and length of one car. Detection zones shall be programmed via a menu displayed on a video monitor and a pointing device connected to the VDP. The menu shall facilitate placement of the detection zones and setting of zone parameters. A separate computer shall not be required for programming detection zones or to view system operations. The VDP shall store up to three different detection zone patterns. The VDP shall be able to switch to any one of the three different detection zone patterns within one second of user request via menu selection with the pointing device. The VDP shall detect vehicles in real time as they travel across each detection zone. 43 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 221 of 414 The VDP shall have an RS-232 port for communications with an external computer. The VDP shall accept new detector patterns from an external computer through the RS-232 port when that computer uses the appropriate communications protocol for downloading detector patterns. The VDP shall send its detector patterns to an external computer through the RS-232 port when requested when that computer uses the appropriate communications protocol for uploading detector patterns. A Windows-based software program designed for local or remote connection and providing video capture, real-time detection indication and detection zone modification capability shall be provided with the system. The camera system shall be able to transmit an NTSC video signal, with minimal signal degradation, up to 300m (1 000 ft). The VDP shall default to a safe condition, such as a constant call to each active detection channel, in the event of unacceptable interference in the video signal. The system shall be capable of automatically detecting a low visibility condition such as fog and respond by placing all defined detection zones in a constant call mode. A user-selected output shall be active during the low visibility condition that can be used to modify the controller operation if connected to the appropriate controller input modifier(s). The system shall automatically revert to normal. detection mode when the low visibility condition no longer exists. 209-5.01C(2) A minimum of 24 detection zones per camera shall be supported and each detection zone can be sized to suit the conditions and the desired vehicle detection region. A single detection zone shall be capable of replacing multiple loops and the detection zone may be AND'ed or OR'ed together to indicate vehicle presence on a single phase of traffic movement. Placement of detection zones shall be done by using a pointing device and a graphical interface built into the VDP and displayed on a video monitor. No separate computer shall be required to program the detection zones. Up to three detection zone patterns shall be saved within the VDP memory and this memory shall be preserved during power outages. The selection of the detection zone pattern for current use shall be done through a menu system. It shall be possible to activate a detection zone pattern for a camera from VDP memory and have the detection zone pattern displayed within one second of activation. When a vehicle is detected crossing a detection zone, the detection zone will flash a symbol on the screen to confirm the detection of the vehicle. Detection shall be at least 98% accurate in good weather conditions and at least 96% accurate under adverse weather conditions (rain, snow or fog). Operational Requirements. Detector placement shall not be more distant from the camera than a distance of fifteen times the mounting height of the camera. The VDP shall provide up to eight channels of vehicle presence detection through a NEMA TS1 port. The VDP shall provide dynamic zone reconfiguration (DZR) to enable normal detector operation of existing zones except the one being added or modified during the setup process. The VDP shall output a constant call on any detection channel when the corresponding zone is being modified. Detection zone outputs shall be configurable to allow the selection of presence, pulse, extend and delay outputs. Timing parameters of pulse, extend, and delay outputs shall be user definable between 0.1 and 25.0 seconds. Up to six detection zones shall be capable of counting the number of vehicles detected. The count value shall be internally stored for later retrieval through the RS-232 port. The data collection interval shall be user definable in periods of five, fifteen, thirty or sixty minutes. 209-5.OlC(3) Hardware Requirements. The VDP shall be housed in a durable metal enclosure ' suitable for shelf mounting in the side rails of the controller cabinet. The VDP enclosure shall not exceed 180mm (7.1 in) in length and 157mm (6.2 in) in depth. The VDP shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range of -34°C to +74"C (-29°F to +165"F) and a humidity range of O%RH to 95% RH, non- condensing. The VDP shall be powered by 24 volts DC. VDP power consumption shall not exceed 10 watts. The VDP shall include an RS-232 port for serial communications with a remote computer. This @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 222 of 414 port shall be a 9-pin 'D" subminiature connector on the front of the VDP. The front of the VDP shall include one BNC video input connection suitable for RS170 video inputs. The video input shall include a switch-selectable 75-ohm or high impedance termination to allow camera video to be routed to other devices, as well as input to the VDP for vehicle detection. The front of the VDP shall include one BNC video output providing real time video output that can be routed to other devices. 209-5.01 C(4) Video Detection Camera. The video camera shall be furnished by the VDP supplier and shall be qualified by the supplier to ensure proper system operation. The camera shall produce useable video image of the bodies of vehicles under all roadway lighting conditions, regardless of time of day. . The minimum range of scene luminance over which the camera shall produce a useable video image shall be the minimum range of night time to day time but not less than the range of 0.1 lux to 10,000 lux. The camera shall use a CCD sensing element and shall output monochrome video with resolution of not less than 380 lines vertical and 380 lines horizontal. The camera shall include an electronic shutter control based upon average scene luminance and shall be equipped with a factory adjusted manual ins. The camera shall include a variable focal length lens with variable focus that can be adjusted, without opening the camera housing, to suit the site geometry by means of a portable interface device designed for that purpose and manufactured by the detection system supplier. The horizontal field of view shall be adjustable from 8.1" to 45.9'. A single camera configuration shall be used for all approaches in order to minimize setup time and spares required by the user. The camera electronics shall include AGC to produce a satisfactory image at night. The camera shall be housed in a weather-tight sealed enclosure. The camera enclosure shall be able to rotate to allow proper alignment between the camera and the traveled road surface. The camera enclosure shall be equipped with a sun shield. The sun shield shall include a provision for water diversion to prevent water from flowing in the camera's field of view. The camera enclosure with sun shield shall be less than 170mm (6 in) in diameter, less than 380mm (15 in) long, and shall weigh less than 13.3kg (6 pounds) when the camera and lens are mounted inside the enclosure. The camera enclosure shall include a thermostatically controlled heater to assure proper operation of the lens at low temperatures and to prevent moisture condensation on the optical faceplate of the enclosure. When mounted outdoors in the enclosure, the camera shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range of -34°C to +60"C (-29°F to +140"F) and a humidity range of 0% RH to 100% RH. The camera shall be powered by 120/240 VAC, 50160 Hz. Power consumption shall be 15 watts or less under all conditions. Recommended camera placement height shall be 10m (33 ft) above the roadway, and over the traveled way on which vehicles are to be detected. For optimum detection, the camera should be centered above the traveled roadway. The camera shall view approaching vehicles at a distance not to exceed 100m (350 ft) for reliable detection (height: distance ration of 1O:lOO). Camera placement and field of view shall be unobstructed and as noted in the installation documentation provided by the supplier. The camera enclosure shall be equipped with separate, weather-tight connections for power and video cables at the rear of the enclosure. These connections may also allow diagnostic testing and viewing of the video signal at the camera while the camera is installed, using a lens adjustment module supplied by the VDP supplier. Video and power shall not be connected within the same connector. The video signal output by the camera shall be black and white in RS170 or CClR format. The video signal shall be fully isolated from the camera enclosure and power cabling. 209-5.01C(5) Installation Requirements. The coaxial cable to be used between the camera and the VDP in the controller cabinet shall be Belden 8281 or a 75 ohm, precision video cable with 20 gauge solid bare copper conductor (9.9 ohms/M), solid polyethylene insulating dielectric, 98% (min) tinned copper double-braided shield and black polyethylene outer covering. The signal attenuation shall not exceed 0.78 dB per 30m (100 ft) at 10 MHz. Nominal outside diameter shall be 8mm (0.304 in). The coaxial cable shall be a continuous, unbroken run from the camera to the VDP. This cable shall be suitable for installation in conduit or overhead with appropriate span wire. 75 ohm BNC plug connectors It"s 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 223 of 414 shall be used at both the camera and controller. The coaxial cable, BNC connector and crimping tool shall be approved by the supplier of the video detection system, and the manufacturer's instructions must be followed to ensure proper connection. The power cabling shall be 16 AWG three conductor cable. The cabling shall comply with the National Electric Code, as well as local etectrical codes. Cameras may acquire power from the luminaire if necessary. The video detection system shall be installed by supplier factory certified installers and as recommended by the supplier and documented in the installation materials provided by the supplier. Proof of factory certification shall be provided. 209-5.01C(6) Warranty. The supplier shall provide a limited two year warrant on the video detection system. See supplier's standard warranty included in the Terms and Conditions of Sale documentation. During the warranty period, technical support shall be available from the supplier via telephone within four hours of the time a call is made by the user. This support shall be made available from factory certified personnel or factory certified installers. During the warranty period, updates to the VDP software shall be made available from the supplier without charge. 209-5.01 C(7) Maintenance and Support. The supplier shall maintain an adequate inventory of parts to support maintenance and repair of the video detection system. These parts shall be made available for delivery within 30 days of placement of an acceptable order at the supplier's current pricing and terms of sale for said parts. The supplier shall maintain an ongoing program of technical support for the video detection system. This technical support shall be available via telephone, or via personnel sent to the installation site upon placement of an acceptable order at the supplier's current pricing and terms of sale for on site technical support services. Installation or training support shall be provided by a factory authorized representative. All product documentation shall be written in the English language. 209-5.02 Pedestrian Push Button Assemblies. Where shown on the plans, pedestrian push button assemblies of substantial tamper-proof construction and signs shall be furnished and installed. The housing shall be either die-cast or permanent mold cast aluminum, or when specified shall be ultraviolet stabilized, self-extinguishing structural plastic. Plastic housings shall be black matching Color No. 17038, 27038 or 37038 of Federal Standard No. 5958, and shall be colored throughout. The assembly shall be rainproof and shall be shockproof in any weather condition. The pedestrian push button switch shall be a phenolic enclosed precision snap-acting type, single-pole, double-throw, switching unit, with screw type terminals, rated 15 A at 125 volts AC, and shall have the following characteristics: 1. Switching unit shall have a stainless steel plunger actuator and shall be provided with U-frame to permit recessed mounting in push button housing. 2. Switch shall have an operating force of 2.5 N (9 02.) to 3.6 N (13 02.) and a minimum release force of one newton (4 02.). 3. Pretravel shall be 0.4 mm (l/64") maximum. 4. Over travel shall be 6 mm ('/$) minimum. 5. Differential travel shall be 0.01 mm (0.0004") to 0.05 mm (0.002"). 6. Actuator shall have a minimum diameter of 50 mm (2"). Where a pedestrian push button is attached to a pole, the housing shall be shaped to fit the curvature of the pole and secured to provide a rigid installation. Saddles shall be provided to make a neat fit when re- quired. Where a pedestrian push button is to be mounted on top of a Size 65 (Z1/2") diameter post, the housing shall be provided with a slipfitter fitting and screws for securing rigidly to the post. Pedestrian push button signs shall be porcelain enameled metal or structural plastic. Push button and sign shall be installed on the crosswalk side of the pole. Arrows on push button signs shall point in the same direction as the corresponding crosswalk. Where Type A push buttons are specified, each push button assembly shall be equipped with red and green indicator lamps. Lamps shall be so connected that, when the push button has been activated, the red lamp shall be energized and continue so until the next pedestrian walk interval, at which time the green lamp shall be energized in lieu of the red lamp. At the termination of the pedestrian walk interval, the lamps shall be deenergized until the next actuation of the push button. Lenses for the lamps shall have a visible diameter of approximately 32 mm (11/4") and a length of approximately 22 mm ('/*"). On the Type A or Type B push button assembly, the sign shall attach to and - 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 224 of 414 be securely supported by the framework. With Type C pedestrian push buttons, the instruction sign shall be mounted, using 2 straps and saddle brackets, on the same standard as the push button assembly. Straps and saddle brackets shall be as shown on the plans and shall be corrosion-resisting chromium nickel steel conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 167, Type 302. Bolts shall be stainless steel with a chromium content of at least 17 percent and a nickel content of at least 8 percent. Bolts shall NOT be theft-proof. 209-6 LIGHTING . 209-6.01 LOW PRESSURE SODIUM LUMINAIRES Low pressure sodium luminaires shall be provided when shown on the plans or specified in the special provisions, and shall be completely assembled, furnished with a lamp and ballast and shall comply with the following requirements: Low pressure sodium luminaires shall be the enclosed type with a horizontal burning lamp. Luminaires shall be either the semicutoff type or the cutoff type. Luminaires shall be manufactured by a manufacturer who is regularly engaged in the manufacture of street lighting luminaires. Each luminaire shall consist of a housing, a reflector, a refractor or a lens, a lamp socket, an integral ballast, a removable ballast tray, a lamp support, a terminal strip, a capacitor and a slip fitter. The reflector may be an integral part of the housing. The luminaire housing shall be of corrosion resistant die cast aluminum, of 1/16 inch minimum thickness, corrosion resistant aluminum sheet and plate with concealed continuous welds, or of acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene sheet material (302 inch, minimum nominal wall thickness), on a cast aluminum frame that provides mounting for all electrical components and the slip fitter. The housing shall be divided into optical and power compartments that are individually accessible for service and maintenance. Positioning and clamping of the luminaire to the pipe tenon shall be accomplished by tightening mounting bolts. Painted exterior surfaces of the luminaire shall be finished with a fused coating of electrostatically applied polyester powder paint or other ultraviolet inhibiting film. Color shall be aluminum gray. A high temperature neoprene, or equal, sealing ring shall be installed in the pipe tenon opening to prevent entry of water and insects into the power and optical compartments. Access to the power unit assembly shall be through a weather tight hinged cover, secured with spring type latches or captive screws, to the luminaire housing. Hardware shall be stainless steel or cadmium plated. Machine screws or bolts shall be used to secure removable components. Sheet metal screws shall not be used. Semi-cutoff luminaires and molded refractor style (drop lens) cutoff luminaires shall be provided with a refractor. Other cutoff luminaires shall be provided with a flat lens. Refractors shall be one piece injection molded polycarbonate of 3/32 inch, minimum thickness, or one piece injection molded acrylic of 1/8 inch minimum thickness. Flat lens shall be one piece polycarbonate of 3/32 inch, minimum thickness. The refractor assembly and flat lens assembly shall be constructed to rigidly maintain its shape. The refractor assembly and the flat lens assembly shall be hinged and secured with spring type latches to the luminaire housing. The flat lens shall be mounted to a metal frame. Alternate methods of manufacturing the refractor may be approved provided minimum specified thicknesses are maintained. A sample refractor for testing will be required for alternate methods of manufacturing. The lamp socket shall be of high temperature, flame retardant thermoset material with self-wiping contacts or may be of other equally durable material. The socket shall be rated for 660 W and 1000 V. - @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 225 of 414 Position of the lamp socket and the lamp support shall maintain the lamp in correct relationship with reflector and refractor for designed distribution pattern. lsofootcandle distribution shall be ANSI Type Ill, short or Type IV, medium distribution, for cutoff or semicutoff luminaires. With a 34-foot mounting height, each type of luminaire shall maintain a minimum of 0.2 foot-candle at least 90 feet each side, along the longitudinal roadway line below the luminaire, and a minimum of 0.35 foot-candle at a transverse roadway distance from the luminaire location equal to 1.5 times the luminaire mounting height. Certified luminaire performance data shall be furnished as part of the Equipment List and Drawings. This data shall include complete photometric test data in the form of isofoot charts at a scale of one inch equals 20 feet, for the luminaire and lamp sizes indicated on the plans. Alternate data may be in the form of horizontal footcandle values recorded on a 15-foot x 15-foot area extending 90 feet longitudinally each side of the light source, and 15 feet behind and 90 feet in front of the light source, for the luminaire and lamp sizes and the mounting height indicated on the plans. The horizontal foot-candles levels in the data submitted shall equal or exceed the levels specified in these specifications. Failure to meet the referenced values will be justification for disapproval of the luminaires. The photometric test shall be performed and certified by an independent and recognized testing laboratory. Subsequent to the Contractors installation of any luminaires, field checks may be performed at random by the Engineer and calculated in conformance with the requirements in the Illuminating Engineering Society "Guide for Photometric Measurement of Roadway Lighting Installation (LM-50)" approved in July, 1974. Failure to meet or exceed the referenced values during field checks will be justification for replacement by the Contractor. Low pressure sodium lamps shall conform to the following: The lamps shall be 180 W, single ended, bayonet base, tubular gas discharge lamps suitable for street lighting use. Low pressure sodium lamps shall have a minimum of 93 percent maintenance of initial lumens during rated life and shall comply with the following minimum performance requirements: Lamp Designation I ANSI Code: L74-RF-180 ] Initial Lumens I 33 000 Rated Ave. Life (@ 10 Hrs/Start) I 18 000 h Low pressure sodium lamps shall reach 80 percent of light output within 10 minutes and shall restrike within one minute after an outage due to power interruption or voltage drop at the lamp socket. The base of the lamp shall have a device that will allow the installer to indicate the month and year of installation. Ballasts for low pressure sodium luminaires shall be the autotransformer or high reactance type and, when operated with the lamp, shall have the following characteristics and maintain the following lamp operation: The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent when the ballast is operated at nominal line voltage. Lamp wattage regulation spread, at any lamp voltage from nominal through life, shall not vary by more than f 6 percent for f 10 percent input voltage variation. The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.8 at nominal line voltage. Ballast losses shall not exceed 24 percent for 180-W ballasts at nominal line voltage. 1. 2. 3. 4. 4w w 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 226 of 414 A single multi-circuit connector shall be provided for quick disconnection of ballast tray. 209-6.04A(l) Regulator Type Ballasts. 1. For nominal input voltage and lamp voltage, the ballast design center shall not vary more than 7.5 percent from rated lamp watts. 2. The ballast shall be designed so that a capacitance variance of *6 percent will not cause more than a k8 percent variation in lamp wattage regulation throughout rated lamp life for nominal input voltage. 3. The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.8 for input voltage variation of k10 percent at any lamp voltage from initial through life. Regulator type ballasts shall conform to the following: Regulator type ballasts shall be lag-type or lead-type conforming to the following: 1. Lag-Type Regulator Ballasts.- Each lag-type regulator ballast shall have the primary and secondary windings electrically isolated and, when operated with the appropriate lamp, shall have the following characteristics and shall maintain the following lamp operation: a) The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent throughout the life of the lamp at nominal b) Lamp wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage from nominal through life shall not vary 2. Lead-Type Regulator Ballasts.- Each lead-type regulator ballast (CWA-constant wattage auto- regulator) shall, when operated with the appropriate lamp, have the following characteristics and shall maintain the following lamp operation: a) The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent when the ballast is operated at nominal line voltage with a nominally rated reference lamp. b) Lamp wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage from nominal through life shall not vary by more than 30 percent for *IO percent input voltage variation. line voltage with a nominally rated reference lamp. by more than 18 percent for k10 percent input voltage variation. 209-6.01A(2) Autotransformer or Reactor Type Ballasts. Each nonregulating reactor, autotransformer, or high reactance ballast shall, when operated with the appropriate lamp, have the following characteristics and shall maintain the following lamp operations: 1. The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent when the ballast is operated at nominal line voltage with a nominally rated reference lamp. 2. Lamp wattage regulation spread at any lamp voltage from nominal through life shall not vary by more than 25 percent for k5 percent input voltage variation. 3. For nominal input voltage and lamp voltage, the ballast design center shall not vary more than 7.5 percent from rated lamp watts. 4. The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.8 for input voltage variation of k5 percent at any lamp voltage from initial through life. 209-6.02 Mission Bell Luminaires. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all components of the Mission Bell fixture and light standard in accordance to manufacturer‘s specifications and these special provisions. The Contractor‘s responsibility shall include, but is not limited to, mounting adaptor to mast arm, mounting bracket for use with photoelectric control and suspension method for conductors. Dissimilar metals shall not be used for mounting the Mission Bell to the fixture adapter (plumberizer). The 50 mm (2”) diameter close aluminum nipples used between the plumberizer and Mission Bell casting shall be fabricated from bar stock aluminum conforming to ASTM designation 6061-T6 or 6063-T1 and shall be bored through along their central axis with a 25 mm (1”) diameter hole to accommodate the lighting conductors. All aluminum incorporated in the fixture shall be clear anodized in accordance with Aluminum Association designation AA-Ml2C22A41. The minimum anodic wating thickness shall be not less than 0.03 mm (1.0 mil). Mission Bell Luminaires shall conform to the requirements of section 209-6.01 of these special provisions except as noted in this section (2096.02) and , shall be Sierra Lighting catalog number MB-200-HPS-240-DBZ, General Electric catalog number BELL20S3AGMN3DB or approved equal. All Mission Bell Luminaires from any source shall be modified as specified herein. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the mounting design for approval by the Engineer prior to fabrication in accordance with Section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings. - Ec 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 227 of 414 209-6.03 Soffit and Wall Luminaires, and Lamps. Soffit and wall luminaires shall be of the type or types specified. Soffit and wall luminaires shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant. Installation details and minimum light distribution shall be as shown on the plans. Each flush-mounted soffit luminaire shall consist of a metal body, a prismatic refractor mounted in a door frame, a prismatic glass or specular anodized aluminum reflector, a ballast, and a lamp socket. The body shall have provisions for anchoring in concrete and shall be provided with two Size 27, minimum, conduit hubs. The refractor shall be glass and shall be clearly identified as to "street side." The door frame assembly shall be hinged, gasketed and secured to the body by at least 3 machine screws. The ballast shall be located either within the housing or in a ceiling pull box as shown on the plans. Each pendant soffit luminaire shall be enclosed and gasketed, and shall be furnished with aluminum finish. The reflector shall have a specular anodized aluminum finish. The refractor shall be made of heat-resistant polycarbonate or glass. The optical assembly shall be hinged and latched for lamp access and shall be provided with a device to prevent dropping. Each pendant soffit luminaire shall be furnished with a ballast and with a galvanized metal box for mounting the luminaire. The ballast shall be designed for operation in a raintight enclosure. The box shall be provided with a gasketed cover with 2 captive screws and 2 chains to prevent dropping. Each wall-mounted luminaire shall consist of a cast metal body, a prismatic refractor mounted in a door frame, an aluminum reflector with a specular anodized finish, an integral ballast and a lamp socket. The refractor shall be glass. A gasket shall be provided between the refractor and the body of the fixture. Each luminaire shall be provided with at least two 8 mm (5/16") minimum diameter mounting bolts. Cast aluminum bodies, which are to be cast into or mounted against concrete, shall be given a thick application of alkali-resistant bituminous paint on all surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Unless othewise specified, each soffit luminaire and each wall luminaire shall be furnished with a 70-W high- pressure sodium lamp, with a minimum average rated life of 24 000 hours. Each lamp socket shall be positioned to locate the light center of the lamp within 13 mm (l/2'') of the light center location for which the luminaire is designed. Ballasts for soffit and wall luminaires shall be the autotransformer, reactor or regulator type conforming to the provisions in Section 209-6.01A "Low Pressure Sodium Lamp Ballasts." Ballasts for wall luminaires shall be located in the luminaire housing or, when shown on the plans, in a pull box adjacent to the luminaire. 209-6.04 Pedestrian Crossing Fixtures. Pedestrian crossing fixtures shall consist of fluorescent lighting fixtures for pedestrian undercrossings and for pedestrian overcrossings as shown on the plans. 209-6.05 Sign Lighting Fixtures- Mercury. Each mercury sign lighting fixture shall be designed for mounting near the bottom of the sign panel on an overhead sign structure. The fixture shall be of an en- closed design and shall be raintight and corrosion resistant. Each fixture shall consist of a housing with door, a reflector, refractor or a flat lens, a lamp, a socket assembly, a ballast and a fuse block, and shall conform to the following: 1. Housing.- The housing shall have a door designed to hold a refractor or flat lens. Housings and doors shall be fabricated of sheet or cast aluminum. Sheet aluminum shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: B 209 or B 209M for 5052-H32 aluminum sheet. Painting is not required. All external bolts, screws, hinges, hinge pins and door closure devices shall be of material which will not corrode in normal use. The housing shall be provided with holes to permit condensed water to drain. The door shall be hinged to the housing on the side of the fixture away from the sign panel and shall be provided with two captive latch bolts or other latching device. The door shall be provided with means to allow the door to be locked in the open position (50 degrees, minimum from the plane of the door opening) with a wind of 110 km/h (70 mph) striking the door from either side. The juncture of the door and the housing shall be gasketed to provide a raintight and dust tight joint. The thickness of the gasket shall be 6 mm (0.25"), minimum. The maximum height of the fixture shall be 300 mm (12") above the top of the mounting rails. When the fixture is mounted on the mounting channels without a mounting plate, 4 holes of 11 mm ('/16") diameter shall be provided. The distance between the front and back holes shall be 165 mm (6'/2"). Reflector.- The reflector shall be one piece and shall be made from specularly finished aluminum protected with an electrochemically applied anodized finish or a chemically applied silicate film. The . 2. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 228 of 414 3. 4. 5. 6. reflector shall be designed so that water deposited on it due to condensation will drain away. The reflector shall be secured to the housing with a minimum of two screws and shall be removable without removing any fixture parts. No reflectors shall be attached to the outside of the housing. Refractor.- Refractors shall be made from borosilicate heat resistant glass. When a flat lens is used, the lens shall be made from heat resistant glass. The refractor shall be so designed or shielded that no fixture luminance is visible when the fixture is approached directly from the rear and the viewing level is the bottom of the fixture. When a shield is used it shall be an integral part of the door casting. Lamp.- Each fixture shall be furnished with a 175-W mercury lamp conforming to ANSI C78.386- 1989, Code: H39KC-175DX. Lamps shall have a minimum average rated life of 16 000 hours. Lamp Socket.- The lamp socket shall be a porcelain enclosed mogul type. The shell shall contain integral lamp grips to assure electrical contact under conditions of normal vibration. The center contact shall be spring-loaded. Shell and center contact shall be nickel plated brass. The socket shall be rated for 1500 W and 600 V. Ballast.-The ballast for each mercury sign fixture shall be designed for the characteristics and wattage of the lamp and it shall provide the proper starting voltage and operating waveforms, voltage and current. Ballasts shall provide reliable lamp starting and operation at ambient temperatures down to -25°C for the rated life of the lamp. Ballasts shall be designed for continuous operation at ambient air temperatures from -20°C to 25°C without reduction in ballast life. Ballasts shall have a design life of not less than 100 000 hours. Ballasts shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of ANSI Standard C82.6-1980, "Methods of Measurement of High-lntensity- Discharge Lamp Ballasts." A Certificate of Compliance conforming to the provisions in Section 4- 1.5, "Certification," shall be submitted by the manufacturer with each lot of sign lighting fixtures. The certificate shall state that the ballasts meet, in every respect, the above requirements and the lamp ballast specifications of the lamp manufacturer. Ballasts consisting of separate components shall conform to the following: 1. Each component shall be capable of being easily replaced. Each component shall be provided with screw terminals, NEMA tab connect or a single multi-circuit connector. All conductor terminals shall be identified as to the component terminal to which they connect. Heat-generating components shall be mounted so as to use the portion of the sign lighting fixture upon which they are mounted as a heat sink. Capacitors shall be located as far as practicable from heat-generating components or shall be thermally shielded to limit the case temperature to 75°C. 3. Transformers and inductors shall be resin-impregnated for protection against moisture. Capacitors shall be metal cased and hermetically sealed. 4. Ballasts for mercury sign lighting fixtures shall be normal power factor reactor type or autotransformer regulator type (CWA-constant wattage autotransformer). 5. Reactor Type Ballasts.-Each reactor type ballast shall, when operated with the mercury lamp, have the following characteristics and shall maintain the following lamp operation: a) The power factor shall be not less than 50 percent. b) The lamp wattage shall not vary by more than a k10 percent for a *5 percent input voltage variation. c) The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.5 at rated input voltage. d) Ballast losses shall not exceed 25 W. 2. 6. Autotransformer Regulator Ballasts.- Each autotransformer regulator type ballast shall, when operated with the mercury lamp, have the following characteristics and shall maintain the following lamp operation: a) The power factor shall be not less than 90 percent. b) The lamp wattage shall not vary by more than a *7 percent for a *lo percent input voltage variation. c) The lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.7 at rated input voltage. d) Ballast losses shall not exceed 40 W. 7. Fuse Block.- Each fixture shall be provided with a barrier type fuse block for terminating field connections. The block shall be secured to the housing and shall be accessible without removal of any fixture parts. The block shall be mounted to leave a minimum of 13 mm (0.5 ") air space from @ 7131102 Contract No. 3907 Page 229 of 414 the sidewalls of the housing. The block shall be designed for easy removal of fuses with fuse puller, shall be rated at 600 volts and shall have box terminals. Fuses shall be 10 mm (13/32') diameter, 38 mm (11/2u) long ferrule type and shall be UL or ETL listed. For 120-volt input fixtures, only the ungrounded conductor shall be fused and a solid link shall be provided between the neutral and the ballasts. Wire Guard.- When shown on the plans, each sign lighting fixture shall be provided with a wire guard to prevent damage to the refractor or lens. The guard shall be constructed of 6.5 mm (0.2625") (minimum) diameter steel wire and shall be either hotdip galvanized or provided with an electroplated zinc coating conforming to ASTM Designation: B 633, Service Condition SC4 with a clear chromate dip treatment. Guard elements shall be spaced so as to prevent rocks in excess of 40 mm (1 '/2') in diameter from passing through. 8. . When the fixture is located so that the light center of the lamp is 1.4 m (56") in front of, 300 mm (12") below, and centered on a 3 m (10') high by 6 m (20') wide sign panel, the ratio of the maximum to minimum illuminance level on the panel shall not exceed 12 to 1 in 95 percent of the points measured. In addition, the illuminance gradient shall not exceed 2 to 1. Illuminance gradient is defined as the ratio of the minimum illuminance on any 300 mm (12") square of panel to that on any adjacent 300 mm (12") square of panel. The minimum horizontal lux requirements shall conform to the "Isolux Diagrams" shown on the plans. Each fixture shall be furnished with a mounting assembly that will permit the fixture to be mounted on the continuous slot channels shown on the plans. The mounting assembly shall be either cast aluminum, hot-dip galvanized steel plate or steel plate that has been galvanized and finished with a polymeric coating system. 209-6.06 Sign Lighting Fixtures- Incandescent Each sign lighting fixture for an incandescent lamp shall be of the type shown on the plans or as specified in these special provisions. Sign lighting fixtures shall be UL or ETL listed for outdoor installation. The fixture shall consist of a hood with side outlet tapped for conduit and a symmetrical 250 mm (10") steel reflector. Fixture shall be rated at 150 W minimum. The reflector shall have a white porcelain enamel finish. The fixture shall have a medium base socket. 209-6.06 Internally Illuminated Street Name Signs. Internally illuminated street name signs shall conform to the plans and these special provisions. Minor details of construction may be modified subject to approval by the Engineer. The sign fixture shall be designed and constructed to prevent deformation or failure when subjected to 113 km/h (70mph) wind loads as set forth in the MSHTO publication, "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports of Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals," and amendments thereto. The sign panels shall not deform or warp under a 11 3 km/h (70 mph) wind loading. A Certificate of Compliance conforming to the provisions in Section 4-1.5, "Certification," shall be sub- mitted by the manufacturer with each lot of internally illuminated street name signs. The certificate shall state that the internally illuminated street name signs meets the wind load requirements as described above. All material used in fabrication shall be new. If not covered herein, both the material and workmanship shall be of the best quality consistent with the intended purpose. All ferrous parts shall be galvanized or cadmium plated, unless otherwise specified herein or shown otherwise on the plans. Signs shall be Type B. Additionally all Internally Illuminated Street Name Signs shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Housing.-The top and bottom shall be formed or extruded aluminum and shall be attached to formed or cast aluminum end fittings. The design shall provide continuous sealing between top and bottom assemblies and the end fittings. The housing shall be rigidly constructed to resist torsional twist and warp. Provisions shall be made for ease of maintenance of all components. The opening or removal of one panel shall permit access to the interior of the sign and allow for replacement of lamps, ballasts and fuses. Type IV photoelectric unit sockets shall be provided. On Type A signs, both sides shall be hinged at the top to permit installation or removal of the sign panels, and to permit access to the interior of the sign. On Type B signs, the sign panels shall be slide-mounted into the housing. - . 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 230 of 414 2. Reflectors.-At the option of the Contractor, reflectors may be used to provide the required sign brightness. Reflectors, if used, shall be formed aluminum with acrylic baked white enamel surface having a minimum reflectance of 0.85. Sign Panels.-The sign panels shall be slide-mounted or rigid mounted in a frame, with white legend, symbols, arrows, and border on each face, as shown on the plans. The background shall be green. The entire surface of the sign panel shall fabricated with prismatic, cube comer reflective sheeting (Diamond Grade or equal) and shall be evenly illuminated. The average of brightness readings for the letters shall be 500 cd/m2 (150 foot-lamberts), minimum. The light transmission factor of the sign panel shall provide a letter to backgtound brightness ratio of between 10 to 1 and 20 to 1. The luminance of the background shall not vary by more than 40 percent from the average of background brightness reading. The luminance of the letters, symbols and arrows shall not vary by more than 20 percent from the average brightness reading of letters, symbols and arrows. The sign panels shall be translucent panels of high impact resistant plastic of one of the following types: 3. a) b) Polycarbonate resin. c) Cellulose acetate butyrate plastic. d) Paint on the outside of the plastic shall be protected by a plastic film which shall seal the front surface of the panel and filter out ultraviolet radiation. Paint shall be acrylic plastic type. e) All surfaces shall be free of blemishes in the plastic or coating that may impair the serviceability or detract from the general appearance and color matching of the sign. 9 The white or green color shall not fade or darken when the sign is exposed to an accelerated test of ultraviolet light which is equivalent to 2 years of outdoor exposure. The green color of the sign, when not illuminated, shall conform to Color No. 14109 of Federal Standard 595B. g) The sign panels shall not crack or shatter when a 25.4 mm (1") diameter, steel ball with a mass of 67 grams (4 oz.) is dropped from a height of 2.6 m (8.5') above the sign panel to any point of the sign panel. The panels shall be lying in a horizontal position and supported within their frame for this test. Gaskets.- On Type A signs, gaskets shall be installed between the sign panel frame and the fixture housing to prevent the entrance of water between the frame and the fixture housing. Gaskets shall be uniform and even textured and shall be the closed cell, sponge neoprene type, designed for use at temperatures between -20°C(-4"F) and +70°C (158°F). Gaskets shall be neatly applied to thoroughly degreased, clean surfaces with a suitable heat-resistant adhesive which will not allow the gaskets to slip at temperatures between -20°C and +70"C. Ballasts.- Ballasts shall be of the high power factor type and shall be capable of starting the lamps at -20°C (-4°F) and above. Ballasts for Type A signs shall be rated at 200 mA. Ballasts for Type B signs shall be rated at 430 mA. Ballasts shall be listed by UL or ETL for operation on 11 0 to 125 V, 60 Hz circuits, and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Standard: C 82.1 and ANSI Standard: C 82.2. A separate ballast shall be provided for each lamp. Lampholders - Lampholders shall be listed by UL or ETL for outdoor use, shall be provided with silver coated contacts and waterproofed entrance leads for use with a rapid-start fluorescent lamp. Removal of the lamp from the socket shall de-energizedenergize the primary of the ballast. Each lamp holderlampholder shall be provided with a heat-resistant, circular cross section, partially re- cessed neoprene ring to seal against the lamp ends and protect electrical contacts from moisture and dirt or other injurious elements. One lampholder for each lamp shall be of the spring-loaded type. The distance between the face of the lampholders for each lamp shall provide a compression of at least 2.5 mm (0.10") on the spring-type lampholder when the lamp is in place. The lamp shall have positive mechanical and electrical contact when the lamp is in place. The socket on the spring- type lampholder shall have sufficient travel to permit installation of the lamp. Springs for - lampholders shall not be part of the current carrying circuit. Lampholders shall match lamp requirements and shall not increase cathode filament circuit resistance by more than 0.10 R. Lamps.- Lamps shall be of the types shown on the plans and shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard: C 78. Terminal Blocks.-All wiring connections in the fixture shall be terminated on molded, phenolic, barrier type, terminal blocks rated at 15 A, 1000 V, and shall have integral type, white, waterproof marking strips. All current carrying parts of the terminal block shall be insulated from the fixture with Glass fiber reinforced acrylated resin. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 231 of 414 integral plugs or strips to provide an insulating value in excess of the line-to-ground flashover voltage. If the Contractor elects to use sectionalized terminal blocks, each section shall be provided with an integral barrier on each side and shall be capable of rigid mounting and alignment. Terminal screws shall be size No. 10, minimum. Fuses.-Fuses shall be Type 3AG, miniature, slow blowing type with appropriate current and voltage ratings. Fuseholder shall be a panel-mounting type with threaded or bayonet type knob which grips the fuse tightly for extraction. A separate fuse shall be provided for each ballast. 10. Weep Holes.- Screened weep holes shall be provided at strategic locations in all members subject to the collection of moisture. Weep holes shall be shielded to prevent light leakage from the fixture. 11. Fasteners.- All fasteners, screws, and hardware shall be of passive stainless steel (Type 302 or 304) or aluminum Type 6060-T6. 12. Mounting Assemblies.-The top of the fixture housing shall have 2 free-swinging mounting brackets. Each of the brackets shall be adjustable vertically for leveling the sign to either a straight or curved mast arm. The bracket assembly shall permit the fixture to swing perpendicular to the sign panel. Hinge pins for the free-swinging brackets shall have a minimum diameter of 6 mm (0.25"). At least 4.6 m (1 5') clearance shall be provided between the bottom of the fixture and the roadway. 13. Message.- The message, as shown on the plans, shall be displayed on both sign panels. If not shown on the plans, the message, and the size of symbols or arows will be furnished by the Engineer at the request of the Contractor. Unless shown otherwise, letters shall be 200 mm (8") upper case and 150 mm (6") lower case, Series E. 14. Mass.- The total mass of the complete sign assembly, including lamps, ballasts, mounting brackets and appurtenances shall not exceed 30 kg. 15. Conductors.- All fixture conductors shall be UL or ETL listed appliance wiring material (AWM) stranded copper wire with 0.7 mm (28 mils), minimum, thermoplastic insulation, rated at 1000 volts and rated for use at 90°C. Conductors shall be No. 16, minimum, and shall match the color coding of the ballast leads. The size of conductors from the sign disconnect to the fuse block shall be as shown on the plans. All conductors within the fixture shall be secured with easily removable spring cross straps (not clamped) in the chassis or fixture. Straps shall be installed not more than 300 mm (12") apart. Stranded copper conductors connected to screw type terminals shall terminate in approved crimp type ring connectors. Splices will not be permitted within the fixture unless approved in writing by the Engineer. 16. Equipment List and Drawings.- Within 15 days following approval of contract, the Contractor shall submit 3 sets of shop drawings and a list of equipment and materials he proposes to install, as specified in Section 2-5, "Plans and Specifications." The shop drawings shall show the message for each sign and shall include the size of letters, symbols or arrows, as shown on the plans or as furnished by the Engineer. The list of equipment shall include the name of the manufacturer of all materials and sufficient detail to identify the materials. If requested, the Contractor shall supply, without cost to the Agency, sufficient samples of materials to be used in the fabrication of the sign, or a complete sign assembly, to permit adequate testing and evaluation of conformance to the specified requirements. 9. 209-6.07 Photoelectric Controls. Photoelectric controls, as specified in these special provisions or as shown on the plans, shall be capable of switching multiple lighting systems directly. Type IV photoelectric control shall be used unless otherwise shown on the plans or required by these special provisions and shall be installed in a receptacle integral with the luminaire. 1. Type I photoelectric control shall consist of a remote photoelectric unit and a test switch housed in an enclosure. 2. Type II photoelectric control shall consist of a remote photoelectric unit, a separate contactor located in a service equipment enclosure, and a test switch located in the service equipment enclosure . unless shown otherwise. 3. Type Ill photoelectric control shall consist of a remote photoelectric unit, and a separate contactor and a test switch housed in an enclosure. 4. Type IV photoelectric control shall consist of a photoelectric unit which plugs into an EEI-NEMA twist lock. - 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 232 of 414 209-6.07A Types. - The types of photoelectric controls shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3. receptacle integral with the luminaire. Type V photoelectric control shall consist of a photoelectric unit, contactor and test switch located in a service equipment enclosure. A switch to permit manual operation of the lighting circuit shall be provided for each Type I, Type II, Type Ill, and Type V photoelectric control. Switches shall be of the single-hole mounting toggle type, single-pole, single-throw, rated at 12 A and a voltage rating to match the circuit. Switches shall be furnished with an indicating nameplate reading "Auto-Test" and shall be connected in parallel with the load contacts of the photoelectric unit. Test switch shall not have an "OFF" position. Photoelectric units for Types I, II and Ill photoelectric controls, shall be pole-top mounted unless otherwise specified. . .4. 209-6.078 Equipment Details. Equipment details shall conform to the following: 209-6.078(1) Photoelectric Unit. The photoelectric unit shall provide an output in response to changing light levels. Components of the unit shall not require periodic replacement. Units shall have a "tum-on" between 10 and 50 lux (one and 5 footcandles) and a 'turn-off at between 1.5 and 5 times "tum-on." Measurements shall be by the procedures set forth in EEI-NEMA Standards for Physical and Electrical Interchangeability of Light-Sensitive Control Devices Used in the Control of Roadway Lighting. Photoelectric controls, except Type IV and Type V, shall be furnished with a 100 mm (4) minimum inside diameter pole-top mounting adaptor containing a terminal block and with cable supports or clamps to support pole wires. The photoelectric unit receptacle shall be the EEI-NEMA type. Mounting brackets shall be used where pole-top mounting is not possible. Photoelectric controls shall be installed at the locations shown on the plans and oriented as directed by the Engineer. For switching 480 V, 60 Hz circuits, a 100 V A, minimum, 480/120-volt transformer shall be installed in the contactor enclosure to provide 120 volts for the photoelectric control unit. Where more than one photoelectric unit is to be installed at the same location, a single transformer, with a volt-ampere rating capable of handling the total controlled load, may be used. Photoelectric units shall be screened to prevent artificial light from causing cycling. The photoelectric unit shall also conform to the following: 1. The supply voltage rating shall be 60 Hz, 105-1 30 V, 21 0-240 V, or 105-240 V, as specified. 2. The load rating shall be 800 W minimum, incandescent, mercury or fluorescent. 3. The operating temperature range shall be from -29°C (-20°F) to 65°C (150°F). 4. The power consumption shall be less than 10 W. 5. The unit shall be housed in a weatherproof enclosure. 6. The base of the unit shall be provided with a 3-prong, EEI-NEMA standard, twist-lock plug mounting. 7. Units shall be provided with a "fail-on" feature. 209-6.07B(2) Contactor. The contactor shall have contacts rated to switch the specified lighting load and shall be normally open, unless otherwise specified. The contactor shall be either the mechanical armature type or the mercury displacement type. The contacts of the mechanical armature type contactor shall be either fine silver, silver alloy, or superior alternative material. The contactor shall have a minimum rating of 30 A, per contact, inductive load. 209-6.07B(3) Contactor and Test Switch Housing. The enclosure for Type1 and Type Ill photoelectric controls shall be NEMA Type 3R. The enclosure shall be provided with a factory applied rust resistant prime coat and finish coat. Two applications of paint to match the color of the standard shall be applied as specified in Section 209-2.16, "Painting." The enclosure may be hotdip galvanized in lieu of painting. A minimum of 65 mm (2'/2") shall be provided between contactor terminals and end of enclosure for wiring connections. The enclosure shall be mounted on the same standard as the photoelectric unit at a height of approximately 1.8 m (6') above the base. 209-6.078(4) Wiring. Conductors between the photoelectric unit and an external contactor shall be No. 14 and shall be run inside the lighting standard, or in conduit, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 233 of 414 209-6.07B(5) Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks shall be rated at 25 A, 600 VI shall be molded from phenolic or nylon material and shall be the barrier type with plated brass screw terminals and integral type marking strips. 209-6.09 Transformers. Multiple to multiple and series to multiple transformers shall be of the single- phase, dry type designed for operation on a 60 Hz supply. 209-6.09A Electrical Requirements. Transformer ratings shall be 120/480 volts, 240/480 volts or 480/120 volts for multiple to multiple units and 6.6 All20 volts or 6.6 A1480 volts for series to multiple units or other ratings as shown on the plans. Secondary 480-volt windings shall be center tapped. Volt- ampere ratings shall be as shown on the plans. Transformer efficiency shall exceed 95 percent for multiple to multiple units and 80 percent for series to multiple units. Secondary voltage regulation and tolerance shall be *3 percent from half load to full load for multiple to multiple units and +10 percent (maximum) at no load to k3 percent at full load for series to multiple units. Transformers shall have a decal showing a connection diagram. The diagram shall show either color coding or tagging of wires with primary (Hl, H2) or secondary (X1 , X2) markers, and shall also show the primary and secondary voltage and volt-ampere rating. 209-6.098 Physical Requirements. External leads for multiple to multiple and series to multiple secondary connections shall be Type USE, No. 10, rated 600 volts AC. Primary conductors for series to multiple transformers shall be rated for use on 5000-volt AC circuits. Transformer leads shall extend a minimum of 300 mm (1 2") from the case. Transformer insulation shall be NEMA 185°C or better. Series to multiple transformers shall withstand the application of 12 000 volts AC from core to primary coil and from coil to coil for a one minute period. Series to multiple transformer secondaries and multiple to multi- ple transformers shall withstand the application of 2200 volts AC from core to coils and, for multiple units only, from coil to coil for a one minute period. The above tests shall be made immediately after operation of the transformer at full load for 24 hours. Non-submersible transformers shall be provided with metal half-shell coil protection, shall have moisture resistant, synthetic varnish impregnated windings and shall be suitable for outdoor operation in a rain tight enclosure. Each transformer to be installed in a pull box shall be the submersible type and shall be provided with a handle and a hanger. 209-6.09C Submersible Type Transformers. Submersible type transformers shall be securely encased in a rugged corrosion resistant, watertight case and shall withstand a 5day test submerged in 600 mm (2') of salt water (2 percent salt by mass) with 12-hour on and off periods. The operating periods shall be at full load. Leads of submersible transformers shall be brought out through one or more sealed hubs and shall be secured in a manner which will withstand a 450-N (100 Ib) static pull without loosening or leaking. 209-6.1 1 Falsework Lighting. Falsework lighting shall consist of lighting to illuminate the pavement, portals and pedestrian walkways at or under openings in the falsework required for traffic. Lighting to provide pavement and portal illumination shall be provided at the locations shown on the plans or specified in these special provisions. Lighting to provide pedestrian walkway illumination shall be provided at all pedestrian openings through or under falsework. 209-6.11A General. The Contractor shall submit a plan of the proposed lighting installations and shall not commence falsework opening construction until those plans have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. Approval will be made in accordance with Section 2-5, "Plans and Specifications." The Contractor shall design falsework lighting so that required maintenance can be performed with a minimum of inconvenience to public traffic. Closing of traffic lanes for routine maintenance will not be permitted on roadways with posted speed limits in excess of 25 miles per hour. Illumination of pavement under falsework with portals less than 45 m (150') apart and illumination of falsework portals shall be provided only during the hours of darkness as defined in Division 1, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code. Photoelectric switches shall be used to control those falsework lighting systems. Illumination of pavement under falsework with portals 45 m (150') or more apart and illumination of all pedestrian - @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 234 of 414 openings through falsework shall be provided 24 hours per day. All lighting fixtures shall be aimed in such a manner as to preclude glare to oncoming motorists. Type NMC cable with No. 12 minimum, conductors with ground wire shall be used. The cable shall be fastened to the supporting structure at sufficient intervals to adequately support the cable and within 300 mm (12") from every box or fitting. All conductors within 2.4 m (8') of ground shall be enclosed in a Size 16, or larger metal conduit. Each illumination system shall be on a minimum of one separate branch circuit at each bridge location. Each branch circuit shall be fused, not to exceed 20 A. For falsework lighting, the Contractor shall arrange with the serving utility to complete service connections. Energy, line extension, service, and service hookup costs shall be paid by the Contractor. Upon completion of the project or when directed by the Engineer, falsework lighting equipment shall become the properly of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site of the work. The Contractor may propose a lighting plan which will provide light intensities equivalent to the systems specified herein. The Contractor shall supply sufficient data to permit evaluation of alternative methods. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 209-6.1 1 B Pavement Illumination. For illumination of pavement at vehicular openings through falsework the following shall apply: Lighting fixtures shall be provided with WFL commercial type flood lamp holder with protective covers. Fixtures shall be fully adjustable with brackets and locking screws and shall permit mounting directly to a standard metal junction box. Lamps shall be medium-base R-40 flood lamps and shall be 150 W minimum. A continuous row of the type of fixtures required shall be installed at the location and spacing as shown on the plans or as specified in these special provisions. The fixtures shall be installed beneath the falsework structure, with the end fixtures not further than 3 m (10') inside the portal faces. Fixtures shall be installed and energized as a first order of work after the members supporting them have been erected. Fixtures along the sides of the opening shall be placed no more than 1.2 m (4') behind or 600 mm (2') in front of the roadway face of the temporary railing. Mounting heights of these fixtures shall be be- tween 3.6 m (12') and 5 m (16') above the roadway surface and shall present an unobstructed light pattern on the pavement. 209-6.1 1C Portal Illumination. For illumination of falsework portals the following shall apply: 1. 2. 3. 4. On each side of each entrance portal, clearance guides consisting of plywood sheets, 1.2 m (4') wide by 2.4 m (8') high, shall be fastened vertically facing traffic with the bottom of the panel 1.0 m (3) to 1.2 m (4') above the roadway. The center of the panel shall be located approximately one meter (3') horizontally behind the roadway face of the railing. The panels shall be freshly painted for each installation with not less than 2 applications of flat white paint, furnished and applied by the Contractor. Testing of paint will not be required. When ordered by the Engineer, in order to improve the general appearance of the painted surfaces herein described, the Contractor shall repaint designated areas and that painting will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-3, "Extra Work." Falsework portals shall be illuminated on the side facing traffic with 150-W, minimum, PAR reflector flood lamps mounted on the structure directly over each vertical support adjacent to the traveled way, as needed to uniformly illuminate the exterior falsework beam, the clearance guides and the overhead clearance sign. Each lamp shall be supported approximately 5 m (16') above the pavement and approximately 1.8 m (6') in front of the portal face, the exact position to be as directed by the Engineer. The above specified portal lighting and clearance guides shall be installed on the day that vertical members are erected. - 209-6.1 1 D Pedestrian Walkway Illumination. For illumination of pedestrian openings through or under falsework, the following shall apply: 1. Fixtures shall be flush mounted in the overhead protection shield, and shall be equipped with a clear 2. Lamps shall be standard incandescent 100 W, 120 V. polycarbonate diffuser lens, which is damage resistant. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 235 of 414 3. Fixtures shall be centered over the passageway at intervals of not more than 4.5 m (1 5') with the end 4. Pedestrian passageway light systems shall be installed as a first order of work after the overhead fixtures not more than 2 m (7') inside the end of the pedestrian openings. protection shield is erected. 209-7 REMOVING, REINSTALLING OR SALVAGING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 209-7.01 Removing Electrical Equipment. Attention is directed to Section 7-9, "Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements." Existing electrical equipment shown on the plans or specified in these special provisions to be removed and not reused or salvaged, and pull boxes, conduit and detector frames not reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the street right of way in accordance with the provisions in 300-1, "Clearing and Grubbing," except, if not interbring with other construction, underground conduit may be abandoned in place after all conductors have been removed. Care shall be exercised in salvaging equipment so that it will not be damaged or destroyed and will remain in its existing condition whenever possible. Mast arms shall be removed from standards. Luminaires, signal heads, and signal mounting assemblies shall be removed from standards and mast arms. Attention is directed to the provisions in Section 7-9, "Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements" and 300-1.2, "Preservation of Property." The Contractor will be required to repair or replace, at the Contractor's expense, any electrical equipment to be salvaged which, as determined by the Engineer, has been damaged or destroyed by reason of the Contractor's operations. Attention is directed to the provisions in Section 209-2.03, "Foundations," regarding foundations to be abandoned or removed. Holes resulting from removing pull boxes and detector frames shall be filled with material equivalent to the surrounding material. 209-7.02 Reinstalling Removed Electrical Equipment. When removed electrical equipment is to be reinstalled, the Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary materials and equipment, including signal mounting assemblies, anchor bolts, nuts, washers and concrete as required to complete the new installation. All traffic signal and flashing beacon faces to be reinstalled or to be part of a modified system shall be cleaned and relamped. All luminaires and sign lighting fixtures to be reinstalled shall be cleaned and relamped. Existing materials required to be relocated and found to be unsatisfactory by the Engineer shall be replaced by new material and the cost therefor will be paid for as extra work as provided in Section 3-3, "Extra Work." 209-8 PAYMENT 209-8.01 Payment. The contract lump sum price or prices paid for signal, ramp metering, flashing beacon, sign illumination, traffic monitoring station, highway advisory radio systems, closed circuit television systems, or combinations thereof; for modifying or removing those systems; for temporary systems; or the lump sum or unit prices paid for various units of those systems; the unit price paid each for street lighting; or the lump sum or per meter price paid for conduit of the various sizes, types and installation methods listed in the Engineer's Estimate shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in furnishing and installing, modifying, or removing the systems, combinations or units thereof, as shown on the plans, as specified in these specifications and the special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer, including any necessary pull boxes (except when the type required is shown as a separate contract item); excavation and backfill; concrete foundations (except when shown as a separate contract item); pedestrian barricades; furnishing and installing illuminated street name signs; installing Agency-furnished sign panels on pedestrian barricades, on flashing beacon standards, and on traffic signal mast arms; restoring sidewalk, pavement and appurtenances damaged or destroyed during construction; salvaging existing materials; and making all required tests. Full compensation for all additional materials and labor, not shown on the plans or specified, which are necessary to complete the installation of the various systems, shall be considered as included in the 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 236 of 414 prices paid for the systems, or units thereof, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor, except as provided in Section 209-1.05, "Maintaining Existing and Temporary Electrical Systems." Surface to be Painted Temporary Railing type (K) When shown as a contract item, the contract price paid per meter for cast-in-drilled-hole concrete pile (signal foundation) shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing reinforced concrete pile foundations of the size shown on the Engineer's Estimate, including drilling holes, disposing of the material resulting from drilling holes, furnishing and placing anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing steel, complete in place, as shown on the plans, and as specified in these specifications and the special provisions and as directed by the Engineer. Pre-Treatment / Surface Primer Finish Coats Preparation Abrasive Blast Cleaning to a None Two coats white Acrylic Roughened, Textured Appearance Emulsion Paint (I) When shown as a contract item, non-reinforced portland cement concrete foundations will be measured and paid for in the manner as provided in Section 303-1 .I 1, 'Payment." When shown as a separate contract item by the lump sum or per bid item linear measurement, interconnection conduit and conductor shall include all interconnection conductors, but shall only include conduit and pull boxes containing interconnection conductors and no other conductors. The quantity of interconnection conduit and conductor to be paid for by the lump sum bid or the bid item linear measurement shall be the length of that conduit. Compensation for conduit containing interconnection conductors and other conductors shall be considered as included in the contract price paid for the item requiring the other conductors. Full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining and removing falsework lighting equipment shall be considered as included in the contract prices paid for the items of work involved in the structure which requires the falsework lighting and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. SECTION 210 - PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 210-1 PAINT 21 0-1.5 Paint Systems. Add the following to Table 21 0-1.5(A) 210-1.6 Paint for Traffic Striping, Pavement Marking, and Curb Marking. Modify as follows: Paint for traffic lane lines, turn pocket lines, edge lines, channelizing lines, bike lane lines, chevrons, and curbs shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to CALTRANS Specification No. PTWB-01. Paint for pavement legends, pavement symbols, pavement arrows, cross walks, parking stall markings and stop bars shall be alkyd thermoplastic conforming to CALTRANS Specification No. 8010-19A. Glass beads shall be applied to the surface of the rapid dry water borne paint and the molten thermoplastic material and shall conform to the requirements of CALTRANS Specification No. 8010-004 (Type 11). CALTRANS Specifications for water borne paint, thermoplastic material and glass beads may be obtained from the CALTRANS Transportation Laboratory, P.O. Box 191 28, Sacramento, CA 95819, telephone number (91 6) 227-7000. 210-3 GALVANIZING Add the following section: 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 237 of 414 21 0-3.6 Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities. The requirements of this section shall pertain only rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 3.2 mm (’18”) thick or thicker, shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 123, except that complete seal welding of tightly contacting surfaces of these products prior to galvanizing is required only where seal welding is shown on the plans or specified in these special provisions. Except for pre-galvanized standard pipe, galvanizing of material 3.2 mm (’/By) thick or thicker shall be performed after fabrication into the largest practical sections. At the option of the Contractor, material thinner than 3.2 mm (’/87 shall be galvanized either before fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 525M. Coating Designation 2600, or after fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 123, except that the weight of zinc coating shall average not less than 365 g per square meter (1.2 oz. per e) of actual surface area with no individual specimen having a coating weight of less than 305 g per square meter (1 .O oz. per I?). to the preparation and galvanizing of traffic signal facilities. Galvanizing of products fabricated from i ., Galvanizing of standard pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 53. Galvanizing will not be required for stainless steel, monel metal and similar corrosion resistant parts. Fabrication shall include all operations such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling, bending, welding and riveting. All welded areas shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to galvanizing to remove all slag or other material that would interfere with the adherence of the zinc. When it is necessary to straighten any sections after galvanizing, the work shall be performed without damage to the zinc coating. Galvanizing of iron and steel hardware and nuts and bolts, when specified or shown on the plans, shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 153, except whenever threaded studs, bolts, nuts, and washers are specified to conform to ASTM Designation: A 307, A 325, A 325M, A 449, A 563, A 563M, or F 436 and zinc coating is required, they shall be hot-dip zinc coated or mechanically zinc coated in accordance with the requirements of the ASTM Designations. Unless otherwise specified, galvanizing shall be performed after fabrication. Components of bolted assemblies shall be galvanized separately before assembly. Tapping of nuts or other internally threaded parts to be used with zinc coated bolts, anchor bars or studs shall be done after galvanizing and shall conform to the requirements for thread dimensions and ovettapping allowances in ASTM Designation: A 563 or A 563M. When specified, painting of zinc coated surfaces shall be in accordance with the procedures in Section 210-1, “Paint.” Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of the zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged areas and removing all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with 2 applications of unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to the provisions in Section 210-3.5, “Repair of Damaged Zinc Coating.“ Aerosol cans shall not be used. SECTION 21 1 - SOILS AND AGGREGATE TESTS 21 1-2 COMPACTION TESTS. 21 1-2.1 Laboratory Maximum Density. Add the following: Base will be performed in accordance with Calif. Test 21 6. Compaction tests for Crushed Aggregate SECTION 212 - LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION MATERIALS e 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 238 of 414 21 2-1 LANDSCAPE MATERIALS 21 2-1.2.3 Commercial Fertilizer. Add the following: Preplant fertilizer shall be granular commercial fertilizer 7-7-7 or approved equal. Postplant fertilizer shall be 12-4-6 or approved equal with Ca, Fe, Zn, and Mn and with the majority of nitrogen in nonammoniac form to prevent acidification of soil. Planting tablets shall be compressed fertilizer tablets with a 20-10-5 analysis. Hydroseed fertilizer shall be long- lasting, controlled-release, plastic-coated, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application with approved equipment, and shall contain the minimum available percentages of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, potash and sulfur required by tables 212-1.2.5.1(A) through 212-1.2.5.2(A). 212-1.2.4 Organic Soil Amendment. Add the following: For all types of Organic Soil Amendment mulch materials produced from pine trees grown in Alameda, Monterey, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz or San Mateo Counties shall not be used in the Work. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall conform to the requirements for type 1 Organic Soil Amendment except as modified hereinafter. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall be a wood or rice residual product derived from the bark of pine, white fir, or red fir or cedar or redwood shavings or rice hulls. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall be manufactured from clean wood, free from clods coarse objects and rocks and shall conform to the properties shown in Table 21 2-1.2.4(8): TABLE 212-1.2.4(8) SOIL AMENDMENT PROPERTIES (1) (As Required by Table 212-1.2.4(A) SSPWC) For all types of Organic Soil Amendment the Contractor shall supply the Engineer a sample of the proposed amendment accompanied by an analytical analysis from a qualified agricultural laboratory certifying compliance to the requirements herein. Qualified agricultural laboratories shall have an on- going quality assurance program that fulfills the requirements of the most recent version of the "Western States Laboratory Proficiency Testing Program Soil and Plant Analytical Methods". Certificates of compliance shall contain a statement attesting that the organic soil amendment meets the requirements of these specifications and that the testing agricultural laboratory does fulfill the requirements of Western States Laboratory Proficiency Testing Program Soil and Plant Analytical Methods". Said submittal shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3. 212-1.2.5 Mulch. Add the following: The terms Hydroseeding and Hydroseed shall be synonymous with Hydraulic for the purposes of Section 212. Disturbed Areas shall be mulched, fertilized and seeded using method B. Mulch shall be manufactured from virgin wood cellulose fiber mulch and shall not contain growth or germination inhibitors. When mixed with water, the mulch shall remain in uniform suspension and when blended with the seed, fertilizer, and other approved additives, shall form homogeneous slurry. When applied, the fibers shall form a moisture absorbing membrane with adequate percolation properties sufficient to allow one hundred percent of water applied at the rate of 3.1 liters per minute per square meter (0.075 gallons per minute per square foot) onto a surface inclined at a 2:l (horizontal: vertical) slope to pass through the membrane. A non-phyto-toxic wetting agent shall be . 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 239 of 414 added to the slurry mixture. A water soluble, non-toxic green dye shall be added in sufficient quantity to clearly delineate the planted areas. When required, binder shall be added to the slurry mixture and shall be "CPA 4000", 'AZTAC", "Ecology Control", 'M-Binder", or approved equal. Virgin Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Add the following section: 212-1.2.5.1 Disturbed Area Mulch Fertilizer and Additives. In addition to seed mix shown in the table for Disturbed Areas the slurry mixture shall be applied at the rates shown in Table 212-1.2.5.1(A) grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) 225 (2000) TABLE 212-1.2.5.1(A) DISTURBED AREA MULCH FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES ComDonent I Application Rate Sulfate, Plus 15% Soil Sulfur Wetting Agent Green Colorant I Per Manufacturer Recommendation Per Manufacturer Recommendation Binder I 7 I (60) Fertilizer (16-20-0) Ammonium Phosphate I 35 (300) Add the following section: 212-1.2.6 Herbicides and Pesticides. Shall be used in their appropriate applications with strict adherence to manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Postemergent herbicide for all areas shall be Glyphosate, N-(phosphonomethyl) glycine, in the form of its isopropylamine salt such as Roundup Pro, Diquat, Montar, or approved equal. Preemergent herbicide for shrubs and groundcover areas planted from flats shall be Treflan, Surffan, Eptan, or approved equal. ' Add the following section: 212-1.2.7 General Soil Conditioners. Agricultural-grade gypsum shall be a calcium sulfate (CaS04 H20) product - 94.3 percent. 90 percent shall pass a 50-mesh screen. Control of dust during application is mandatory. Iron Sulfate shall be ferrous sulfate in pelletized or granular form containing not less than 20.0 percent iron expressed as metallic iron. Iron Sulfate pellets shall be of size and gradation such that 98 percent is retained on a 10-mesh screen. Add the following section: 212-1.2.7 Stabilizing Emulsion. Stabilizing emulsion shall be a concentrated liquid chemical that forms a plastic film upon drying and allows water and air to penetrate. The film shall be nonflammable and shall have an effective life of at least one year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be nontoxic to plant and animal life and nonthinking to concrete or painted surfaces. In the cured state the stabilizing emulsion shall not be reemulsifiable. The material shall be registered with, and licensed by the California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an "auxiliary soil chemical". Stabilizing emulsion shall be miscible with water at time of mixing and application. 212-1.3 Seed. Add following: The quantity of pure live seed supplied shall meet or exceed the quantity shown in the specified mixes. Seed shall not contain more than 0.5 percent weed seed by volume Seed types shall be as specified on the plans and planting legends, and shall be applied at the rates indicated. All brand-name, patented seed must be received by Contractor in original manufacturer's bag. Seed shall be received by Contractor in separate containers specifying kind, quantity, purity, and germination. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with each seed bag label used in the Work. Add the following section: 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 240 of 414 212-1.3.1 Seed for Disturbed Areas. than the seed varieties shown in Table 212-1.3.1(A). Hydroseeding mix for Disturbed Areas shall consist of no less Arternisa californica, California Sagebrush Encelia californica, California Encelia Erlogonum fasciculanon, California Buckwheat Eschscholzia califomica, California Poppy Lotus scoparius, Deerweed Lupinus succulemus, Arroyo Lupine Salvia apiana, White Sage Salvia melifera, Black Sage Sisyrinchium bellum, Blue-Eyed Grass Total Ibs Seed/Acre TABLE 212-1.3.1(A) grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) 0.25 2 0.45 4 1.25 10 0.12 1 0.35 3 0.35 3 0.25 2 0.25 2 0.25 2 3.52 29 SEED FOR DISTURBED AREAS Seed Variety I Application Rate The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a statement from the vendor that the order for the seed required for this contract has been received and accepted by the vendor. The statement shall be furnished not less than 60 days prior to applying seeds. The statement from the vendor shall also include the names and quantity of seed ordered and the anticipated date of delivery. 212-1.4.1 General. Add the following: Plants shall be the variety and size shown on the plans or in the Special Provisions and shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours before each plant delivery so that the Engineer can inspect the plants. The scientific and common names of plants herein specified shall conform to the approved names given in “A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington” published by the University of California, Division of Agriculture Sciences, Publication 4091 (1979). Each group of plant materials delivered on site shall be labeled clearly as to species and variety. All patented plants (cultivars) required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent attached. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are to be planted. Evidence that clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer. All plants furnished by the Contractor shall be true to type or name as shown on the plans and shall be tagged identifying the plants by species or variety; however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by the Engineer and the Engineer‘s decision shall be final. Plants shall be individually tagged or tagged in groups by species or variety. Carpobrotus cuttings need not be tagged. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants, and certificates shall be delivered to the Engineer. Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely, and well-rooted, and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown, free from insect pests and disease, and shall be grown in nurseries which have been inspected by the State Department of Food and Agriculture and have complied with the regulations thereof. The Engineer is the sole judge as to acceptability of each plant. Vigorous, healthy, well-proportioned .plants are the intent of this specification. Plants which are even moderately “overgrown”, or are showing signs of decline or lack of vigor, are subject to rejection. The size of the plants will be as shown on the plans. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Engineer, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, soil amendments shall be increased proportionately. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected, and immediately removed from the site and replaced with new plants by the Contractor at the 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 241 of 414 Contractor's expense. The Engineer reserves the right to change the species, variety, and/or sizes of plant material to be furnished, provided that the cost of such plant changes do not exceed the cost of plants in the original bid, and with the provision that the Contractor shall be notified in writing, at least 60 days before the planting operation has commenced. No plant shall be transported to the planting area that is not thoroughly wet throughout the ball of earth surrounding the roots. Any plant that, in the opinion of the Engineer, has a damaged root ball or is dry or in a wilted condition when delivered to the planting area will not be accepted, and shall be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Each plant shall be handled and packed in the approved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn. Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than 2 plants nor more than 2 percent of the total number of plants of each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than 2 plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Agency reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will not be paid for. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when plants are to be shipped to the project site. The notification shall be given not less than 10 days prior to the actual shipment date. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the location where cuttings are to be taken at least 10 days prior to taking the cuttings and shall be responsible for all permit and inspection fees involved in obtaining cuttings. 212-1.5.3 Tree Stakes. Modify as follows: Tree stakes shall be 50mm (2") diameter turned lodgepole pine, pointed on their driven end. Tree ties shall be Wonder Tree, Lawson Landscape Products, or an approved equal. Add the following section: 212-1.8 Root Barriers. Root barriers shall be no less than Im (39") in width. Root barriers shall be "Biobarrier", as manufactured by Reemay, Inc., 70 Old Hickory Boulevard, Old Hickory, TN 97138, Phone 615-847-7000 or approved equal. 212-2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS 212-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use with Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fittings, add the following: Except as provided in this section, all buried piping in the irrigation system shall be installed with underground utility marking tape conforming to the requirements of section 207-21 and identifying it as reclaimed water. Intermittent pressure lines (lines on the downstream side of a controller valve that will not be subject to constant pressure) will not require underground utility marking tape. All PVC pipe used for irrigation systems shall be colored purple by the addition of a dye integral to the PVC. Painted pipe will not be accepted. Pressure mainline piping for sizes 50 mm (2") and larger shall be PVC having a pressure rating of 21 70 kPa (31 5 PSI), SDR. 13.5. Stenciled pipe is required for all irrigation system piping including portions not required to be marked with underground utility marking tape. All pp shall have stenciling appearing on both sides of the pipe with the marking "Reclaimed Water" in 16 mm ( /a") high letters repeated every 300 mm (12"). PVC non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC Schedule 30. Add the following section: 212-2.1.7 Brass Pipe and Fittings. Brass pipe shall be IPS standard weight 125 LB 85 percent copper and 15 percent zinc, trade designation seamless red brass pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM 843-91. Brass pipe fittings and connections shall be Standard 125 LB class 85 percent red brass fittings G 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 242 of 414 and connections. 212-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. Add the following: All valve boxes shall be marked "RCV", 'BV" or 'Qc", "PB" respectively. Remote control valves shall be marked with station numbers embossed on the valve cover with a brass tag. (RCV boxes shall have locking covers.) Other boxes such as pull boxes, etc., shall be marked with appropriate identification. Add the following section: 21 2-2.2.8 Ball Valves. Ball valves shall have bottom-loaded pressure-retaining stems, glass-reinforced 'seats, and reinforced TFE stem packing seals. Valves sizes 13 mm (%I') to 50 mm (2") shall be pressure rated at 4140 kPa (600 PSI) WOG and 1030 kPa (150-PSI) saturated steam. Each valve shall be tested, air under water, in the opened and closed' position by the manufacturer. Ball valve must conform to Federal Specification WW-V-356, Type 11, Class A, Style 3, End Connection A or C. Add the following section: 212-2.2.9 Pressure Regulator. Valve Pressure regulator valve shall be bronze body with screw fitting. Add the following section: 212-2.2.9 Wye Strainers. Wye strainers shall have a cast iron or all-bronze body with a removable stainless steel or monel strainer. Wye strainers shall be capable of withstanding a cold water working pressure of 1034 kPa (150 psi). Wye strainers at backflow preventer assemblies shall be equipped with a gate valve at the outlet. All other wye strainers shall be equipped with a garden valve at the outlet. The strainer screen for the wye strainer in a backflow preventer assembly shall have an open area equal to at least 3 times the cross-sectional area of the pipe based on an iron pipe size and shall be woven wire fabric with 850-pm mesh or perforated sheet with 1.14 mm (0.045") diameter holes. All other wye strainers shall be equipped with 425-pm strainer screens. 212-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment. Add the following: All sprinkler heads are to have factory built-in check valves or a check valve under each head. Check valves shall be of heavy-duty virgin PVC construction with FIP thread inlet and outlet. Internal parts shall be stainless steel and neoprene. Antidrain valves shall be field adjustable against drain out from 1.5 m to 12 m (5' to 40') of head. All sprinkler heads that are without valves in the heads are to have an antidrain valve feature and shall have an excess flow feature, which will automatically stop the flow of water when it exceeds the GPM preset by the manufacturer. Check valves shall be King Bros., Rainbird, or approved equal. 212-2.3 Backflow Preventer Assembly. Add the following: Backflow preventers shall be one of the approved reduced pressure principle devices listed by the California Department of Health Services, Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management, 601 North 7th Street, Mailing Station (MS) 92, P.O. Box 942732, Sacramento, CA 94234-7320. Backflow preventers shall be factory assembled and shall include 2 check valves, one pressure differential relief valve, 2 shut-off valves and 4 test cocks. Backflow preventer and valves shall be the same size as the pipeline in which they are installed, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Backflow preventer shut-off valves shall be manufactured from iron or bronze and shall be either resilient wedged gate valves, resilient seated and fully ported ball valves, or resilient seated butterfly valves. Threaded type shut-off valves shall be provided with a union on one side of each valve. Unions shall be brass or malleable iron. Add the following section: 21 2-2.4.1 Additional Equipment. Contractor shall provide the following items to the Engineer: 1. Two control valve keys. 2. Two wrenches for removing each different type of sprinkler head. 3. Two quick coupler keys. The keys and hose ells shall be of the same manufacturer as the coupling 4. Five keys for opening and locking each automatic controller and enclosure. valve. 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 243 of 41 4 Add the following section: 212-2.5 Flexible Hose. Flexible hose shall be nonrigid polyvinyl chloride (nonrigid PVC) hose conforming to the specifications of ASTM Designation: D 2287, Cell-type 6464500. Wall thicknesses of nonrigid PVC hose shall conform to Table 212-2.5(A) when determined in accordance with ASTM Designation: D 2122. Hose Size-Nominal Minimum Wall Thickness" (Millimeters) (Inches) (Millimeters) (Inches) 3.73 0.147 1s 3.91 0.154 15 20 25 1 4.55 0.179 3 Range (Percent) 12 12 12 212-3 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 212-3.1 General. Add the following: All electrical materials shall conform to the requirements of the 1996 National Electrical Code. 212-3.2.2 Conductors. Add the following: Low voltage electric wiring running from controller to the automatic control valves shall be no smaller than No. 14 solid single conductor, copper wire, 0.015 mm (60 mil) insulation, 0.015 mm (60 mil) neoprene jacket, style UF (Direct Burial), or equal, color code wires to each valve. Neutral wires shall be white, no smaller than No. 12 solid single conductor wire, 0.015 mm (60 mil) insulation, 0.015 mm (60 mil) neoprene jacket, style UF (Direct Burial). 212-3.3 Controller Unit. Add the following: diameter by 3 m (1 0') long stainless steel grounding rod and a 50-ohm resistance lightning arrestor. All controllers shall be grounded by one 19 mm (5/8) Add the following section. 21 2-3.4 irrigation Electrical Service Equipment and Enclosures. incorporate the followina elements: Electrical service equipment shall 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. One 1 OO-amp, 120/240-voIt, single-phase load center, as approved by the Engineer; One 100-amp rated commercial meter socket suitable for the San Diego Gas and Electric Company meter, with provision for test block bypass having a UL listing and EUSERC approval; One 15-amp circuit breaker for each irrigation controller energized by the service; One 20-amp circuit breaker for the duplex receptacle. The design, assembly, grounding, wiring, and components of the irrigation electrical service equipment and enclosure shall meet the requirements of the 1996 edition of the National Electrical Code. Electrical service equipment shall be enclosed in a cabinet constructed entirely of 14-gage, or heavier, 304 stainless steel. The cabinet shall be of welded construction with a brushed finish; anchoring points shall be inside the enclosure. The cabinet shall be HYDROSAFE Model No. HS9, Strong Box, or approved equal. The cabinet shall have a 304 stainless steel interior bulkhead separating the 120/240-volt electrical service section from the irrigation controller section. No wood components shall be used in the enclosure. a 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 244 of 414 10. 11. 12. 13. . 14. 15. Each section of the cabinet shall have full front opening doors with piano hinges, integral keylock and hasp and staple, or other provision, for padlock. The cabinet shall be provided with cross-flow ventilation. Ventilation openings shall be located and designed to preclude rain, irrigation splash, vermin, and insects from entering the cabinet. The controller side door shall have provision for mounting control schematics without the use of adhesives or fasteners. The service side door shall have a clear acrylic plastic window to allow the electrical meter to be read. The cabinet shall have a duplex 15-amp, 120-volt receptacle with ground fault interrupter protection mounted on the interior service side. Concrete footings and pads supporting the Electrical service equipment shall be 56042-3250 and shall be no less than 150 mm (6”) thick. Anchor bolts to secure the service equipment to the concrete pad shall be 10 mm (343“) diameter by 150 mm (e) long hot dip galvanized or stainless steel headed bolts with washers, without sleeves, conforming to section 304-1.7. Anchor bolts to secure the service equipment to the concrete pad shall be embedded in the concrete slab between 65 mm and 100 mm (2%” and 4“). Add the following: 212-4 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS 2124.1 (Type BFM) Materials. Add the following section: 212-4.1.1 Fiber. Fiber shall be produced from natural or recycled (pulp) fiber, such as wood chips or similar wood materials or from newsprint, chipboard, corrugated cardboard or a combination of these processed materials, and shall be free of synthetic or plastic materials. Fiber shall not contain more than 7 percent ash as determined by the Technical Association of the Pulp and Paper Industry (TAPPI) Standard T 413, shall contain less than 250 parts per million boron and shall be otherwise nontoxic to plant or animal life. Fiber shall be thermo-mechanically defibrated from clean whole wood chips, containing a minimum of 25% of fibers averaging 3/8” long, with a minimum of 50% or more retained on a #24 mesh screen. The wood chips shall be processed in such a manner to contain no lead paint, printing ink, varnish, petroleum products, or seed germination inhibitors. Fibers shall not be produced from recycled materials such as sawdust, paper, cardboard, or chlorine bleached paper mill residue. Coloring agents, if used, shall be biodegradable. Fiber shall have a water-holding capacity by mass of not less than 1200 percent. Fiber shall be of such character that the fiber will disperse into a uniform slurry when mixed with water. Water content of the fiber before mixing into slurry shall not exceed 15 percent of the dry mass of the fiber. The percentage of water in the fiber shall be determined by California Test 226. Fiber shall have the moisture content of the fiber marked on the package. Fiber shall be colored to contrast with the area on which the fiber is to be applied, and shall not stain concrete or painted surfaces. 212-4.1.2 Stabilizing Emulsion. Stabilizing emulsion shall be a concentrated liquid chemical that forms a plastic film upon drying and allows water and air to penetrate. The film shall be nonflammable and shall have an effective life of at least one year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be nontoxic to plant and animal life and nonthinking to concrete or painted surfaces. In the cured state the stabilizing emulsion shall not be re-emulsifiable. The material shall be registered with, and licensed by the California, -Department of Food and Agriculture, as an “auxiliary soil chemical”. Stabilizing emulsion shall be miscible with water at time of mixing and application. Stabilizing emulsion shall be nonflammable, non toxic and shall have an effective life of at least one year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be an organic bonding tackifier of high viscosity colloidal polysaccharide with active agents, or a blended hyrdrocolloid-based binder. The stabilizing emulsion may be bonded to the fiber by the manufacturer. The stabilizing emulsion shall not dissolve or disperse upon rewetting @ 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 245 of 414 Add the following section: 2124.2 Straw Matting. 2124.2.1 Materials. Straw matting shall consist of a machine produced mat of 100% grain straw. The straw shall be evenly distributed over the entire area of the blanket. One side of the blanket shall be covered with photodegradable netting and shall be sewn together with a degradable thread. Straw matting shall not be dyed, bleached, or otherwise treated in a manner that will result in toxicity to vegetation. The grain straw shall contain no weed seeds. Each roll is to be packaged separately. Straw matting shall satisfy the following criteria: Properties Limits: Width 48 in (1.2m) minimum, 90 in (2.3m) maximum Weight 0.50 Ibs./syd. (0.3 kg/sm) minimum, 0.75 Ibs./syd. (0.4kg/sm) maximum Mesh Size (netting) 0.75 in X 0.75 in (2cm X 2cm) maximum SECTION 213 - ENGINEERING FABRICS 21 3-2 GEOTEXTILES 213-2.1 General. Add the following: Geotextile types shall be used for the applications listed in Table 2 1 3-2.1 (A): TABLE 213-2.1(A) GEOTEXTILE APPLICATIONS 3 m (IO') Post Spacing I Erosion Control Fence with 1.8 m (6') Post Spacing and No Wire Fencing I 200ws Add the following section: 213-3 EROSION CONTROL SPECIALTIES Add the following section: 213-3.1 Gravel Bags. Gravel bags for the use of temporary erosion control shall be burlap type, filled with no less than 23kg (50 Ibs) of 19 mm (3/4") crushed rock and securely tied closed. Plastic bags are not acceptable. - %? 7/31/02 Contract No. 3907 Page 246 of 414